wm.i 


%"i;  I'^MI  !!>■-■ 


(Lbt  9.  B.  litU  IGibrarg 


Nortli  (Earoltna  Stat?  Hmuerflitg 


Z.  SMITH  REYNOLDS 
FOUNDATION 

COLLECTION  IN 
fiCIENCE  AND  TECHNOLOGY 


5^-.. 


:"<</- 


H-C^ 


THE 


AMERICAN 


FLOWER    GARDEN   COMPANION. 


ADAPTED  TO  THE  NORTHERN  STATES. 


"  Who  loves  a  garden,  loves  agreeu-house  loo. 
Unconscious  of  a  less  propitious  clime, 
There  blooms  exoiic  beauty,  warm  and  snug, 
While  the  winds  whistle,  and  the  snows  descend." 


BY  EDWARD  SAYERS, 

LANDSCAPE  AND  ORNAMENTAL  GABDENEB 


BOSTON: 

JOSEPH    BRECK   AND    COMPANY 
NEW    YORK:— G.   C.   THORBURN. 

1838. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,   in  the  year  133S,  by   EDWARD   SAYERS,  in   the 
Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachuseiis. 


PfCM  of  Tuitle,  Dennett  &  Chisholm, 
17  School  Street,  boston. 


INTRODUCTION. 


In  introducing  the  present  little  treatise  to  the 
reader,  it  may  be  well  to  say  a  few  words  on  the 
object,  plan,  and  mode  of  execution  of  the  work. 
The  "  Flower  Garden  Companion"  is  intended  to 
aid  those  persons  who  are  desirous  to  become  ac- 
quainted with  the  culture  of  flowers.  In  its  compila- 
tion the  aim  has  been,  to  give  within  the  compass  of 
a  convenient  manual  for  reference,  as  much  useful 
matter  as  possible  relative  to  the  subject.  To  this 
end,  each  topic  has  been  separately  treated  and  in  as 
concise  a  manner  as  could  be  done  with  propriety  : 
and  indeed,  in  some  cases  with  a  degree  of  brevity 
that  on  the  first  reading,  to  the  young  practitioner, 
might  produce  a  feeling  of  disappointment  at  the 
apparent  deficiency  of  information  ;  but,  on  a  careful 
reading  of  the  different  articles  it  will  be  found  that 
everything  useful  in  so  small  a  treatise  has  been 
spoken  of ;    and  that,  in  many  instances,  one  article 

acts  as    a  key  to  another. 
1  ^ 


VI  INTRODUCTION. 


In  the  outset,  directions  for  laying  out  the  flower 
garden  are  given,  with  remarks  on  various  useful  and 
ornamental  appendages.  In  treating  of  this  subject, 
I  have  confined  myself  to  the  general  outline,  ^vithout 
entering  into  minute  details,  which  will  much  depend 
on  location  and  circumstances,  as  well  as  upon  the 
taste  and  means  of  the  proprietor. 

The  remarks  on  the  diiferent  stimulants  requisite 
to  plants,  and  how  they  act  on  the  vegetable  system  ; 
with  the  observations  on  the  leaf,  root  and  bud, 
when  fully  understood,  will  be  found  useful  to  the 
young  cultivator.  The  different  methods  of  propa- 
gating plants  have  been  treated  in  the  simplest 
manner,  in  order  that  success  may  reward  those 
who  put  them  in  practice. 

The  second  '^  part"  is  principally  occupied  with 
directions  for  the  culture  of  plants  and  shrubs.  To 
each  class  a  descriptive  list  has  been  appended,  giving 
the  color,  height,  and  time  of  flowering,  of  such 
varieties  as  have  been  found  to  be  best  adapted  to  the 
American  flower  garden.  Tt  should  be  understood 
that  location  and  the  different  treatment  plants  receive 
will  have  great  influence  on  their  color,  height  and 
tinje  of  flowering,  which  I  have  set  down  on  a 
medium  scale.  I  have  introduced  a  monthly  calendar 
at  this  part  of  the  work,  and  some   observations   on 


INTRODUCTION.  Vll 

the  variations  of  plants  and  flowers,  as  color,  motion, 
and  double  flowers. 

The  green-house  being  so  intimately  connected 
with  the  flower  garden,  I  have  devoted  a  considerable 
space  to  that  subject.  Directions  are  given  for  the 
treatment  of  the  different  families  of  green-house 
plants,  as  the  Camellia,  Erica,  etc.  ;  and  descriptive 
lists  of  the  most  valuable  varieties  are  subjoined. 

The  culture  of  plants  in  rooms,  the  management  of 
cut  flowers,  and  a  variety  of  other  matters  having  a 
bearing  upon  the  subject  of  flower-gardening,  consti- 
tute a  miscellany  which  I  trust  will  be  found  inter- 
esting and  useful.  At  the  end  of  the  volume  I  have 
placed  a  glossary  of  the  most  useful  terms  in  botany, 
(for  which  I  am  principally  indebted  to  Stroud,) 
to  enable  young  beginners  to  become  acquainted 
with  the  terminology  of  plants. 

Although  the  "  Companion"  is  professedly  adapted 
to  the  Northern  States,  it  will  be  evident  to  the 
intelhgent  reader  that,  in  regard  to  the  growth  and 
time  of  flowering  of  plants,  some  allowance  must  be 
made  for  the  difference  of  chmate  in  the  various  sec- 
tions of  those  States.  I  have  adopted  the  meridian 
of  New  York  and  Massachusetts  in  giving  the  time 
of  planting  and  flowering  ;  where  the  season  is  earlier 
or  later  than  in  these  States,  a  corresponding  differ- 


Till  INTRODUCTION. 

ence  in  the  time  of  performing  the  various  operations 
of  the  flower  garden  should  be  observed. 

I  must  here  beg  leave  to  acknowledge  ray  obliga- 
tions to  several  practical  gardeners  and  lovers  of 
flowers  for  their  kind  assistance  in  framing  the  lists  of 
plants  and  for  useful  hints  for  this  litde  treatise,  which 
I  send  to  the  world  hoping  it  may  have  a  tendency  to 
throw  some  light  on  the  culture  of  the  flower  garden  ; 
and  should  my  feeble  efforts  in  any  way  give  a  new 
impulse  to  the  zeal  already  manifest  in  the  culture  of 
flowers,  my  earnest  wishes  will  be  fully  answered. 

EDWARD  SAYERS. 


TABLE   OF    CONTENTS. 


PART  1. 

ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  AND  PROPAGATION 

OF    PLANTS. 

CHAPTER  I. 

ON  LAYING  OUT  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN. 

Art.  1.    General  Remarks, 13 

2.  Laving  out  the  Flower  Garden  and  Planting,           -        -  14 

3.  Soi'l  and  Materials, -        -  16 

4.  General  Planting  of  Shrubs  and  Flowers,        -        -        -  16 

5.  Location  or  Position  of  Plants,              -        -         -        -  17 

6.  Plan  and  Management  of  Trellises  and  Arbors,        -        -  18 

7.  Forming  and  Planting  the  Rockerj',              -        -        -  19 

8.  Ornamental  Waters  and  Bridges,             -        -        -        -  20 

CHAPTER   II. 

ON  THE    nutriment  OF  PLANTS. 

Art.  1 .    Preliminary  Remarks,           ------  21 

2.  Food  of  Plants, 22 

3.  Light, 24 

4.  Heat, 25 

5.  Observations  on  the  Roots  of  Plants,            -        -        -  26 

6.  Observation  on  the  Bud,            - 27 

7.  Observations  on  the  Leaf ,            -----  28 

CHAPTER    III. 

ON  THE  PROPAGATION  OF  PLANTS. 

Art.  1.     General  Observations,      -------30 

2.  Propagation  by  Seed,             ._----  31 

3.  Propagation  by  Roots,      - -32 

4.  Propagation  by  Running  Vines  and  Creepers,       -        -  33 

5.  Propagation  by  Cuttings, 33 

6.  Propagation  by  Layers,         ------  34 

7.  Increase  by  Inoculation,           ------  35 


X  CONTENTS. 

PART  2/ 

MANAGEMENT   OF    THE    FLOWER     GARDEN    AND    CULTURE    OF 
PLANTS  —  WITH    DESCRIPTIVE    LISTS. 

CHAPTER  I. 

ON    THE    CULTURE   SF  ANNUALS   AND    BIENNIALS. 

Aet.  1.     Annual  Flowers, 38 

2.  Growing  Annuals  in  Hot  Beds,  for  Planting  out  early,    -    39 

3.  Sowing  the  Seed  in  the  natural  Ground,        ~        -        -        40 

4.  Descriptive  List  of  Annual  Flowers,        -        -        -        -    41 
6.     Biennial  Flowers, -43 

CHAPTER    II. 

ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  PERENNIALS. 

Art.  1.    Perennial  Herbaceous  Plants, 44 

2.  Descriptive  List  of  Perennial  Herbaceous  Flow'g  Plants,      46 

3.  Descriptive  List  of  Tuberous  and  Fleshy  Rooted  Peren- 

nial Plants, --51 

CHAPTER  IIL 

ON   THE  CULTURE  OF  SHRUBS  AND  VINES. 

Art.  1.     Shrubs,             52 

2.  Descriptive  List  of  Dwarf  Hardy  Shrubs,             -        -  54 

3.  Descriptive  List  of  Tall  Shrubs  and  Dwarf  Ornamental 

Trees, 55 

4.  Hardy  Running  Vines  for  Covering  Arbors,  &c.  -        -  57 

5.  Descriptive  List  of  Hardy  Vines,    -        -        -        -        -  57 

CHAPTER    IV. 

ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  THE  ROSE. 

Art.  1.     Remarks,     -----..--53 
2.    Descriptive  List  of  Roses, 61 

CHAPTER  V. 

ON    THE    CULTURE    OF    FLORISTS'    FLOWERS. 

Art.  1.  The  Double  Dahlia. 63 

2.  Descriptive  List  of  Double  Dahlias,         .        -        -        -  65 

3.  Bulbous  Rooted  Plants, 67 

4.  Descriptive  List  of  Bulbous  Rooted  Plants,     -        -        -  68 

5.  The  Carnation, 73 

6.  The  Pink, 74 

7.  Polyanthus  and  Auricula,     --..--  75 

CHAPTER    VI. 

ON    THE    MONTHLY    CALENDAR. 

Art.  1.  Object  of  the  Monthly  Calendar,  ...        -        76 

2.  January, -76 

3.  February, 77 

4.  March, 77 

5.  April, 78 

6.  May,        --- 79 


CONTENTS.  XI 

Art.  7.    June,    -        .        1 80 

8.  July, 81 

9.  August, 83 

10.  September, 84 

11.  October, -        -        -  86 

12.  November, 86 

13.  December, 87 

CHAPTER    VII. 

ON    THE  VARIATIONS    AND    DISEASES   OF   PLAKTS. 

Art.  1.    Variation  of  Plants,         -- 88 

2.  Color  of  Plants  and  Flowers, 89 

3.  Double  Flowers, 91 

4.  Motion  of  Plants, 92 

5.  Insects  and  Diseases  of  Plants,  -        -        -        -  94 


PART    3. 

CONSTRUCTION  AND   MANAGEMENT  OF  THE    GKEEN-HOUSE. 
CHAPTER    1. 

ON   THE   CONSTRUCTION   OF   THE    GREEN-HOUSE. 

Art.  1.    Location  and  Plan, 97 

2.  Mode  of  Heating, 98 

3.  Walk  and  Stages, -  100 

4.  Repairing  and  Cleansing,        .        -        .        .        -  loi 

CHAPTER   II, 

ON   THE   MANAGEMENT   OF    THE  GREEN-HOUSE. 

Art.  1.    Taking  the  Plants  into  Winter  Quarters  and  Potting,    -  102 

2.  Arranging  the  Plants  in  the  House,  ...  103 

3.  Watering  the  Plants,      -...--.  104 

4.  Temperature  of  the  House, 105 

5.  Descriptive  List  of  Green-house  Plants,         -        -        -  106 

6.  Tender  Bulbous  Rooted  Plants,  -        -        -        -  111 

CHAPTER   III. 

ON  THE  CULTURE   OF    THE    CAMELLIA  JAPONICA. 

Art.  1.     Remarks, 113 

2.  Propagation,       -._.--.        .114 

3.  Management  in  the  Green-house,  -        -        -        -  115 

4.  Repotting  the  Plants,  -        -        -        -        -        -  116 

5.  Descriptive  List  of  Camellias,        -        -        -        -        -  117 

CHAPTER  IV. 

ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  THE  GERANIUM,  CHINA  ROSE,  AND  ERICA. 

Art.  1.     The  Geranium  or  Pelargonium,  ...        -  118 

2.  List  of  Geraniums,         - 120 

3.  The  China  Rose, 121 


XU  CONTENTS. 

Art.  4.  List  of  China  Roses, 122 

5.  The  Erica,  -        - -  122 

6.  Its  Culture  and  Propagation, 123 

7.  Descriptive  List  of  Ericas, 125 


PART    4. 

THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    MISCELLANY. 
CHAPTER    I. 

OM  THE   CITY  FLOWER  GARDEN.  127 

CHAPTER    II. 

OS  THE  NATIVE  AMERICAN'  FLOWER  GARDEN.  130 

CHAPTER    III. 

ON  PLVNGING  GREEN-HOUSE  PLANTS  IN  THE   FLOWER  BORDEHS.    132 

CHAPTER    IV. 

ON  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF    CUT  FLOWERS.  135 

CHAPTER    V. 

ON  THE    MANAGEMENT    OF    PLANTS    IN    ROOMS,  AND    OF   BULBS  IN  POTS 
AND  WATER  GLASSES. 

Art.  1.  Result  of  Mismanagement, 137 

2.  Management  of  Plants, 138 

3.  Growing  Bulbous  Rooted  Plants  for  Rooms,       -        -  140 

4.  Growing  Bulbs  iii  Glasses,      --.-__  140 

CHAPTER   VI. 

ON  THE  MANAGEMENT    OF  GARDEN  FRAMES.  141 

CHAPTER    VII. 

ON  SPRING  AND  FALL    MANAGEMENT. 

Art.  1.     Spring  Management,  ------        143 

2.  Fall  Management  and  Covering  Plants,  -        -        .     145 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

ON   THE  SHRUBBERY.  147 

CHAPTER    IX. 

ON    POTTING    AND    REPOTTING    PLANTS. 

Art.  1.     Potting  Green-house  Plants, 150 

2      Potting  of  Plants  taken  from  the  Ground,      -        -        -     151 

3.  Potting  of  Young  Plants  from  Cuttings,      -        -        -         151 

CHAPTER    X. 

ON  THE  CULTURE    OF  THE     PAN.SY     OR  HEARTSEASE.  152 


The  Prairie, -     155 

ULOSSARY,  --------  .-iry 

Appendix,     ------  '",^- 


PART  1. 

ARRANGEMENT  OF  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN,  AND  PRO- 
PAGATION OF  PLANTS. 


CHAPTER    I. 

On  Liayiug  out   tlie  Flo'tver  Garden, 


Art.   1.  —  General  Remarks. 

The  principal  object  of  the  "  Flower  garden  "  being 
to  please  the  eye,  it  should  in  every  department  have  a 
clean  and  healthy  appearance,  which  greatly  facilitates 
the  health  and  growth  of  the  plants  and  flowers  that  it 
contains. 

The  situation  should  be  so  selected,  that  all  the  kinds 
of  plants  are,  as  near  as  possible,  accommodated  to  their 
natural  location,  which,  by  general  observation,  will  be 
found  to  be  of  a  more  varied  nature  than  can  in  any  given 
spot  be  combined  to  suit  the  health  and  growth  of  such 
plants  as  are  placed  in  the  flower  garden :  hence  the 
propriety  of  selecting  a  soil,  that  will  suit  most  kinds  ; 
and  in  some  cases,  a  proper  soil,  to  suit  those  plants  that 
will  not  thrive  without  their  peculiar  earth  to  support 
them. 

A  knowledge  of  these  requisites,  is  in  a  great  mea- 
sure, the  leading  principle  of  what  is  called  flower-gar- 
2 


14  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

dening;  although  in  many  cases,  the  mere  act  of  culture 
is  the  only  object  in  view,  which  has  but  little  weight  on 
the  subject ;  for  we  can  observe  wild  flowers  growing 
luxuriantly  in  their  natural  state,  without  any  other  as- 
sistance thin  the  hand  of  nature. 

For  a  definition  of  the  different  modes  and  manage- 
ment of  flowers,  I  refer  the  reader  to  their  respective 
heads. 

A  RT.  2. —  Laying  out  the  Flower  Garden  and  Planting. 

It  is  difficult  to  give  a  correct  method,  for  laying  out 
flower  gardens,  owing  to  the  diversified  opinions  of  dif- 
ferent persons,  which  are  much  at  variance  with  each 
other.  Some  say  that  nature  should  be  copied,  as  much 
as  possible,  others  that  formal  lines  and  geometrical  fig- 
ures, such  as  circles,  ovals,  &c.,  are  best. 

The  principal  object  to  be  considered  in  laying  out  the 
flower  garden,  is  the  extent  and  location  of  the  ground, 
and  the  taste  of  the  owner. 

At  country  residences,  where  a  large  extent  is  appro- 
priated to  this  department,  many  convenient  and  pleasing 
appendages  can  be  judiciously  introduced  ;  as  rustic 
arbors,  rustic  seats,  and  rockery ;  and  if  water  can  be 
connected,  it  always  gives  a  good  effect.  All  such  ap- 
pendages, I  recommend  to  be  constructed  in  as  natural 
a  manner  as  possible. 

The  arbors  should  be  covered  with  vines  and  creepers, 
and  their  form  not  be  discovered  until  the  person  who 
is  desirous  to  rest,  after  viewing  the  flowers  in  the  other 
departments,  happens  to  stroll  into  thern  by  an  easy 
walk  :  all  such  places  should  be  constructed  in  the  shade, 
for  retirement,  and  not  on  a  rocky  eminence,  under  the 
influence  of  the  burning  sun,  unless  a  fine  landscape  is 


ON  LAYING  OUT  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN.       15 

to  be  seen  from  them,  and  then  an  observatory  is  more 
proper. 

In  many  cases,  the  flower  garden  will  have  a  pleasing 
appearance,  when  various  figures  are  cut  in  a  well  kept 
grass  plat,  where  ease  should   invariably  be   attended  to. 

In  laying  out  flower  gardens,  great  care  should  always 
be  taken,  that  there  is  a  regular  proportion  of  the  beds 
and  walks  in  the  different  departments ;  for  it  will  have 
a  bad  effect  if  any  thing  is  cramped.  The  walks  should 
if  possible  be  wide  enough  for  two  persons  to  walk 
abreast,  in  order  to  give  a  social  effect,  which  should 
always  be  the  first  consideration  in  the  flower  garden. 
The  beds  should  also  be  well  proportioned,  and  not  too 
much  cut  up  into  small  figures,  which  when  bordered 
with  box  edging,  have  the  appearance  of  so  many  figures 
formed  for  the  amusement  of  children  more  than  for  the 
purpose  of  growing  flowers.  There  is  also  another 
great  error  sustained  in  this  method,  namely,  the  edging 
will  retard  the  growth  of  the  flowers  by  being  close  to 
them  ;  for  indeed  there  is  nothing  that  so  much  exhausts 
the  soil  of  nutriment,  as  box  edging. 

Every  department  should  have  an  open,  easy  appear- 
ance and  regular  proportion. 

I  must  also  beg  leave  to  caution  my  readers  against 
the  very  improper  method  often  practised  of  planting 
fruit  trees  in  the  flower  borders  and  among  shrubs  :  — 
the  impropriety  is  very  evident,  if  we  take  into  consider- 
ation that  many  of  the  flowers  must  eventually  be  spoil- 
ed in  gathering  the  fruit ;  besides  the  inducements  pre- 
sented for  children  to  injure  the  flowers  when  in  the  act 
of  robbing  the  trees  of  their  fruit. 

If  fruit  is  to  be  planted,  a  proper  place  should  he  se- 
lected ;  it  should  never  be  iningled  among  shrubs   and 


16  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

flowers;  unless  the  ornamental  kinds,  as  the  Siberian 
crab,  Weeping  cherry  and  the  like  ;  and  those  have  a  bet- 
ter effect  as  a  single  ornamental  object. 

Art.  3. —  Soil  and  Materials. 

The  soil  best  adapted  for  the  flower  garden,  is  a  rml' 
low  loam  incorporated  with  some  rotten  manure,  and  a 
portion  of  dry  sand,  with  a  dry  mellow  subsoil. 

A  part  of  the  ground  should  also  be  of  a  boggy 
nature,  composed  of  black  earth  and  decayed  leaves,  in 
a  low  situation,  for  the  accommodation  of  such  plants,  as 
grow  in  a  boggy  soil ;  which  are  Lobelias,  Iris,  and  the 
like. 

The  other  materials,  are  gravel  for  walks,  which  should 
be  rough  for  the  bottoms  to  drain  off  the  water  from  the 
surface,  and  fine  gravel  for  the  top  in  order  that  the 
walk  may  bind  hard.  Stones  for  the  rockery  should 
be  of  the  roughest  kind,  that  nature  may  be  as  much  as 
possible  imitated ;  and  the  materials  for  arbors  and 
trellises  and  the  like  should  be  of  the  most  simple  con- 
struction. 

Art.  4. —  General  Planting  of  Shrubs  and  Flowers. 

The  best  time  for  planting  shrubs  and  flowers  is  in  the 
spring,  when  the  sap  is  beginning  to  rise.  This  general- 
ly happens  in  the  month  of  April,  and  is,  perhaps,  the 
best  time  for  performing  such  business. 

In  many  cases,  planting  may  be  very  judiciously  and 
economically  done  in  the  fall,  especially  on  dry  ground, 
and  where  hasty  improvements  are  to  be  made  :  much 
work  will  thus  be  forwarded  before  the  coming  spring. 

The  manner  of  planting  may  be  simply  stated  in  a  few 
words,  combining  trees,  shrubs  and   flowers.    As  almost 


ON  LAYING  OUT  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN.        17 

every  species  of  plants  have  a  conjunction  of  their  roots, 
a  few  inches  under  the  earth's  surface,  which,  if  I  may 
be  allowed  the  term,  I  will  consider  as  the  crown  of  the 
roots :  let  this  be  the  criterion  of  planting,  that  the  above 
mentioned  part  be  placed  a  few  inches  below  the  surface, 
and  not  too  deep,  which,  in  many  cases,  destroys  the 
plants,  particularly  those  that  do  not  freely  root  from  the 
foot  or  the  base  of  the  stem,  when  their  natural  roots 
are  destroyed  by  being  placed  in  a  situation  injurious  to 
them. 

The  proper  manner  of  planting,  or  act  of  inserting  the 
roots,  so  as  to  insure  the  growth  of  the  plants,  is  simply 
to  observe  the  nature  of  the  fibrous  roots  and  place  them 
in  their  natural  position  in  the  soil. 

Those  plants  that  extend  their  roots  far  around  the 
crown  or  centre,  require  a  hole  made  to  accommodate 
them,  without  cramping  their  roots ;  others  that  root  down- 
ward in  a  perpendicular  manner,  as  the  Paeony  and  tuber- 
ous roots,  and  most  kinds  of  bulbs,  should  be  planted  so 
that  the  roots  find  their  way  into  deep,  rich  soil. 

In  the  act  of  planting,  place  the  crown  of  the  roots  an 
inch  or  two  deep,  and  close  the  fine  earth  well  about  the 
fibres  with  either  the  hand  or  foot,  observing  well  the 
nature  of  the  roots  :  and  if  the  ground  is  very  dry  in  the 
spring,  give  a  quantity  of  water  to  settle  the  earth  about 
them. 

Art.  5. —  Location  or  Position  of  Plants. 
Plants  in  their  natural  state,  have  their  peculiar  loca- 
tion :  it  is  also  requisite  to  see  them  in  perfection,  to  place 
them  in  similar  locations,  under  the  hand  of  the  cultiva- 
tor :  hence,  running  vines,  such  as  Ho7iey suckles,  Clema- 
tis,  Bignonias,  and  so  on,  are  most  proper  for  covering 
2* 


18  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

arbors  and  trellises,  Ivy  and  Virginian  creepers  for 
walls,  tall  shrubs  for  concealing  old  boarded  fences,  and 
unsightly  objects,  and  the  pretty  dwarf  flowering  shrubs, 
as  the  Double  Almond,  Mazer  on,  and  Roses,  should  be 
brought  nearer  the  eye  of  the  observer.  Their  position 
should  also  be  such,  as  to  give  the  effect  of  variety  of 
color,  and  so  arranged  that  a  variety  is  always  in  blossom, 
which  can  be  effected,  by  referring  to  the  descriptive  listy 
of  the  several  varieties  enumerated  therein. 

Art.    6.  —  Pla7i    and    Management    of    Trellises    and 

Arbors. 

In  many  flower  gardens,  trellises,  arbors,  and  summer 
houses,  may  be  introduced  to  a  very  good  purpose  for 
concealing  offices  and  unseemly  appendages. 

The  form  and  disposal  of  these  must  greatly  depend  on 
the  size  and  situation  of  the  garden. 

In  city  gardens,  trellises  are  mostly  introduced  on  en- 
trances to  the  back  offices,  in  which  case,  they  are  gener- 
ally covered  with  the  Isabella  grape,  or  other  running 
vines  ;  as  the  Honeysuckle  and  Clematis.  Such  vines 
should  always  be  pruned  in  the  spring,  and  trained  with 
the  greatest  care,  to  guide  the  summer  shoots,  which  is 
often  too  much  neglected,  to  the  injury  of  the  plants. 

The  summer  dressing  of  vines,  is  simply  to  thin  them 
out  where  too  much  wood  is  growing,  and  which  would 
cause  a  general  weakness  in  the  vine  ;  the  next  object  is 
to  train  the  young  shoots,  so  that  all  vacant  places  are 
regularly  covered.  These  remarks  will  be  found  appli- 
cable to  all  kinds  of  vines. 

In  flower  gardens  attached  to  country  residences,  the 
trellis  is  mostly  applied  to  arbors,  which  ought  to  be  of  a 
rustic  nature,  and  any  form   most  convenient ;  formality 


ON    LAYING   OUT   THE    FLOWER  GARDEN.  19 

in  their  structure,  spoils  the  good  effect  they  would  other- 
wise produce.  I  think  that  most  of  my  readers  will 
agree  that  they  should  be  of  an  easy  and  rural  char- 
acter. 

Art.  7. —  Forming  and  Planting  the  Rockery. 

The  Rockery,  is  perhaps  one  of  the  best  features  of 
the  flower  garden  and  is  particularly  adapted  to  this  cli- 
mate :  its  location  depends  on  taste  and  circumstances. 
In  most  cases,  it  is  placed  in  a  very  conspicuous  situa- 
tion, as  the  front  of  the  Green-house,  principal  entrances, 
and  such  like.  By  general  observation,!  have  found  that 
a  plant  thrives  best  on  the  rockery,  when  placed  in  a  situa- 
tion where  the  principal  part  of  it  is  partially  shaded  by 
shrubbery  or  trees. 

In  extensive  pleasure  grounds  the  rockery  has  a  good 
effect  when  placed  distinct  from  the  flower  garden,  and 
near  a  rustic  arbor  or  ornamental  bridge,  or  seat;  and 
if  placed  by  the  side  of  a  retired  walk,  near  the  lawn  or 
grass  plot,  it  has  an  easy  effect.  The  form  and  dimen- 
sions, may  be  so  as  to  accommodate  the  location  it  is  placed 
in  :  a  long  oval  line,  or  almost  any  form  pleases. 

The  materials  should  be  rough  stones,  and  good  rick 
earth ;  the  base  to  be  laid  with  stones,  and  then  a  quan- 
tity of  soil :  this  method  may  be  pursued  until  the  whole 
is  completed.  "When  finished,  it  should  have  as  much  as 
possible  a  natural  appearance,  and  ridge-like  shape. 

The  plants  best  adapted  for  the  rockery,  are  of  the  her- 
baceous kinds,  as  the  Phlox^  Penstemons  and  so  on  :  all 
kinds  of  pretty  native  plants  may  also  be  pressed  into 
the  service  of  the  rockery,  as  the  Asters,  Wood 
Anemones,  Violets,  and  in  fact  all  kinds  of  plants  that 
will  thrive  on  a  rock  should  be  planted  indiscriminately, 


20  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN  COMPANION. 

without  order,  so  as  to  form  a  variety  of  flowering  plants, 
in  every  month  of  the  season.  Plants  growing  in  this 
manner,  always  assume  their  natural  habits  and  are  fine 
specimens,  for  young  beginners  in  botany,  and  the  junior 
members  of  families  that  are  studying  that  delightful  sci- 
ence :  perhaps  there  is  no  greater  inducement  to  its  re- 
searches, than  a  fine  collection  of  hardy  native  plants  on 
the  rockery;  especially  if  the  beautiful  tribe  of  ferns  is  to 
be  studied,  which  will  thrive  well  on  rocks. 

Planting  the  rockery,  is  merely  attended  with  inserting 
the  plants  between  the  stones,  in  the  soil  in  their  natural 
situations;  either  on  the  sunny  or  shady  side:  if  the 
rockery  is  covered  with  leaves  and  pine  or  hemlock  brush 
in  the  winter,  the  plants  will  flower  much  better  in  the 
spring.  Let  it  be  remembered,  that  most  native  plants  in 
woods,  are  indulged  by  nature  with  a  covering  of  leaves 
in  the  winter,  and  therefore  the  utility  requires  no  further 
comment. 

Art.  S. —  Ornamental   Waters  and  Bridges. 

There  is  nothing  that  I  am  acquainted  with,  that  gives 
more  ease,  and  has  so  fine  an  eflfect  in  the  ornamental 
and  flower  garden  department,  as  ornamental  wa- 
ters, in  any  form  they  can  be  introduced  ;  it  gives  a  relief 
to  the  eye,  from  too  much  sameness  of  the  living  part  of 
the  created  world ;  and  calls  to  mind,  the  utility  that  is 
derived  from  its  presence  as  a  medium  conductor  of 
food,  to  an  organized  kingdom.  Independent  of  this, 
the  cooling  aspect  it  assumes,  forms  a  fine  feature  in  ru- 
ral scenery. 

No  correct  definition  that  I  am  acquainted  with,  can  be 
given  on  the  formation  of  ornamental  water  ;  therefore 
it  must,  like  many  other  things,  depend  entirely  on    the 


ON  THE  NUTRIMENT  OF  PLANTS. 


21 


taste  of  those  who  wish  to  introduce  it.  In  many  cases 
canals  have  a  pleasing  effect  as  on  extensive  places  where 
they  are  so  managed  as  to  be  lost  to  the  eye  of  the  obser- 
ver ;  in  such  cases  the  utility  of  canals  is  obvious  to  the 
intelligent  observer. 


CHAPTER    II. 

On  Uie  Nutriment  of  Plants* 


Art.  1. — Preliminary  Remarks. 

Before  I  proceed  to  the  culture  of  plants  and  flowers  it 
will  be  proper  to  point  out  their  different  nutriments  and 
stimulants  and  how  they  act  on  the  vegetable  sys- 
tem either  in  a  congenial  or  injurious  manner,  which  by 
a  little  observation  will  be  found  to  be  of  a  great  impor- 
tance in  the  culture  of  all  kinds  of  plants  and  flowers  : — 
to  this  I  have  also  added  some  remarks  on  the  develop- 
ment of  the  different  parts  of  plants,  as  the  seed,  the  bud, 
the  root,  the  leaf,  and  the  like  which  I  consider  essential 
to  be  known  to  the  cultivator  and  I  hope  the  subject  will 
therefore  be  of  some  utility  in  this  place. 

These  plants  like  all  the  other  bodies  which  are  organ- 
ized, require  an  appropriate  nutriment,  for  the  germi- 
nation of  seeds  and  the  further  development  of  vege- 
table economy.  The  most  superficial  observer  is  aware 
that  plants  derive  their  principal  food  from  the  soil  and 
atmosphere,  although  not  in  equal  proportions.  They  also 
require  different  compounds,  according  to  the  nature  of 
the  soil  in  which  they  naturally  grow  :  thus  the    Cherry, 


22         THE  FLOWER  GARDEN* COMPANION. 

Peach  and  Nectarine,  are  found  to  grow  on  a  light  dry 
soil,  while  the  pear  and  plum,  require  a  deep  loamy  soil ; 
and  aquatics  grow  altogether  in  water,  as  the  Valisnera 
Spiralis,  Water  Lihj,  &c. :  others,  as  the  Ferns,  live  and 
flourish  on  the  hardest  rocks. 

Art.  2.  —  Food  of  Plants. 

The  principal  food  of  plants  is  found  to  be  either 
vegetable  or  animal  substances  in  a  decomposed  state, 
which  enter  into  vegetables  by  aqueous  solution,  and 
as  it  were  compose  a  new  vegetable  in  an  organized 
state.  This  food  is  principally  absorbed  by  the  roots 
of  plants  ;  it  is  also  inhaled  by  the  leaves,  its  particles  be- 
ing often  raised  to  a  considerable  height  by  the  winds. 

Earths,  as  Clay,  Lime,  Fliiits  and  Magnesia,  are  also 
absorbed  by  plants  in  solution  ;  each  particular  variety 
will  be  found  to  contain  these  earths  in  different  propor- 
tions, according  to  the  preponderance  of  the  soil  in  which 
they  grow :  hence  by  calcination  of  corn  stalks,  flint  is 
found  in  the  ashes,  and  is  perhaps  one  of  the  finest  fin- 
ishers for  steel. 

Plants  inhaling  chalky  soils  possess  portions  of  lime, 
and  by  analysis  each  variety  w^ill  be  found  to  contain  a 
portion  of  solid  substance,  which  they  most  readily  im- 
bibe by  aqueous  solution. 

Water. —  Some  authors  are  of  opinion,  that  water  is 
the  sole  food  of  plants,  who  found  their  authority  on  the 
fact,  that  many  kinds,  and  particularly  bulbs,  vegetate 
and  produce  their  blossoms  in  that  fluid ;  the  reverse  of 
this  is  however  the  case,  as  on  calcination  those  plants 
are  found  to  contain  component  parts,  but  the  quantity  of 
water  necessary  for  different  species  is  also  very  appar- 
ent; as  some  plants  are  found  to  thrive  on  the  hardest 
rocks,  and  must  obtain  their   moisture  principally  from 


ON   THE    NUTRIMENT    OF    PLANTS.  23 

their  leaves,  to  which  it  is  first  imparted  from  the 
atmosphere,  whilst  others  are  known  to  live  wholly  in 
water  ;  consequently  must  be  of  a  different  nature  in  their 
solids. 

Atmospheric  Air. — "  The  atmosphere,"  says  Stroud, 
"  is  composed  of  oxygen,  carbonic  acid,  hydrogen  and  ni- 
trogen gases,  in  different  proportions  ;  all  these  are  to  be 
found  in  vegetables,  but  they  do  not  all  seem  to  be  vege- 
table food. 

"  That  oxygen  is  necessary  to  vegetation,  numerous  ex- 
periments have  proved,  and  few  have  been  found  to  sub- 
sist long  without  it,  when  in  a  growing  state  ;  it  is  there- 
fore plain,  that  plants   inhale  a  considerable  quantity  of 
the  gas. 

"  Carbonic  Acid. — This  is  also  beneficial  to  plants,  par- 
ticularly to  the  root ;  but  if  too  large  a  quantity  be  ap- 
plied, it  proves  injurious  or  fatal.  Hydrogen  and  nitro- 
gen are  supposed  to  enter  vegetables  in  combination  with 
other  substances,  as  when  they  are  applied  separately  to 
growing  plants,  they  refuse  to  inhale  either  of  them,  and 
death  is  the  consequence. 

"  From   these  facts,  it  appears  that  vegetables  have  a 
power  of  extracting  from  the  atmosphere,  those  parts  which 
contribute  to  their  growth  and  health,  as  well  as  from  the 
soil,  and  of  refusing  to  admit  the  constituents  of  either." 
The  above  facts  plainly  show  the  utility  and  necessity 
of  obtaining  a  proper  air,   requisite   to   the  growth  and 
health  of  the  plant ;  whether  in  a  frame  or  Green-house, 
the   necessity  is  the   same.     When   unwholesome  air  is 
present,  the   plant  suffers  in  proportion  to  the  portion  of 
improper  gas  :  the  most  delicate  parts,  as  the  flower,  or 
young  fruit,  being  first  affected,  generally  perishes  :  the 
next  is  the  tender  leaves  and  branches,  and  so  in  succes- 


24  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

sion ;  but  in  some  cases,  as  tender   annuals,  foul  internal 
air  destroys  the  plant  in  its  infant  state. 

To  all  plants  in  a  growing  state,  a  small  quantity  of 
external  air  should  always  be  admitted,  in  order  to  rectify 
the  internal  air.  This  plan  should  be  observed  in  the 
Green-house  and  other  confined  places. 

Art.  3.  —  Light. 

"  Fairest  of  beings  !  first  created  Light ! 

Prime  cause  of  beauty!  for,  from  thee  alone, 

The  sparkling  gem, — the  vegetable  race, — 

The  nobler  worlds  that  live  and  breathe,  their  charms, 

The  lovely  hues  peculiar  to  each  tribe, — 

From  thy  unfading  source  of  splendor,  draw! 

In  thy  pure  rays,  with  transport,  I  survey 

This  firmament,  and  those  her  rolling  worlds ; 

Their  magnitudes  and  motions." 

Light  is  one  of  the  most  requisite  agents  to  the  vege- 
table kingdom,  as  few  vegetables  (the  Fungous  excepted) 
are  known  to  thrive  and  have  their  proper  qualities  with- 
out this  stimulant. 

The  most  common  observer  may  have  occular  demon- 
stration of  this  fact,  by  plants  generally  growing  towards 
the  light,  in  windows  of  houses  and  confined  situations  ; 
and  as  soon  as  the  plant  is  reversed,  the  position  is  re- 
versed also.  Leaves,  flowers  and  fruits,  are  always  more 
replete  with  their  proper  qualities,  when  in  an  exposed 
situation.  This  is  observable  in  the  tops  of  trees.  It  is 
generally  understood  by  horticulturists,  that  no  light  as 
yet  known  artificially,  will  compensate  for  the  absence  of 
the  sun.  But,  were  I  called  upon  to  express  my  opinion 
on  the  subject,  it  would  be  this  :  that,  as  the  sun  is  the 
sole  agent  of  heat  and  light,  its  influence  over  those  stim- 
ulants is  predominant ;  hence,  artificial  light  is  partial  to 


ON  THE  NUTRIMENT  OF  PLANTS.  25 

more  confined  particles  :  furthermore,  all  artificial  light 
which  is  caused  by  igniting  any  substance,  contains  a 
certain  quantity  of  impure  gas,  which  is  evaporated,  by 
ascending  and  mixing  with  the  atmospheric  air,  and  when 
condensed  or  confined,  generally  proves  injurious,  if  not 
fatal,  to  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdom  :  this  is  abun- 
dantly proved  by  the  frequent  instances  we  find  recorded, 
of  persons  falling  victims  in  consequence  of  burning  char- 
coal in  a  confined  room. 

That  vegetables  lose  their  proper  qualities,  when  de- 
prived of  the  presence  of  light,  is  exemplified  in  the  Cel- 
ery and  Endive  when  blanched  ;  which  is  effected  by  ex- 
cluding them  from  the  light,  in  which  case  the  vegetable 
loses  its  natural  qualities  in  a  certain  degree.  So  tena- 
cious of  light,  are  most  kinds  of  plants,  that  when  de- 
prived of  this  stimulant,  they  begin  to  assume  a  yellow 
appearance,  and  in  time,  when  fully  excluded,  they  turn 
to  a  clear  white  :  it  is  also  obvious  that  when  they  again 
receive  a  full  share  of  stimulating  influence,  they  re- 
sume their  wonted  appearance. 

I  shall  conclude  this  subject  by  impressing  on  the  mind 
of  my  readers,  the  utility  of  light  to  plants  generally, 
and  especially  in  frames  and  green-houses,  in  the  early 
part  of  the  season,  when  every  opportunity  should  be  ta- 
ken to  admit  it.  Let  them  also  remember  that  in  winter, 
owing  to  the  short  days,  the  due  quantity  of  light  cannot 
be  given  ;  this  should  always  be  taken  into  consideration 
by  the  cultivator. 

Art.  4.  —  Heat. 

It    is    very    evident    to    the    most    common  observer, 
that  a  certain  degree  of  heat  is  required  by  all  plants  to 
cause  them  to  grow,  in  a  healthy,  vigorous  state.     As  we 
3 


26  THE    FLOWER  GARDEN    COMPANION. 

find  that  plants  similarly  situated,  though  natives,  do 
not  all  vegetate  at  the  same  lime  :  so  also  seeds  require 
a  different  temperature  of  heat,  to  cause  them  to  vegetate 
freely  ;  hence  it  will  be  seen  that  all  kinds  of  native  seeds 
vegetate  early  in  the  spring,  and  many  exotics,  as  the  Co- 
reopsis, Stock-gilli flower,  Candy-tuft  and  the  like  :  while 
the  more  tender  kinds  as  the  Balsam,  Globe  Amaranth 
and  the  like  must  be  deferred  to  a  warmer  season. 
The  same  affinity  is  also  observable  in  the  circulation  of 
sap  in  trees,  as  they  are  seen  to  put  out  their  foliage  and 
to  commence  in  growth  at  different  times  in  the  same  lo- 
cation. 

Heat  may  be  considered  under  two  heads  namely,  sun 
heat  or  natural,  and  artificial  as  that  applied  by  fire, 
fermentation  and  the  like.  Sun  heat  may  be  in  all  cases 
considered  as  natural  to  plants,  although  in  many  cases 
where  plants  are  placed  in  very  moist  situations  they  are 
drawn  weak  when  it  acts  too  powerfully  on  them  after 
much  wet,  and  in  such  cases  the  leaves  are  seen  to  flag 
and  shrivel  up.  Fire  heat  also  when  applied  in  too  high 
a  degree  to  plants,  injures  their  constitution  in  a  manner 
that  they  lose  in  a  certain  degree  their  natural  strength 
or  habit.  Heat  and  moisture  in  all  cases  should  be  reg- 
ulated as  much  as  possible  to  correspond  to  the  natural 
habit  of  the  plants  that  are  to  be  cultivated. 

Art.  5.  —  Observations  on  the  Roots  of  Plants. 

The  roots  of  plants  being  intended  by  nature  as  chan- 
nels by  which  the  principal  food  is  absorbed  and  conveyed 
to  the  different  parts,  and  finally  forms  a  part  of  the  plant, 
should  be  very  familiar  to  the  cultivator. 

By  due  observation  it  will  be  seen  that  the  adaptation 
of  plants  to  their  proper  soil  is  of  the  greatest  importance, 


ON    THE    NUTRIMENT    OF    PLANTS.  27 

as  plants  placed  in  a  soil  uncongenial  to  them,  seldom 
thrive  well,  owing  to  improper  food  being  absorbed  by 
their  roots  :  and  in  many  cases,  roots  have  been  known 
to  travel  out  of  their  proper  position  in  quest  of  a  more 
proper  nutriment.  The  circulation  of  the  sap  in  roots  is 
different  in  different  kinds,  as  may  be  exemplified  by 
plants  and  shrubs  beginning  to  put  forth  their  leaves  at 
various  periods,  in  the  same  location.  This  fact  may  be 
proved  by  any  intelligent  observer  who  will  notice  the 
commencement  of  vegetation  in  native  plants  and  shrubs, 
in  any  given  part  of  the  country,  under  the  same  circum- 
stances and  in  the  same  location. 

These  plants  are  all  fastened  in  the  earth  by  the  root, 
and  all  exposed  to  the  same  temperature  and  natural 
changes  of  moisture  in  the  place  where  they  grow : 
but  their  time  of  vegetation  or  circulation  of  sap,  is  in 
accordance  to  their  peculiar  nature,  which  varies  a 
month  or  more.  As  soon  as  the  soil  is  sufficiently  warm 
to  answer  their  economy  of  circulation,  the  process 
takes  place. 

Art.  6,  —  Observation  on  the  Bud. 
The  bud  of  plants  is  very  aptly  termed  by  the  bot- 
anist, the  hybernacula  or  winter  quarters.  It  is  formed 
in  the  summer,  and  properly  fed  and  nourished  by  the 
descending  sap.  Buds  may  be  considered  under  three 
definitions  :  first,  buds  which  contain  the  rudiments  and 
organization  of  fruits  only,  as  the  Cherry,  Plum  and 
Pear  ;  second, buds  which  contain  the  blossom  and  wood- 
buds  under  the  same  covering,  as  the  Grape,  and  most 
trailing  vines ;  and  thirdly,  those  which  contain  all  the 
rudiments  of  a  young  plant  in  embryo,  as  the  Cherry 
Plum  and  Pear,  which  are  called  wjaod-bads. 


28  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Nature  has  carefully  protected  those  precious  appenda- 
ges of  plants,  by  covering  them  with  a  hard,  scaly  sub- 
stance outwardly,  and  a  woolly  substance  inwardly,  to 
protect  the  more  tender  parts. 

It  will  be  found  by  a  due  observance  of  buds,  that  those 
which  produce  the  fruit  are  the  most  delicate,  and  of 
course  the  most  liable  to  injury  by  drought,  cold  and  the 
many  causes  inimical  to  them;  hence  the  Pe«cA, and  ma- 
ny other  fruit  trees  require  protection  during  the  winter 
in  the  Northern  States,  particularly  those  that  have  been 
grown  under  glass,  the  buds  of  which  are  always  more 
delicate  than  when  the  tree  is  wholly  exposed. 

The  blossom-bud  being  injured  in  any  way,  either  by 
cold  or  other  casualty  detrimental  to  it,  is  generally  des- 
troyed ;  but  the  wood-bud  on  the  same  tree  or  shrub,  is 
not,  although  exposed  to  the  same  injuries  ;  and  in  ma- 
ny cases,  as  the  Grape  Vine,  the  blossom-bud  is  blinded 
or  destroyed  by  many  causes  detrimental  to  it,  alihough 
the  vine  will  perhaps  break  and  grow  in  a  very  healthy 
manner. 

Art.  7.  —  Observations  on  the  Leaf. 

The  leaves  of  plants  being  the  principal  organs  of  res- 
piration, also  contribute  to  their  growth  by  their  power  of 
absorption  ;  they  are  of  the  greatest  importance  in  this 
operation.  The  surrounding  air,  whether  internal  or  ex- 
ternal, being  absorbed  by  their  agency,  requires  to  be  of 
a  pure  and  wholesome  nature,  in  order  to  keep  them  in. 
a  healthy,  vigorous  state.  We  are  informed  by  botanists 
that  the  leaves  of  plants  are  synonymous  with  the  lungs 
of  animals,  therefore,  whatever  disease  is  imbibed  by  them, 
enters  into  their  system. 

When   too   much   heat  and   moisture   are   applied   in 


ON    THE    NUTRIMENT    OF    PLANTS.  29 

green-houses  or  frames,  where  plants  are  growing,  it  is 
imbibed  by  the  leaf,  and  the  consequence  is,  that  the  plant 
is  elongated  without  its  proper  qualities,  the  leaves  as- 
sume a  feeble  appearance,  and  are  often  totally  destroyed, 
when  the  sun  and  air  act  on  them  sufficiently  to  nourish 
their  more  healthy  parts.  Leaves,  when  decaying,  are 
most  liable  to  breed  many  insects,  as  the  Red  Spider, 
Trip,  and  all  other  insects  which  are  increased  by  de- 
composition ;  therefore  decaying  and  dead  leaves  should, 
in  all  cases,  be  taken  from  plants  in  a  state  of  vegeta- 
tion. 

In  conclusion  to  what  has  been  said  on  trees  and  plants, 
it  appears  evident  that  the  riative  of  all  kinds  of  plants  in 
the  common  idea,  is  the  primitive,  and  is  perpetual,  and 
that  every  variety  of  improved  quality,  must  originate 
from  it,  either  by  chance  or  luxuriant  culture  ;  and  it  is 
at  the  same  time  clear,  that  by  crossing  the  primitive  or 
native  plants  of  any  country,  of  the  same  natural  order, 
new  varieties,  of  improved  qualities,  are  produced, 
congenial  to  the  country  which  has  given  birth  to  such 
varieties.  From  the  very  best  of  experiments  and  au- 
thority, it  has  been  proved  that  in  raising  plants  either 
from  seed,  cuttings,  grafting,  or  any  other  mode  of  pro- 
pagation, those  kinds  that  have  been  propagated  in  a 
hardy  and  natural  manner,  are  the  best  qualified  to  with- 
stand the  natural  changes  of  the  climate  ;  and  that,  al- 
though by  nursing  many  tender  plants,  they  are  brought 
to  great  perfection  with  attentive  culture,  it  cannot  be  re- 
commended to  answer  in  a  general  way. 

Any  intelligent  observer  will  discover  that  plants  of  all 

kinds  require  to  be  so  situated  that  the  sun  and  air  have, 

as  much  as  possible,  free   access  to   every  part   of  their 

leaves,  fruit,  and  indeed,  all  parts  of  the  plants;  and  that 

3* 


30  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION". 

any  violence,  either  by  severe  pruning,  disease,  blights, 
unwholesome  food  or  air  that  is  present,  acts  on  their  sys- 
tem materially,  either  directly  or  indirectly. 


CHAPTER    III. 

On    tlie  Propagation    of  Plants  a 


Art.   1.  —  General  Observations. 

To  describe  the  many  methods  practised  in  propagating- 
plants,  would  far  exceed  my  prescribed  limits,  and  be 
altogether  foreign  to  this  little  treatise,  which  is  intended 
to  condense,  as  much  as  possible,  the  most  requisite  sub- 
jects to  be  known  by  those  who  are  desirous  to  become 
acquainted  with  the  culture  of  the  flower  garden.  The 
propagation  of  plants  may  be  considered  strictly  belong- 
ing to  the  nursery  department,  and  would  require  more 
space  than  the  contents  of  this  book  to  fully  describe  ; 
therefore,  the  subject  has  been  confined  to  such  methods 
as  could  be  done  with  perfect  ease  by  any  person  inter- 
ested in  the  subject. 

The  plan,  it  will  be  perceived,  is  as  much  as  possible 
condensed  into  regular  methods  —  and  those  plants  to  be 
operated  upon,  are  designated  by  their  proper  character  in 
the  Descriptive  List  of  their  respective  departments,  by 
which  much  space  and  repetition  is  in  this  place  obviated. 

Of  all  the  different  processes  in  Horticulture,  pro- 
pagation  or  increase  is  the  most  difficult,  and  con- 
sequently requires  every  attention  of  the  operator.     Cor- 


ON    THE    PROPAGATION    OF    PLANTS-  31 

rectness  must  be,  in  all  cases,  attended  to,  and  a  neat  and 
active  performance  of  the  subject  acted  upon  must  be  duly- 
regarded,  as  in  amputution,  insertion,  and  the  like 
principles,  that  will  be  requisite  in  the  different  operations. 

Art.  2.  —  Propagation  by  Seed. 

The  seed  contains  all  the  rudiments  of  the  parent  plant 
in  embryo  ;  and  expands  its  functionary  qualities,  and  is 
developed  into  a  new  plant  when  the  necessary  stimulants 
and  nutriments  are  present  either  in  a  natural  or  artificial 
form.  The  propagation  of  any  plant  or  seed  out  of  its 
natural  climate,  is  attended,  in  all  cases,  by  artificial 
means  and  is,  therefore,  under  the  laws  of  culture. 

Proper  location  for  seed.  — That  most  plants  require  a 
proper  location  is  very  apparent  to  the  inquiring  observer  ; 
some  are  found  to  grow  naturally  and  thrive  in  water,  as 
the  Water  Lily  ;  others  may  be  considered  as  amphibious, 
growing  sometimes  in  and  at  others  out  of  water,  as  the 
Water  Plantain,  Harrowhead,  and  the  like  ;  to  the  reverse 
of  this,  we  find  some  plants  living  and  thriving  on  rocks 
and  such  locations,  where  it  is  very  difficult  to  receive 
water  or  food  from  any  other  source  than  atmospheric  air. 
Other  plants,  we  find,  are  natives  of  rich  and  fertile  val- 
leys;  and  some  are  ornamentally  intended,  by  nature,  as  a 
fringe  to  the  woods,  by  way  sides,  and  the  like  ;  hence,  a 
corresponding  climate  is  always  the  best  adapted  and 
should  be  as  near  as  possible  obtained,  to  grow  seeds  and 
to  propagate  young  plants  to  perfection. 

By  little  observation,  it  will  be  seen  that  many  seeds  per- 
ish in  their  natural  soil  and  chmate,by  accidental  causes, 
and  in  some  cases  not  one  of  a  thousand  vegetates,  while 
if  assisted  by  being  placed  in  a  proper  situation,  two  out 
of  three  would  grow ;  other  seeds  almost  universally 
grow  when  they  leave  the  plants  in  an  accidental  man- 


32  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

ner.  This  fact  is  in  the  first  case  exemplified  in  large 
seeds,  as  nuts,  and  the  like.  The  Hickory  and  Chetsnut 
are  seen  to  bear  bushels  of  nuts  or  seed,  which  fall  from 
the  tree  and  are  dispersed  on  their  natural  soil,  but  rare- 
ly vegetate,  owing  to  their  not  being  imbedded  in  the  earth 
deep  enough  to  receive  a  regular  and  proper  nutriment  to 
cause  them  to  grow.  Most  native  annual  seeds  vegetate 
freely,  their  covers  being  thin  and  of  a  small  size,  by 
which  they  are  easily  imbedded  in  the  earth  to  a  proper 
depth  to  cause  vegetation  to  proceed.  The  principal 
point  to  be  attended  to,  in  making  seeds  vegetate,  is  that 
they  are  sown  in  a  soil  where  they  can  easily  take  root, 
and  in  a  depth  corresponding  to  their  size ;  small  seeds, 
as  the  Poppy  and  Migno7iette,  should  scarcely  be  covered  ; 
and  larger,  as  the  Balsam  and  Aster,  may  be  covered 
deeper ;  and  so  in  proportion  to  their  different  size.  In 
some  cases  frost  destroys  the  vegetative  principle  of  seed 
when  it  is  not  well  ripened ;  or  placed  in  a  warm,  moist 
situation,  where  it  begins  to  grow  at  an  unnatural 
season.  But  I  have  never  known  seed  of  any  kind 
destroyed  by  cold  when  perfectly  dry  and  well  ripen- 
ed. The  necessary  food  and  stimulants  to  cause  seed  to 
vegetate  are  heat,  air  and  water. 

Art.  3.  —  Propagation  by  Roots. 

Increase  of  bulbous  rooted  plants. —  Bulbous  rooted  plants 
are  increased  by  taking  the  ofTsets  or  side  bulbs  from  the 
parent  plant,  as  the  Hyacirithj  Tulip,  and  the  like.  The 
young  bulbs  are  to  be  taken  from  the  parent,  and  treated 
in  every  way  the  same  with  this  exception,  they  do  not  re- 
quire so  much  room  to  grow,  as  they  will  not  flower  the  first 
season  of  planting.  They  must  be  separated  from  the  pa- 
rent with  the  finger  and  thumb,  and  care  should  be  taken 
not  to  bruise  them  in  the  operation. 


ON  THE  PROPAGATION  OF  PLANTS.  33 

Some  bulbs,  as  the  Garlic  and  Shallot,  form  a  truss  of 
bulbs,  from  the  centre  of  the  plant,  which  is  to  be  divided 
in  order  to  form  a  new  plant :  others  are  increased  from  the 
tops,  as  the  Tiger  Lily ;  such  are  termed  cauline  bulbs, 
or  bulbs  of  the  stalk  ;  they  onl}''  require  to  be  taken  from, 
and  treated  as,  the  parent. 

Increase  of  tuberous  rooted  plants.  —  The  tuberous 
rooted  are  exemplified  in  the  Pceony  and  Dahlias ;  the 
root  forms  a  crown,  to  which  are  connected  many  tubers, 
which  are  to  be  divided  w^ith  a  sharp  knife,  in  such  a 
manner,  as  to  leave  part  of  the  crown,  with  one  or  more 
eyes  or  buds  to  each  plant ;  those  parts  are  to  be  inserted 
in  the  ground,  in  the  same  manner  and  soil,  and  treated 
in  the  same  way  as  the  mother  plant. 

Increase  of  fibrous  rooted  herbaceous  plants.  —  Fibrous 
rooted  herbaceous  plants  are  increased  by  dividing  the 
crown,  or  main  root,  as  the  Phlox,  Rudbecca,  and  perennial 
Larkspur.  This  method  may  be  applied  to  most  hardy 
fibrous  rooted  plants,  in  tlie  month  of  September  or  begin- 
ning of  May. 

Art.  4.  —  Propagation  by  Running  Vines  and  Creepers. 
The  Potentella,  Strawberry  and  Periwinkle  are  examples 
of  running  vines.  Such  plants  are  increased  by  taking  off 
their  joints  where  they  have  rooted,  and  planting  in  the 
same  manner  and  soil  as  their  parent  plants,  in  the  month 
of  September :  this  process  may  be  greatly  facilitated  by 
covering  the  joints  with  fine  earth  and  keeping  them  moist 
previous  to  their  rooting. 

Art.  5.  —  Propagation  by  Cuttings. 
Many  kinds   of  hardy   shrubs    are    increased  by  cut- 
ting   from     the    young     wood    of    deciduous    plants, 


34  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

which  is  either  performed  in  the  fall  or  spring". 
The  plants  that  are  increased  by  this  method,  are  the 
Althea,  or  Rose  of  Sharon,  Snowballs,  Honeysuckles,  and 
most  kinds  of  soft  wooded  plants.  The  manner  of  per- 
forming this  work,  is  to  prepare  a  piece  of  moist,  shady 
ground,  by  digging  and  dressing  the  surface  :  when  the 
ground  is  ready,  the  cuttings  are  to  be  prepared  by 
cutting  them  one  foot  in  length,  and  inserting  them 
into  the  ground  six  inches  deep ;  the  rows  should 
be  eighteen  inches  apart,  and  the  cuttings  eight  inches 
from  each  other  in  the  rows.  When  the  cuttings 
are  inserted,  the  ground  must  be  pressed  hard  to  them  by 
the  foot,  and  raked  off  in  a  neat  manner.  The  after 
management,  is  merely  to  keep  the  ground  clean  about 
the  plants  during  the  summer ;  and  in  the  autumn  they 
will  be  perfectly  rooted.  A  moist  northern  aspect  is  the 
best  location  for  this  business. 

Art.  6.  —  Propagation  by  Layers. 

The  increase  of  plants  by  layers,  is  performed 
on  most  kinds  of  hard  wooded  plants  in  the  autumn 
or  early  in  the  spring,  as  the  Rose  and  Double-Jlow- 
ering  Almond.  The  manner  of  performing  this 
business,  is  to  dig  and  prepare  the  ground  about  the 
mother  plant;  the  young  shoots  are  then  prepared,  by 
bending  them  down  to  the  ground,  in  order  to  find  the 
proper  length  required  to  be  inserted  ;  a  sharp  knife  must 
be  applied  to  the  under  part  of  the  shoot  at  a  joint,  cut- 
ting, in  a  slanting  manner  upward,  about  half  an  inch 
in  length :  the  part  is  then  inserted  in  the  soil,  from  two 
to  three  inches  deep,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  wound  or 
cut  is  left  open,  and  pressed  perpendicularly  into  the 
ground  :  a  hooked  stick  is  then  placed  over  the  layer  in 


ON    THE    PROPAGATION     OF   PLANTS.  35 

order  to  keep  it  in  a  proper  position.  This  should  be  done 
to  every  layer,  to  prevent  the  wound  from  uniting,  being 
the  part  from  whence  the  roots  will  be  made  for  the  young 
plant. 

Carnations^  Pi7iks,  and  such  like  plants,  are  chiefly  in- 
creased in  this  manner  ;  the  proper  season  for  laying 
these  is  August  and  September.  Many  others,  as  the  Siveet 
William  Pinks  and  their  natural  family,  may  be  laid  by 
simply  taking  out  the  centre  of  the  plant,  and  placing  a 
quantity  of  earth  sufficient  to  cover  the  side  shoots, 
which  will  form  a  circle  of  young  plants  in  a  few  weeks. 

Art.  7.  —  Increase  by  Inoculation. 

Many  trees  and  shrubs  are  increased  by  inoculation  or 
budding;  which  is  generally  done  to  propagate  such 
plants  as  do  not  thrive  well  by  the  methods  heretofore 
described. 

Inoculation  may  be  very  successfully  performed  on 
almost  every  variety  of  Roses,  as  the  White  Moss,  Unique, 
Tuscany,  and  all  the  finest  varieties,  on  the  wild  kinds  or 
those  of  a  strong  habit. 

The  Double-Jloivering  Apple,  Double  Cherry,  and  many 
ornamental  trees,  may  also  be  inoculated  on  those  of  their 
natural  family  ;  and  so  also  with  all  trees  and  shrubs  that 
have  large  full  buds.  The  best  time  for  performing  this 
operation  is  when  the  buds  that  are  to  be  taken  off  from  the 
choice  kind  are  well  ripened  and  the  bark  or  rind  leaves 
the  wood  freely  :  this  will  generally  be  about  the  latter 
end  of  July  or  beginning  of  August.  The  plants  in- 
tended to  be  inoculated  should  also  be  in  a  healty  state ; 
and  the  bark  should  part  freely  from  the  wood,  or  the 
success  will  be  doubtful ;  and  here  it  is  necessary  to  state, 


36  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

that  in  many  cases,  inoculation  is  almost  uselessly  per- 
formed on  trees  and  plants  that  are  in  an  unhealthy  con- 
dition ;  the  hud  inserted  must  eventually  die  for  want  of 
proper  sap  and  nutriment- 
Severe  criticisms  are  often  bestowed  on  gardeners,  who 
adopt  the  plan  of  inoculation  during  the  season,  when  the 
buds  which  are  by  them  inserted  die  ;  which  in  many 
cases  cannot  possibly  be  avoided,  if  the  plants  are  sickly, 
and  do  not  have  their  requisite  food  and  nourishment. 
This  is  often  the  case  with  the  Orange  and  Lemon,  which 
are  inoculated  and,  perhaps,  exposed  to  the  sun,  without 
water  for  many  days,  in  which  case  the  buds  must  eventu- 
ally perish  for  want  of  nourishment.  But  I  am  now  di- 
gressing, which  I  hope  will  be  excused  in  this  place,  for 
without  some  remarks  on  the  subject  before  me,  it  would 
be  impossible  to  elucidate  the  most  proper  and  necessary 
points. 

Act  of  Inocidation.  —  At  the  proper  season,  when  the 
plants  to  be  inoculated  are  in  a  right  condition,  prepare  for 
the  operation  by  collecting  healthy  shoots  of  the  summer's 
growth,  of  such  kinds  as  are  intended  to  be  increased  ; 
when  the  shoots  are  taken  from  the  trees,  they  are  to  be  di- 
vested of  their  leaves,  leaving  a  part  of  the  forestalk  to  the 
length  of  half  an  inch  ;  they  are  then  to  be  kept  damp  until 
they  are  inserted,  which  should  be  as  soon  as  possible 
after  being  separated   from  the  trees. 

There  are  many  ways  of  inserting  buds,  but  I  shall 
confine  myself  to  the  most  general  and,  I  believe  most 
successful  method,  which  is  performed  by  making  an  in- 
cision in  the  tree  intended  to  be  inoculated,  in  the  form  of 
a  T,  by  first  cutting  through  the  rind,  on  the  top,  in  a 
transverse  manner,  holding  the  knife  between  the  fore 


ON  THE  PROPAGATION  OF  PLANTS.        37 

finger  and  thumb :  the  bottom  incision  is  made  by  draw- 
ing the  point  of  the  knife  downward  an  inch  ;  the  thin  end 
of  the  haft  is  then  to  be  applied  to  the  top  of  the  incision 
in  order  to  part  the  rind  from  the  wood,  which  is  done  by 
gently  lifting  the  top  and  running  the  end  of  the  haft 
downward  to  the  end  of  the  incision.  The  incision  being 
made  for  the  reception  of  the  bud,  the  next  thing 
to  be  done  is  to  prepare  the  bud,  by  placing  the 
the  scion  in  the  left  hand,  between  the  fore  finger  and 
and  thumb,  with  the  top  end  next  to  the  thumb.  The 
knife  must  then  be  taken  in  the  right  hand,  and  its  heel 
placed  half  an  inch  below  the  bud  intended  to  be  taken 
off;  it  is  then  to  be  carefully  drawn  upwards  half  an  inch 
above  the  bud,  cutting  it  out  with  about  half  the  wood  and 
bark.  This  being  done,  the  part  is  to  be  placed  between 
the  thumb  and  fore  finger  of  the  left  hand,  and  the  rind 
gently  pressed  back  with  the  edge  of  the  knife  ;  when 
the  wood  is  to  be  pinched  between  the  thumb  and  knife 
and  divided  from  the  rind  with  the  bud,  which  is  to  be  in- 
serted neatly  in  the  incision  of  the  tree,  and  bound  with 
bass  or  other  strina:. 


PART  2. 

MANAGEMENT  OP  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN,  AND  CULTURE 
OF  PLANTS  — WITH  DESCRIPTIVE  LISTS. 


CHAPTER    I. 

On  the  Culture  of  Annuals  and  Biennials. 


Art.  1.  —  Annual  Flowers. 

Annual  plants  are  those  of  one  year's  duration 
only,  and  are  renewed  yearly  by  sowing  the  seed,  as  the 
Lady'^s  slipper  or  Balsam^  the  China  aster ^  Mignonette 
and  the  like. 

Annual  Flowers  do  not,  in  many  cases,  receive  that  at- 
tention they  really  merit,  which,  I  imagine,  is  chiefly  ow- 
ing to  the  trouble  of  renewing  them  yearly  from  seed,  and 
the  proneness  of  most  kinds  to  depreciate  into  single  flow- 
ers and  inferior  qualities  ;  however,  the  easy  and  speedy 
manner  of  growing  them,  and  the  pretty  effect  they 
give  to  the  flower  borders,  when  mixed  with  other 
plants,  claim  for  them  a  place  in  the  flower  garden. 
Their  qualities,  like  all  other  flowers  and  plants,  can  be 
retained,  and  in  many  cases  even  improved  by  attentive 
management.  I  shall  therefore  proceed  to  their  culture, 
and  add  a  descriptive  list  of  the  best  and  most  appropriate 
kinds  for  the  flower  garden. 


ON   THE    CULTURE    OF    ANNUALS    AND   BIENNIALS.       39 

Art.  2.  —  Growing  Annuals  in  Hot  Beds,  for  Planting 

out  early. 

To  have  annuals  flower  early,  the  seed  should  be  sown 
on  a  moderate  hot  bed  early  in  the  spring,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  transplanting  in  the  flower  bed  and  borders  ;  for  this 
purpose,  prepare  a  hot  bed  in  the  beginning  of  March,  in 
the  following  manner.  Collect  two  good  cart-loads  of 
hot  horse  manure ;  or  if  of  equal  parts  of  leaves  col- 
lected from  trees  in  the  fall  and  horse  manure,  the  bet- 
ter ;  shake  it  up  and  mix  it  well  together,  at  different 
times,  until  it  gets  into  a  state  of  fermentation,  which  will 
be  in  a  few  days,  when  the  bed  may  be  made  in  a  shel- 
tered situation  ;  if  protected  by  a  board  fence,  the  better. 

Prepare  the  place  for  the  bed  by  taking  out  one  foot 
deep  of  soil,  a  foot  wider  at  each  side  and  the  ends  than 
the  intended  frame  is  in  size.  A  two-light  frame,  four 
feet  in  width  and  six  feet  in  length,  will  answer  a  good 
purpose  ;  but  in  a  small  garden  a  frame  half  the  size,  with 
half  the  portion  of  manure,  will  answer. 

Having  the  place  prepared,  make  the  bed  bj''  shaking 
the  manure  well  together,  in  order  to  make  it  of  an 
equal  texture,  beating  it  down  with  the  back  of  the  fork 
as  you  proceed  —  but  never  tread  it  with  the  feet,  which 
is  the  cause  of  hot  beds  settling  irregular.  The  bed  being 
made,  place  the  frame  upon  it  immediately  to  draw  up 
the  heat,  cover  it  well  by  night,  and  let  it  have  the  full 
influence  of  the  sun  by  day,  until  the  heat  rises,  when  the 
bed  may  be  earthed  all  over  with  about  six  inches  of  light, 
rich  soil,  which  should  be  prepared  previous  to  its  being 
made  :  half  rotten  leaf  mould  and  half  mellow  loam  will 
answer  a  good  purpose  for  compost. 

When  the  bed  is  earthed,  the  frame  may  again  be 
closed  to  draw  the  heat,  and  so  soon  as  it  rises,  the  seeds 


40  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

of  all  kinds  of  annuals  may  be  sown  in  shallow  drills, 
and  lightly  covered  with  fine  earth;  care  must  be  taken 
in  this  part  of  the  process,  to  give  air  sufficient  by  night 
and  day  to  let  off  the  steam  that  arises,  in  order  that  the 
young  plants  may  not  damp  off  or  be  too  much  drawn  in 
a  weak  and  slender  manner,  especially  when  the  heat 
begins  to  rise  after  earthing  the  bed,  which  will  be  in  a 
few  days.  When  the  plants  have  come  up,  two  extremes 
must  be  guarded  against,  namely:  to  be  very  careful 
that  the  young  plants  are  not  injured  by  the  chill  of 
night,  or  drawn  too  much  by  being  confined  :  the  heat  of 
the  bed  and  the  external  air  must  be  the  criterion  to  go 
by:  the  internal  air  of  the  frame  should  be  kept  as  near 
as  possible  to  the  moderate  degree  of  fiftyfive,  by  Fah- 
renheit's scale.  As  the  warm  weather  advances,  the  bed 
may  have  more  air  by  day  and  night,  and  be  treated  in 
every  manner  so  as  to  harden  the  plants  as  they  grow  in 
size,  and  finally  the  lights  may  be  left  off  night  and  day 
previous  to  the  plants  being  transplanted  in  the  garden, 
which  may  be  done  with  most  kinds  about  the  first  of 
May,  and  the  tender,  the  twentieth  of  May.  But  where 
annuals  are  wanted  to  be  very  early  in  flower,  they  may 
be  much  forwarded  by  transplanting  them  out  from  the 
seed  bed  into  another  frame  an  inch  or  two  apart,  and  then 
transplanting  them  into  the  flower  garden  when  the 
weather  is  sufficiently  warm. 

Art.  3.  —  Solving  the  Seed  in  the  natural  Ground. 

The  seed  of  annual  flowers  may  be  sown  when  the  earth 
will  work  well,  which  will  be  from  the  middle  of  April 
to  the  beginning  of  May;  this  is  the  best  time  for  sowing 
most  kinds,  and  if  two  or  three  sowings  are  made  at  dif- 
ferent times  the  better  success  may  be  expected. 


ON    THE    CULTURE    OF    ANNUALS    AND   BIENNIALS.      41 

The  method  of  sowing  is  simply  to  make  a  small  circle, 
with  a  stick,  in  the  form  of  an  0,  about  eight  or  ten 
inches  in  diameter,  from  an  eighth  to  half  an  inch  in 
depth,  in  the  vacant  places  among  flowering  plants.  Great 
care  must  be  taken  to  cover  the  seed  very  lightly  with  fine, 
light  earth,  as  the  young  plants  are  often  much  injured  in 
making  their  way  through  the  surface.  If  the  weather  is 
very  dry,  the  places  where  the  seed  are  sown  may  be 
watered  in  order  to  make  the  seed  vegetate  more  freely. 
When  the  young  plants  are  an  inch  or  two  high,  they 
may  be  thinned  to  about  two  inches  apart,  and  they  may 
be  in  every  way  treated  as  other  plants,  according  to  their 
diflferent  habits. 

Art.  4.  — Descriptive  List  of  Annual  FlowerS'^ 

In  giving  a  List  of  Annual  Flowers  I  have  divided  them 
into  three  classes ;  namely,  ^ew^er,  less  tender,  and  hardy  ; 
a  classification  which  will  at  once  give  the  cultivator 
some  knowledge  of  the  most  proper  time  of  sowing  the 
diflferent  varieties  and  whether  they  require  any  protec- 
tion or  not  in  any  sudden  change  of  weather  that  may 
occur  after  they  are  planted  into  the  flower  borders  for 
flowering.  I  have  omitted  the  time  of  flowering,  which 
it  would  be  an  arduous  task  to  give,  in  annual  flowers,  as 
they  will  flower  earlier  or  later  according  to  circumstan- 
stances  and  seasons.  In  regard  to  colors,  it  is  also  difli- 
cult  to  give  any  distinctive  character,  as  annual  flowers  of 
all  kinds  are  very  prone  to  depreciate  and  run  out  or  sport 
from  their  variety  of  color  :  indeed  the  better  way  of  giv- 
ing a  list  to  every  kind  would  be  under  the  head  of  varie^ 

*  The  list  presented  in  this  article,  includes  all  the  old  and  well 
known  varieties.  For  a  copious  descriptive  list  of  recently  introduced 
annual  flowers,  see  Appendix,  Art.  1 . 

4# 


42  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

1i£s ;  however,  I  shall  in  a  certain  degree  follow  the  gen- 
eral rule  of  giving  the  proper  colors,  and  merely  point  out 
the  varieties. 

TENDEH    ANNUALS. 

Amaranthus  tree,  tricolor  and  bicolor. 

globe,  purple,  red,  white  and  striped- 
coxcomb,  com.  large  red,  scarlet,  yellow,  &c. 
common  dwarf  of  colcrs. 
spike  flowered  coxcombs,  a  variety. 

Browalliay  spreading  and  upright,  blue  flowered. 

Convolvulus,  scarlet,  (ipomaea  quamoclit)  a  climber. 

Effg-  plant,  white,  yellow,  red,  and  prickly  fruited. 

Ice  plant,  or  diamond  ficoidas,  white  and  yellow  flowered. 

Sensitive,  or  humbleplant. 

LESS   TENDER    ANNUALS. 

Amaranthus,  bloody  leaved,  with  erect  flowers,  purple. 

Aster,  China,  double,  white,  red,  purple,  brown,  striped,  &c. 

Basil,  common  sweet,  red  and  purpled  flowered . 

Chrysanthemum,  double,  white  and  yellow,  plain  and  quilled. 

Convolwlas  major,  pink,  purple,  and  deep  purple. 

India,  or  Chinese  pink,  single  and  double,  striped  variously. 

Ijove  lies  bleeding-. 

Marigold  African,  pale  and  deep  yellow,  plain  and  quilled. 

French,  yellow  and  crimson  striped,  velvety. 

dwarf  sorts  of  both  African  and  French. 
Marvel  of  Peru,  white,  yellow,  red,  purple  and  variegated. 
Nasturtium,  yellow  and  orange  flower. 
Scabious,  sometimes  made  an  annual. 
Stock,  com.  ten  week,  red,  scarlet,  purple  and  white. 

dwarf  French  fine  scarlet,  and  varieties. 
Sweet  sultan,  yellow,  purple,  red  and  white  flowered. 
Xeranthemum,  or  eternal  flower,  yellow,white,  violet  and  purple. 
Zinnia,  yellow  flowered,  and  red,  many  varieties. 

HABDY    ANNUALS. 

Adonis,  pheasant's  eye,  or  bird's  eye,  red  and  yellow. 
Alysson,  sweet  scented,  white  flowering. 
Candy  tuft,  while,  red,  crimson  and  purple. 
Caterpillar  plant,  yellow,  varieties. 


ON    THE    CULTURE    OF   ANNUALS    AND   BIENNIALS,        43 

Catchfly,  LobeVs  red,  purple  and  white. 
Clary,  annual  pink,  purple  and  white  topped. 
Convolvulus  minor,  blue,  white  and  striped. 
CyaniLS,  or  corn  bottles,  blue,  red,  purple,  white  and  striped. 
Devil  in  a  bush,  or  Lady  in  the  Green. 
Hawkweed,  red,  pale  and  deep  yellow. 
Ketmia  bladder,  or  flower  of  an  hour,  yellow. 
Larkspur,  tall,  branching  and  rocket, 
dwarf  rocket,   of  varieties. 
Neapolitan,  branched  and  spotted. 
Lavatera,  or  Cretan  mallow,  red,  white  and  purple. 
JLupine,  sweet  scented,  yellow  flowered. 

common,  blue,  white,  and  varieties, 
giant  blue,  and  rose  colored. 
Mallow,  curled  leaved  Syrian  and  Chinese,  pink. 
Marigold,  giant,  or  large  common  double. 

large  cape,  leafy,  and  naked  stalked. 
French  and  African  varieties. 
Mignonette,  (trailing)  or  sweet  scented  reseda. 
Mulberry  blight,  or  strawberry  spinach,  red  fruit. 
Pea.  sweet,  purple,  scarlet,  white,  pink  and  white  or  painted  lady. 
Persicaria,  oriental,  red  flowered. 
Poppy,  tall,  double  purple,  scarlet,  carnation,  &c. 
dwarf,  or  corn  poppy,  double,  a  variety, 
chelidonium,  or  horned  scarlet,  yellow. 
Snails,  hedge  hogs  and  horns,  yellow. 
Snapdragon,  annual  Sicilian,  white  flowered. 
Stock,  (maritime)  dwarf  annual,  or  Virginian. 
Sunjlower,  large  double,  pale  and  full  yellow. 

dwarf  double  ditto. 
Venus's  locking  glass,  blue,  white  and  purple. 

naval  wort,  common  and  Portugal,  white. 
Xeranthemum,  or  eternal  flower,  yellow. 

Art.  5.  —  Biennial  Flowers. 

Biennials  are  those  plants  which  flower  the  second 
year  from  the  seed  and  then  perish  :  this  definition,  how- 
ever, is  not  in  all  cases  correct,  for  in  some  instances  plants 
of  this  denomination  are  known  to  flower  for  three  years 
after  being  produced  from  the  seed.  But  as  the  term  is 
generally  used  and  in  most  cases  may  be  considered  as  a 


44  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Standard  rule,  I  shall  here  retain  it  as  the  general  head. 
The  plants  of  this  class  are  not  numerous ;  they  are  exem- 
plified in  the  Foxglove,  Campanula  grandiflora,  the 
Wallflower,  and  the  like — the  method  of  culture  is  to 
sow  the  seed  in  the  spring  with  the  annual  varieties,  and 
let  them  remain  in  the  beds  or  borders  until  they  are  of  a 
proper  size  to  be  planted  out  in  the  places  intended  for 
their  flowering,  when  they  may  receive  the  same  culture 
as  other  plants  growing  by  them.^ 

Canterbury  bells,  blue,  purple  and  white  flower. 

Carnation,  a  great  variety. 

Clary,  garden,  a  variety  in  leaf,  purple. 

Honesty,  satin  flower,  or  moonwort,  purple  and  white. 

Mullien,  branching,  phlomoide  and  sinuated,  yellow. 

Penstemon,  (a  biennial  perennial)  violet  and  plain. 

Scabious,  purple,  black,  red,  white  and  striped,  flower. 

Snapdragon,ied,  purple,  white, yellow,  and  variegated. 

Sweet  William,  single  and  double,  a  variety. 

mule,  or  sweet  william  pink,  double  red. 

broad  leaved,  striped  and  red  flower. 


CHAPTER   II. 

On  the  Culture  of  Perennials. 


Art.  1.  —  Perennial  Herbaceous  Plants. 
Perennial  herbaceous  plants,  are  those  which  die  down 
to  the  root  yearly,  the  toots  of  which  remain  many  years ; 

*  For  a  descriptive  list  of  tender  biennials,  see  Appendix,  Art.  2. 


ON    THE    CULTURE    OF   PERENNIALS.  45 

they  are  exemplified  in  the  Phlox,  Golden  rod,  Asters,  and 
many  other  kinds  of  native  plants. 

There  is  no  class  of  plants  more  deserving  general  cul- 
ture in  the  flower  garden  than  perennials,  which,  when 
once    introduced,   require   but  trifling    attention  ;    their 
increase  is  also  of  the  most  encouraging  nature  which  in 
most  varieties  is  simply  the   dividing  of  or   parting  the 
roots  in  the  autu«in  or  spring  as  directed  under  the  head 
of  propagation.     Herbaceous  plants  may  be  divided  into 
three  classes,  namely  :    bulbous,  as  the  Tulip,  Hyacinth, 
and  most  Lilies  ;  tuberous,  as  the  Dahlia  and  Pceony  ;  and 
fibrous,  as  the  Phlox  and  Pereniiial  aster.  These  separate 
divisions  may  be  again  divided  into   hardy  and  tender, 
with  reference   to  the   different  climates  to  which  they 
belong :  for  instance  in  bulbs.  Tulips  and  Hyacinths  are 
hardy  —  the  Jacobean  lily  and  Per  aria  are  tender.     In 
tuberous  roots,  the  Pceony  is  hardy  and  the  Dahlia  is  ten- 
der ;  and   in  fibrous,  most  kinds  are   hardy,  although  in 
many  cases  they  are  killed  by  the  winter  and  wet  saturat- 
ing  their  crowns,  on  which  account  it  is  necessary  that 
they  should  be  partially  covered  in  the  winter  to  guard 
them  against  being  injured  in  that  manner. 

In  planting  Herbaceous  plants  the  principal  object  to 
be  borne  in  mind  is  their  height,  color,  and  time  of  flow- 
ering, in  order  that  they  may  be  so  distributed  in  the  beds 
as  to  form  a  pleasing  variety,  which  can  be  effected  by  re- 
ferring to  the  Descriptive  List  subjoined  hereto. 

In  forming  a  Descriptive  List  I  have  been  very  particu- 
lar in  selecting  such  kinds  as  seem  the  most  adapted  to 
the  purpose,  and  I  have  also  chosen  rather  an  extensive 
list  in  consequence  of  their  being  worthy  of  more  general 
notice  than  has  been  taken  of  that  department. 


46 


THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 


Art.    2.  —  Descriptive    List   of   Herbaceous  Perennial 
Flowering  Plants. 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.    Height 

.  Time  of  flow( 

ACHILLEA. 

Sneezewort. 

montana 

mountain 

Aug. 

ACONITUM. 

Wolf's  Bane. 

japonicum 

Japan 

Black 

6 

June,  Aug. 

album 

white 

White 

4 

July,  Aug. 

ACT.EA. 

ACT^A. 

album 

white 

White 

3 

April,  June, 

AMSONIA. 

Amsonia. 

salicifolia 

Willow  leaved 

Blue 

2 

May,  Juue. 

latifolia 

broad  leaved 

Blue 

2 

May,  June. 

ANEMONE. 

Anemoxe. 

Pulsatilla 

pasque  flower 

Violet 

h 

April,  May, 

hepatica 

common  hepatica  Blue 

h 

April,  May, 

ASCLEPIAS. 

Swallow  Wort. 

tuberosa 

tuberous  rooted 

Orange 

2 

July,  Aug. 

incarnata 

flesh  colored 

Purple 

2 

July,  Aug. 

decumbens 

decumbent 

Orange 

2 

July,  Aug. 

ASTER. 

Starwort. 

Novae  Angliae 

New  England 

Purple 

6 

Sept.,  Oct. 

amj'gdalinus 

almond  leaved 

Purple 

BETONICA. 

Betony. 

officinalis 

wood 

Purple 

2 

July,  Aug. 

CAMPANULA. 

Bell  Flower. 

azurea 

azure 

Blue 

3 

July,  Aug. 

versicolor 

various  colored 

Striped 

4 

July,  Sept. 

urticifolia 

nettle-leaved 

Purple 

3 

Aug. 

persicafolia,  pi. 

peach-leaved 

White 

2 

June,  July. 

CASSLA. 

Cassia. 

marilandica 

Maryland 

Yellow 

4 

Aug. 

CENTAUREA. 

Centaury. 

nigra 

Black  Knapweed  Purple 

2 

May,  Aug. 

CLEMATIS. 

Virgin's  Boweb 

integrifolia 

entire-leaved 

Blue 

2 

July,  Aug. 

erecta 

upright 

White 

3 

July,  Aug. 

alpina 

Alpine 

White 

3 

Julj^,  Aug. 

angustifolia 

narrow-leaved 

Blue 

2 

July,  Aug. 

OIT   THE    CULTURE    OF    PERENNIALS. 


47 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.    H, 

eight. 

Time  of  flowerini 

COMMELINA. 

COMMELINA. 

Yirginica 

Virginian 

Blue 

h 

July. 

CONVALLERIA. 

Lily  of  the  Ya 

lLLEY. 

majalis 

major 

White 

1 

July. 

COREOPSIS. 

Coreopsis. 

grandiflora 

great  flowering 

Yellow 

2 

July,  Aug. 

lanceolata 

lance-leaved 

Yellow 

2 

July,  Aug. 

auriculata 

ear-leaved 

Yellow 

2 

July,  Aug. 

tenuifolia 

fine-leaved 

Yellow 

2 

July,  Aug. 

CORONILLA. 

COHONILLA. 

coronata 

large-headed 

Yellow 

2  in. 

June,  July 

CYNOGLOSSUM. 

Hound's  Tongue. 

omphaloides 

comfery  leaved 

Blue 

k 

July,  Aug. 

DELPHINIUM. - 

Larkspur. 

grandiflorum 

great  flowered 

Blue 

2 

Sept.  Oct. 

datum 

common  Bee 

Blue 

6 

June,  Sept. 

chinense 

Chinese 

Blue 

2 

June. 

urceolatum 

hollow -leaved 

Blue 

2 

June,  Sept. 

DICTAMNUS. 

Fhaxinella. 

rubra 

red 

Red 

2 

Aug. 

alba 

white 

White 

2 

Aug. 

DRACOCEPHALUN.  Dragon's  He 

AD. 

denticulatiim 

Carolina 

Striped 

1 

Aug.  Sept. 

variegatum 

variegated 

Purple 

1 

Aug. 

Tirginicum 

Virginian 

Purple 

h 

Aug. 

speciosum 

showy 

Pink 

2 

July,  Aug. 

EUPHORBIA. 

Spurge. 

Ceparissias 

Cyprus 

Purple 

2 

April,  May. 

ERINGIUM. 

Eringo. 

planum 

flat-leaved 

L.  Blue 

2 

July,  Sept. 

GENTIANA. 

Gentian, 

vema 

spring 

Blue 

2 

May,  June. 

GERANIUM. 

Crane's  Bill. 

iberium 

Iberian 

Blue 

li 

June,  Sept. 

sylvaticum 

wood 

Purple 

li 

May,  June. 

angulosum 

angular 

Blue 

1 

May,  June. 

HEPATIC  A. 

Hepatica. 

triloba 

Early  Anemone 

Purple 

h 

April,  May 

48 


THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.    He 

ight. 

Time  of  flowe 

HELIANTBUS. 

Sun  Flower. 

divaricatus 

divaricate 

Yellow 

6 

Aug.,  Oct. 

var.  pie  no 

double 

Yellow 

3 

Aug.,  Oct. 

giganthus 

gigantic 

Yellow 

10 

Aug.,  Oct. 

HESPERIS. 

Rocket. 

matronalis 

common 

Purple 

4 

July,  Sept. 

HIBISCUS. 

Hibiscus. 

palustris 

marsh 

Pink 

4 

July,  Sept. 

var.  albus 

white 

White 

3 

July,  Sept. 

militaris 

smooth 

Purple 

4 

July,  Sept. 

LATHYRUS. 

Lathyrus. 

latifolius 

broad-leaved 

Pink 

6 

July,  Sept. 

luberosus 

tuberous 

Red 

2 

July,  Aug. 

LIATRIS. 

LlATRIS. 

scariosa 

scarious  cupped 

:  Purple 

3 

July,  Aug, 

pilosa 

hairy-leaved 

Purple 

3 

July,  Aug. 

spicala 

long-spiked 

Purple 

6 

Aug.,  Oct. 

LINUM. 

Flax. 

perenne 

Perennial  Flax 

Blue 

2 

July,  Aug. 

LOBELIA. 

Lobelia. 

cardinalis 

Cardinal-flower 

Scarlet 

3 

May,  Oct. 

siphilitica 

blue-cardinal 

Blue 

2 

May,  Aug. 

splendens 

splendid 

Scarlet 

3 

May. 

fulgens 

fulgent 

Scarlet 

3 

May,  Sept. 

LUPINUS. 

Lupine. 

perennis 

perennial 

Blue 

2 

May,  July. 

polyphyllus 

many-leaved 

B.  White  3 

May,  July. 

LYCHNIS. 

Lychnis. 

chalceJonicus 

scarlet 

Scarlet 

3 

June,  July. 

var.  pleno 

double  scarlet 

Scarlet 

3 

June,  July. 

Tar.  alba 

double  white 

White 

3 

June,  July, 

LYSIMACHIA. 

Loose  tbife. 

verticilata 

wborled 

Yellow 

3 

July,  Aug. 

ciliata 

ciliated 

Yellow 

3 

July,  Aug. 

slricta 

upright 

Yellow 

3 

July,  Aug. 

Nummalarie 

Moneywort 

Yellow 

2 

July,  Aug. 

LYTHRUM. 

Willow  Hebd. 

salicaria 

common 

Purple 

4 

Aug. 

verticilatum 

whorl  leaved 

Yellow 

3 

July,  Aug. 

ON    THE    CULTURE    OP    PERENNIALS. 


49 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.    Hei 

ight. 

Time  of  flowering. 

MONARDA. 

MONABDA. 

didyma 

Oswego  tea 

Blue 

3 

July,  Aug. 

clinopodia 

wild-basil-leaved  P.  white 

2 

July. 

purpurea 

crimsoa 

Purple 

3 

June,  Aug. 

(ENOTHERA. 

CEnothera. 

Fraseri 

Fraser's 

Yellow 

1 

May,  Oct. 

PA  PAVER. 

Poppy. 

orientale 

oriental 

R«d 

3 

May,  June, 

bracteatum 

bracted 

Red 

3 

May,  June. 

PARDANTHUS. 

Pardanthus. 

chinensis 

Chinese 

Orange 

2 

June,  July. 

PENTSTEMON. 

Pextstemon. 

campaRulata 

bell-fiowered 

L.  purple 

2 

March,  Oct. 

pubescens 

broad-leaved 

Purple 

2 

March,  Oct. 

angustifolia 

narrow-leaved 

L.  purple 

2 

July,  Sept. 

PHLOX. 

Lychnidea. 

paniculata 

panic  uled 

Pink 

3 

Aug.  Sept. 

acuminata 

Lyons 

Red 

4 

July,  Aug. 

shepherdii 

Sheperd's 

maculata 

spot-stalked 

Red 

4 

July,  Aug. 

carnea 

flesh-colored 

Pink 

1 

Aug.,  Sept. 

sauveolens 

white-flowered 

White 

2 

July,  Aug. 

tardifolia 

late  white  (swee 

it)  White 

3 

Sept.,  Oct. 

pyramidata 

pyramidal 

Red 

4 

July,  Aug. 

scabra 

rough-leaved 

subulata 

awl-leaved 

Flame 

h 

April,  June. 

listoniana 

Liston 

stolonifera 

creeping 

Red 

2 

April.  June. 

POTENTILLA. 

ClNdUEFOIL. 

formosa 

beautiful 

Red 

2 

May,  Sept. 

atrosanguinea 

dark  crimson 

Puce 

2 

May,  Sept. 

RUDBECKIA. 

RUDBECKIA. 

purpurea 

purple 

Purple 

4 

July,  Aug. 

fulgida 

yellow 

Yellow- 

2 

July,  Aug. 

SAPONARIA. 

SOAPWORT. 

officinalis 

officinal 

White 

2 

July,  Aug. 

SAXIFRAGA. 

Saxifrage. 

crassifolia 

thick-leaved 

Purple 

I 

May. 

50 


THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.      Height. 

.  Time  of  flowering, 

SMTLAX. 
herl)acea 

Smilax. 
herbaceous 

Green 

4 

July. 

SPIR.EA. 

filipendula 
lobata 
ulmaria 
flora  pleno 

Spir^a. 
dropwort 
pal  mated 
elm-leaved 
double-white 

White 
Red 
White 
White 

3 

2 
3 
2 

June,  Oct. 
July,  Aug. 
May,  June. 
May,  June. 

STATICE. 
armenia 

Sea  Lavender 

Pink 

1 

July,  Aug. 

THALICTRUM. 
cornuti 

Meadow  Rue, 
Canadian 

White 

3 

May,  June, 

TRADESCANTIA. 

virginica 

Yar.  alba 

rosea 

Spiderwort. 
Virginian 
white 
rose-flowered 

Blue 

White 

Pink 

I 
1 

1 

May,  Oct. 
May,  Oct. 
May,  Oct. 

TROLLIS. 
europoeus 

Globe  Flower. 
European 

Yellow 

2 

May,  June. 

VALERIANA, 
rubra 

Valerian. 
red 

Red 

3 

July,  Aug. 

VERBASCUM. 
purpurea 

Mullen. 
purple 

Purple 

4 

July,  Aug. 

VERONICA. 

gentianoides 

siberica 

hyhrida 

spicata 

latifolia 

teucrium 

Speedwell. 

gentian-leaved 

Siberian 

Welsh 

spiked 

broad-leaved 

nigged-leaved 

Dark  blue  2 
Blue          3 
Blue          2 
Blue          2 
W.  blue     2 
L.  blue       2 

May,  June. 
July,  Aug. 
July,  Sept. 
July,  Sept. 
May,  June. 
June,  Aug. 

VIOLA. 

odorata 
var.  alba 
var.  plena 
grand iflora 

Violet. 

sweet 

white-flowered 

double-white 

great-flowering 

Purple 
White 
White 
D.  blue 

1 
h 

April,  May. 
April,  May. 
April,  May. 
May,  Aug. 

YUCCA. 

filamentosa 

gloriosa 

Adam's  Needli 

thready 

superb 

White 
White 

3 

4 

Sept. 
Aug, 

ON    THE    CULTURE    OF    PERENNIALS. 


51 


Art.  3. — Descriptive  List  of  Tuberous  and  Fleshy  Rooted 
Perennial  Plants. 
The  tuberous  and  fleshy  rooted  perennial  plants  are 
exemplified  in  the  Pceony,  Iris,  and  Hemerocallis  or  Day 
lily.  The  culture  is  similar  to  the  fibrous  rooted  herba- 
ceous kinds,  although  they  generally  thrive  and  flower 
better  in  a  moist  shaded  situation  than  any  other,  and  are 
particularly  adapted  to  the  facing  of  shrubberries  and  large 
flower  beds.  They  are  propagated  by  dividing  the  roots, 
which  see  at  page  33.  In  giving  a  description  of  a  few 
varieties  of  these  plants  I  shall  not  divide  them  into  parts, 
but  give  the  list  entire  and  designate  them  in  the  mar- 
gin. 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.    Height. 

Time  of  flowering, 

PiEONIA. 

Pmosy. 

Tuberous  rooted. 

Whitlejii 

double-white' 

White 

2 

May,  June. 

Hiimei 

double-crimson 

Red 

2 

May,  June. 

fragrails 

rose-scented 

Red 

2 

May,  June. 

lartarica 

Tartarian 

White 

2 

May,  June. 

rosea 

rose-colored 

Pink 

2 

May,  June. 

tenuifolia 

fine-leaved 

Red 

2 

May,  June. 

paradoxa 

paradoxical 

2 

May,  June. 

albiflora 

eatable-rooted 

White 

2 

Blay,  June. 

officinalis 

common 

Red 

2 

May,  June. 

HEMEROCALLIS. 

Day  Lily. 

Fleshy  rooted. 

Japonica 

white-flowered 

White 

1 

Aug.,  Sept. 

caerulea 

blue-flowered 

Blue 

1 

July,  Aug. 

flava 

yello^v 

Yellow 

2 

June,  July. 

IRIS. 

Iris. 

prismatica 

New-Jersey 

Purple 

2 

May,  June. 

versicolor 

various-colored 

Striped 

1 

May,  June. 

pumila 

Dwarf 

Purple 

h 

April,  May. 

siberica 

Siberian 

L.  blue 

2 

Blay,  June. 

52  THE    FLOWER  GARDEN    COMPANION. 

CHAPTER    III. 

On  the  Calture  of  Shrubs  and  Vines* 


Art.  1.  — Shrubs. 

Shrubs  are  either  deciduous  or  evergreen  ;  the  former 
are  exemplified  in  the  Lilac,  Double-flowering  almond,  and 
Snowberry  ;  the  latter,  in  the  Kalmia  or  American  lau- 
rel, and  those  plants  that  are  always  clothed  with  leaves, 
and  hence  the  name  evergreen. 

Shrubs  may  be  considered  as  the  lower  order  of  trees  ; 
they  are  a  very  useful  class  of  plants  for  the  flower  gar- 
den, and  are  especially  adapted  to  the  embellishment 
of  side  entrances  and  many  parts  about  town  and  coun- 
try residences,  where  herbaceous  and  dwarf  flowering 
plants  cannot  be  introduced  to  advantage.  In  the  flower 
garden  department  they  form  a  prominent  feature  ;  they 
are  planted  in  some  cases  in  the  centre  of  flower  beds  and 
borders,  in  other  cases  they  form  good  facings  to  the 
larger  kinds  of  trees  that  are  planted  as  belts  on  the  mar- 
gin of  pleasure  grounds,  &c. 

There  are  few  countries  that  possess  a  more  pretty  col- 
lection of  ?ia?2Y"e  plants  than  the  United  States,  and  indeed 
in  Europe  the  first  consideration  on  laying  out  flower  gar- 
dens and  extensive  grounds,  is,  to  prepare  a  piece  of 
ground  purposely  for  the  American  flower  garden;  how- 
ever, the  native  shrubs  and  plants  are  much  neglected  in 
culture  here,  which  I  imagine  is  chiefly  owing  to  their 
being  considered  too  common,  while  those  plants  which 


ON    THE    CULTURE    OF    SHRUBS    AND    VINES.  53 

are  brought  from  foreign  countries  are  highly  prized. 
Whatever  may  be  the  opinion  of  others,  I  cannot  conceive 
that  their  being  natives  of  this  or  that  country  can  in  any 
wise  affect  the  real  worth  of  flowers  and  plants,  which 
in  themselves  are  beautiful  to  every  beholder,  and  are 
intended  by  nature  as  an  embellishment  to  the  vegetable. 
It  is  their  finely  woven  texture  and  rich  coloring  that 
should  engage  our  admiration,  and  not  the  country 
which  has  given  birth  to  any  particular  variety.  I  hope 
therefore  that  in  future  the  many  pretty  varieties  of 
native  shrubs  and  plants  will  find  a  place  and  be  culti- 
vated in  the  shrubbery  and  flower  garden  where  they  can 
with  every  propriety  be  introduced  to  a  good  purpose- 
Indigenous  or  native  plants,  having  qualities  adapted  to 
the  country,  will  assume  a  most  pleasing  character  and  be 
much  improved  by  culture.  In  planting  shrnbs,  like  her- 
baceous and  all  other  kinds  of  plants,  the  general  rule 
must  be  to  place  them  as  much  as  possible  in  their  most 
appropriate  situation.  For  instance  the  pretty  dwarf  kinds, 
as  the  Mezeron  and  Double-flx)wering  almond,  are  the 
most  appropriate  for  small  flower  beds  and  the  facings  of 
the  shrubbery ;  the  taller  kinds,  as  the  Lilac,  are  gene- 
rally planted  to  cover  unsightly  objects  as  old  boarded 
fences  and  the  like. 

In  giving  a  descriptive  list  of  shrubs  I  have  divided  them 
into  two  classes,  the  Dwarf  and  the  Tall,  and  have  given 
their  height,  color  and  time  of  flowering  as  near  as  possi- 
ble on  a  medium  scale  with  reference  to  soils  and  loca- 
tions where  they  are  generally  to  be  found  growing  as 
ornamental  plants. 


5» 


54 


THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 


Art.  2. — Descriptive  List  of  Dwarf  Hardy  Shrubs, 

English  Name.        Color.    Height.  Time  of  flowering. 


Botanical  Nanne. 

AMYGDALIS. 

pumila 

AZALEA. 

nudiflora 
viscosa 
calendulacea 
alba 

CALYCANTHUS. 

floridus 
laevigaius 

CLETHRA. 

alnifolia 

COLUTEA. 

arborescens 

pocockii 

CORONILLA. 

emeris 

CORCHORUS. 

japonicas 

DAPHNE. 

Mezeruru 
Tar.  album 

HYDRANGEA. 

quercjfolia 
radiata 

HYPERICUM. 

kalniianum 
frondosum 

PHILADELPHIUS 
coronaris 
Tariegatus 
grandiflorus 

POTENTILLA. 

frulicosa 

PYRUS. 

japonica 


Dbl.  fl.  Almond. 
double -dwarf         Red  3    May. 

American  Honeysuckle. 

naked -flowered     Pink  3  May,  June, 

viscid  White         3  July,  Aug. 

orange  Orange        4  May,  June, 

early  white  White         3  May,  June. 

Sweet  scented  Smrud. 

Carolina  Purple  5     May,  Aug. 

smooth-leaved      Purple         6    May,  July. 

Clethea. 

alder-leaved  White         5    Aug.,  Oct. 

Bladder  Senna. 

common  Yellow        6    July,  Aug. 

Pocock's  Yellow        6    June,  Aug. 

COHONILLA, 

Scorpion  Senna     Red  3    May,  June. 

Japan  Globe-flower. 

Japan  Yellow        5    July,  Oct. 

E*APHNE. 

Mezeron  Purple  3  April,  May. 

white  White  3  April,  May. 

Hydrangea. 

oak-leaved  W.  green  3  June,  Sept. 

ray-leaved  White  4  July,  Aug. 

St.  Johns  Wort. 

kalmia-leavcd  Yellow  3  July,  Aug. 

green  Yellow  3  July,  Aug. 

Syringa. 

common  White  6  July,  Aug. 

variegated  White  4  July,  Aug'. 

large-flowered  White  3  July,  Aug. 

Shrubby  Cinquefoil. 

trifoil-leaved  Yellow  3  July,  Aug. 

Pybus. 

Japan  Purple  4  April,  May. 


ON    THE    CULTURE    OF    SHRUBS    AND  VINES. 


55 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.    Height. 

Time  of  flowering. 

RHODORA. 

Rhodora. 

canadensis 

Canadian 

Purple 

3 

April,  May. 

ROBINIA. 

ROBINIA. 

hispida 

Rose  acacia 

Pink 

6 

May,  Sept. 

RIBES. 

Missouri  Currant. 

aureum 

golden 

Yellow 

6 

April,  June. 

RUBUS. 

odoratus 

Bramble. 
flowering 

Red 

6 

June,  Aug. 

SPIR^A. 

sorbifolia 

opulifolia 

hypercifolia 

chamaedrifolia 

trilobata 

laevigata 

salicifolia 

Spir^a. 

pinnated                White 
Guelder-rose  Iv.    White 
Italian  May  fl.      Wliite 
germander-leaved  White 
three-lobed            White 
smooth-leaved      Red 
willow-leaved       Pink 

4 
5 
6 
2 
3 
4 
5 

Aug. 

June,  Aug. 
May,  June. 
June,  Aug. 
June. 

May,  June. 
June,  Aug. 

tomentosa 

tomentosa 

Pink 

5 

Aug.  Sept. 

STAPH  YLEA. 

Bladder  Nut. 

trifoliata 

three-leaved 

White 

6 

May,  June . 

SYMPHORIA. 

St.  Peters  Wort. 

glomerata 
racemosa 
variegata 

SYRINGA. 

common 

Snowberry 

variegated 

Lilac. 

Pink 
Pink 

4 
3 
3 

Aug.  Sept. 
July,  Aug. 
July,  Aug. 

purpurea 
persica 
var.  alba 

purple 

Persian 

white 

Purple 
Purple 
White 

8 
4 
4 

May,  June. 
May,  June. 
May,  June. 

Art.  3.  —  Descriptive  List  of  Tall   Shrubs  and  Dwarf 
Ornamental  Trees. 

[Those   marked  thus  *  are  used  for  single  ornamental  objects  on 
lawns,  &c.] 

Botanical  Name.  English  Name.         Color.    Heig^ht.  Time  of  flowering. 

jESCULUS.  Horse  Chestnut. 

*coccinea  scarlet  Scarlet       10    June,  July, 

parviflora  small-flowered      While        10    June,  July, 
macrostachya  10    June,  July. 


56 


THE    FLOWER    GARBEN    COMPANION. 


Botanical  Name, 

English  Name. 

Color.    Height 

.  Time  of  flowering. 

AMORPHIA. 

Amorphia. 

fruticosa 

shrubby 

Purple 

le 

June,  July. 

CRATiEGUS. 

Hawthorn. 

pleno 

double 

White 

10 

June. 

*monogj'nia 

one-styled 

White 

10 

June. 

*coccinea 

scarlet-fruited 

White 

10 

June. 

EUONYMUS. 

Spindle  Tree. 

♦americanus 

Burning  bush 

Pink 

10 

June,  July. 

♦fruclu  albo 

white-fruited 

White 

10 

June,  July. 

*atropurpurea 

purple-fruited 

Purple 

10 

June,  July. 

FAGUS. 

Beech. 

♦purpurea 

purple-leaved 

15 

*cuprea 

copper-leaved 

18 

FRAXINUS. 

Ash. 

♦pendula 

weeping 

8 

HALISEA. 

Snowdrop  Tree. 

tetraptera 

four-winged 

White 

6 

April,  May. 

HIBISCUS. 

Hibiscus. 

syriacus 

allhea  frutex 

Purple 

8 

Aug.  Sept. 

rubro  pleno 

double  red 

Dark  red 

8 

July,  Sept. 

albo  pleno 

double  white 

White 

8 

July,  Aug. 

variegatus 

striped-leaved 

Striped 

8 

Aug.  Sept. 

LIGUSTRUM. 

Privet. 

vulgare 

common 

White 

8 

June,  July. 

variegatus 

striped-leaved 

White 

8 

June,  July. 

SALIX. 

Willow. 

caprea 

great  round-leaved 

12 

annularis 

12 

pentandria 

Bay-leaved 

12 

pendula 

weeping 

20 

SHEPERDIA. 

Buffalo  Tree. 

eleaguoides 

silver-leaved 

White 

12 

April. 

SPARTIUM. 

Broom. 

scoparium 

common 

Yellow 

6 

May,  June. 

SOPHORA. 

SOPHOBA. 

japonica 

japonicum 

VIBURNUM. 

Viburnum. 

opulus 

Guelder  rose 

White 

10 

May,  June. 

oxycoccus 

cranberry-like 

White 

12 

July. 

ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  SHRUBS  AND  VINES.  57 

Art.  4.  —  Hardy   Running   Vines ,  for  Covering  Ar- 
bors, ^c. 

The  Honeysuckle  and  Clematis  are  examples  of  run- 
ning vines  that  are  useful  for  the  covering  of  arbors, 
trellises,  walls,  and  the  like.  Vines  are  readily  propa- 
gated by  layers  and  cuttings  which  see  under  the  head  of 
propagation,  page  33. 

Spring  pruning  and  dressi7ig  Vines.  —  All  kinds  of 
hardy  vines  may  be  pruned  in  a  spring  in  regular  man- 
ner, by  cutting  out  all  the  dead  branches  and  regulating 
the  remainder  in  such  a  manner  that  they  are  at  an  equal 
distance  apart,  when  they  are  to  be  nailed  with  shreds 
of  woollen  or  leather,  or  tied  in  a  neat  regular  manner 
with  bass  or  other  string. 

Summer  pruning.  —  The  summer  pruning  may  be 
commenced  so  soon  as  the  young  shoots  are  grown  six  or 
seven  inches,  by  thinning  them  out  in  such  a  manner  that 
they  are  at  an  equal  distance  apart,  and  allowing  room  for 
their  future  growth.  The  young  shoots  should  after- 
wards be  regularly  attended  to  during  the  summer  in 
pruning  ofTall  superfluous  wood  and  training  the  remain- 
der in  a  neat  manner  —  not  too  thickly  together,  which  is 
often  the  case  and  by  which  they  are  often  much  injured. 

Art.  5.  — Descriptive  List  of  Hardy  Vines- 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name.        Color.    He: 

ight. 

Time  of  flowering. 

BIGNONIA. 

Trumpet  Floweb. 

radicans 

ash-leaved             Orange 

30 

July,  Aug. 

major 

large-leaved          Orange 

30 

July,  Aug. 

CLEMATIS. 

Virgin's  Bower. 

virginica 

Virginian                G.  white 

15 

June,  Aug. 

flamula 

sweet-scented        While 

15 

July,  Oct. 

verlicilala 

American              Purple 

15 

May,  June. 

58 


THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.     Height. 

Time  of  flowering. 

GLYCINE. 

Glycine. 

frutescens 

shrubby 

Purple 

15 

June,  Sept, 

Apios 

tuberous -rooted 

Pink 

12 

Aug.  Sept. 

CAPRIOFOLIUM. 

Honeysuckle. 

Periclymenum 

Eng.  woodbine 

Red 

18 

June,  Sept. 

variegatum 

var.  woodbine 

Red 

15 

June,  July. 

sempervirens 

trumpet 

Scarlet 

IS 

May,  Aug. 

quercifolia 

oak-leaved 

Yellow 

20 

May,  July. 

Fraseri 

Yellow- trumpet 

Yellow 

20 

May,  July. 

rubrum 

red  flowered 

Red 

15 

May,  July. 

CHAPTER   IV. 

On  tbe   Culture   of  tbe  Rose. 


Art.  1.  —  Remarks. 
The  garden  rose  is  one  of  the  most  pretty  ornaments 
of  the  flower  garden  of  its  season,  besides  having  many 
useful  qualities  for  medicinal  purposes,  as  lotions,  con- 
serves, and  the  like.  In  perfumery,  it  is  also  used  in 
many  ways,  as  waters,  odors,  and  essential  oils  ;  which 
are  extracted  from  it.  The  rose  may  be  said  to  be  unri- 
valled as  a  flower,when  its  almost  endless  varieties  of  color 
are  taken  into  consideration,  together  with  its  fragrance 
and  neat  habit  as  a  garden  shrub  :  and  many  varieties  are 
proved  to  be  particularly  adapted  to  the  covering  of  trel- 
lises and  arbors,  as  the  running  kinds  of  the  Multiflora, 
Grivelle,  and  so  on ;  and  to  these  may  be  added  the  China 


ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  THE  ROSE.  59 

tea-scented,  Noisette,  and  an  innumerable  tribe  called  the 
China  rose;  which,  although  they  are  considered  as 
green-house  plants,  would  endure  the  most  severe  win- 
ters in  this  climate,  with  a  little  protection,  as  directed 
under  the  proper  head. 

To  take  up  much  space  in  this  place  on  the  culture  of 
the  rose,  would  be  altogether  useless.  It  may  be  briefly 
stated  that  like  most  shrubs  and  trees,  it  requires,  a  deep, 
rich  soil  to  enable  it  to  grow  to  perfection.  Many  va- 
rieties, as  the  Moss  and  so  on,  thrive  well  on  a  stiff  clay 
bottom.  It  is  proper  to  state  here,  that,  in  many  cases,  I 
have  found  that  laying  the  young  wood  of  roses  yearly 
answered  a  good  purpose  ;  particularly  in  the  Red  moss 
and  those  of  a  straggling  habit :  the  rose  being  laid  yearly, 
forms  a  neat  compact  stool  of  plants,  which  are  always  the 
most  thrifty  and  flower  the  best. 

Propagation  or  increase.  —  The  garden  rose  is  gene- 
rally propagated  by  laying  the  young  wood  early  in  the 
spring.^  To  this  may  be  added,  dividing  the  young 
plants    from    the    parent    plant,    and    inoculating    the 

finer  varieties,  as  the  Moss  and  others,  into  those   of  a 

strong  habit. 

Before  I  take  leave  of  the  subject  of  the  rose,  I  beg 

to  ofler  a  few  remarks  on  the  more   general  introduction 

of  its  culture  into  the  flower  garden. 

I  know  not  of  any  denomination  of  flower    gardens 

where    the    Rose   should  not   find    a    prominent   place. 

When  seen   around   the  farm-house  or   cottage   situated 

on  main  roads,  it  enlivens    the  scenery  of  the  country ; 

and  it  should  always  be  found  in  the  choice  collections  of 

the  amateur.     I  am  persuaded   the  fair  sex  will  always 

*  See  "  Propagation  by  layers,"  page  34. 


60  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

encourage  its  culture,  for  the  sake  of  its  essential  waters 
and  perfumes  for  the  toilet,  as  well  as  its  modest  beauty  ; 
to  them,  therefore,  I  need  not  say  a  word  in  commenda- 
tion of  its  valuable  properties.  To  the  apothecary  too  I 
need  not  recommend  a  flower  which  is  daily  recognized  as 
of  professional  utility;  and  the  buds,  as  a  prominent 
feature  in  the  bouquet,  at  once  show  its  importance  as  an 
ornamental  flower ;  indeed,  I  knownot  of  anything  more 
beautiful  in  the  vegetable  kingdom,  than  a  Red  moss  rose 
bud,  about  half  expanded  :  its  mossy  calyx  or  covering,  as 
a  woven  texture,  is  a  perfect  model  of  nature's  production  ; 
and  the  petals  or  flower  leaves  exhibit  the  most  beauteous 
traces  of  the  finest  tinges  of  her  pencil. 

In  giving  a  descriptive  list  of  roses,  I  have  selected 
more  numerously  than  I  at  first  contemplated,  in  order  to 
introduce  them  more  generally  in  the  flower  garden  de- 
partment. In  my  list  it  will  be  perceived  that  the  time 
of  flowering  has  been  omitted,  which  in  most  garden 
roses  happens  in  the  months  of  June  and  July,  with  the 
exception  of  the  Chinese  varieties,  which  should,  I  think, 
be  pressed  into  the  service  of  the  flower  garden,  as  much 
as  possible.  While  I  am  on  the  subject  of  the  rose,  it 
will  be  proper  to  say  that  the  finer  hardy  kinds  should  be 
inoculated  on  the  native  sweetbriar  four  or  five  feet  high 
for  the  purpose  of  forming  tree  roses,  w^hich  are  the  pret- 
tiest ornaments  of  the  season  for  planting  on  grass  plots 
and  in  centres  of  flower  beds  as  prominent  features  ;  the 
severe  winters,  however,  are  an  objection  to  this  ;  but  in 
many  cases  trees  of  this  kind  are  successfully  cultivated 
by  bearing  in  the  inoculated  part  and  protecting  it  with 
straw  or  anything  to  guard  oflTthe  sudden  changes  of  the 
winter.  I  hope  in  a  few  years  to  see  this  subject  suc- 
cessfully and  generally  attended  to. 


ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  THE  ROSE. 


51 


Art.  2.  —  Descriptive  List  of  Roses. 

[Those  kinds  which  are  thus  designated  *  are  the  most  proper  for 
small  collections  of  the  different  colors.  M.  F.  indicates  the  monthly 
flowering  ;  in  all  parts  of  the  Northern  States,  monthly  roses  require 
to  he  covered  in  the  autumn  to  protect  them  during  the  winter,  which 
see  under  article  12  of  the  chapter  "  On  the  Monthly  Calendar." 
R.  V.  stands  for  running  vines  adapted  for  arbors  and  the  like.] 


♦White  Moss. 
*White  Provence. 
White  of  the  seasons. 


Belle  Auguste. 
*Champney.     m.  f. 
Double  Sweetbrier. 


WHITE. 

Spineless  Virgin. 
White  Globe. 
Snowball. 

LIGHT  BLUSH. 

New  Double  Sweetbrier. 
Everblooming  China,     m.  f. 
Blush  Bel^ic. 


DEEP   BLUSH. 


Blush,  100  leaved. 

*De  Meaux. 

*Double  Red  Sweetbrier. 
Dutch  Cluster. 


*Imperial  Blush. 
Pierson's  Gigantic. 
*Prolific. 
Striped  Mundi. 


LIGHT    ROSE    COLORED. 


Bonaparte. 
*Belle  Aurora. 
*Dwarf  Dutch  Cabbage. 
*Damask. 
Dwarf,  100  leaved. 
*Early  Ranunculus. 
*Great  Royal. 
*Grand  Monarque. 
Greville.     b.  v. 


Multiflora.     m.  f. 

Noir  Fence. 

*Red  Moss. 

Royal  Cabbage. 

^Ranunculus. 

*St.  Francis. 

*Versailles. 

*York  and  Lancaster. 


DARK    ROSE    COLORED. 


♦Agreeable  Violet. 
Aurora  Brilliant. 
Bishop. 
♦Brown's. 
Burgundy. 
♦Cabbage  Provence. 
♦Dutch  Cabbage. 

6 


♦Grand  Triumphant. 
♦Imperial  Red. 
Maria  Louisa. 
Noisette,     m.  f. 
♦Nigritiana- 
Ornament  de  Parade. 
Queen. 


62 


THE    FLOWEE  GARDEN    COMPANIOIT. 


*  Belle  Amiable. 
Burning'  Coal. 
♦Crimson  Velvet. 
♦Chancellor, 
King  of  Mexico. 

Carmine. 

♦Carmine  Brilliant. 
Favorite  Pmrple. 


La  Nigresse. 
♦Royal  Agathe. 
Red  Mignon. 
♦Superb  Crimson. 
♦Sceptre. 


CARMINE. 


♦Royal  Bouquet. 
Sabila  noir. 


YELLOW. 

♦Double  Yellow,  (Harrison's.) 
Yellow  Sweetbrier. 


Austrian,  (Red  and  Yellow.) 
Belle  Alliance. 


BED   AND  VIOLET. 


Amaranlhe. 

♦Domini. 

Dark  Violet. 

♦Flora's  Wreath. 

Giant. 

King  of  the  Reds. 

♦Brunette  Superb. 
Double  Velvet. 
♦Grand  Pompadorc. 
♦Hibernia. 
♦Imperial  Blackest. 

♦African. 
♦Brussels. 

♦George  the  Fourth. 
Iris  Noir. 
♦Ombre  Superb. 


DARK. 


Nonesuch. 

♦Negro. 

Ornament  of  the  Reds. 

♦Purple  Violet. 

Shell. 


♦Imperial  Superb. 
♦Negro  Panacea. 
♦Pluto. 
Proserpine. 
♦Triumphant. 


VERY    DARK. 


♦Tuscany. 
♦Infernal. 
♦Bright  Purple. 
Cherry. 


ON   THE    CULTURE    OF    FLORISTS'    FLOWERS.  63 

CHAPTER  V. 

On  tbe  Calture  of  Florist's  Flowers. 


Art.  1.  —  The  Double  Dahlia. 

As  the  Dahlia  is  known  in  the  flower  garden  depart- 
ment as  a  flower  of  the  first  order,  any  thing  that  can  be 
said  of  its  beauty,  would  be  altogether  superfluous  here. 
I  shall  therefore  give  a  cursory  notice  of  its  culture,  and 
annex  a  descriptive  list  compiled  from  some  of  the  best  va- 
rieties of  the  present  time. 

Increase.  —  The  Dahlia  is  increased  in  the  first  instance, 
by  seeds,  from  which  most  of  the  beautiful  varieties  now 
extant  have  been  procured  :  the  seeds  should  be  sown 
early  in  April,  in  a  pot  of  light,  rich  sandy  soil  and  plung- 
ed into  a  hot  bed.  When  the  weather  is  sufficiently 
warm,  (which  is  generally  in  the  middle  of  May,)  the 
plants  ma}'-  be  planted  out  in  the  place  intended  for  their 
flowering.  If  a  hot  bed  is  not  in  readiness,  the  seed  may 
be  sown  in  the  open  grounds  the  first  week  in  May,  and 
planted  out  as  above  directed. 

Increase  by  roots.  —  This  is  eflfected  by  dividing  them 
in  March  or  April,  or  as  soon  as  the  eyes  begin  to  push.^ 
The  roots  being  divided,  pot  them  in  a  rich  sandy  loam, 
and  plunge  the  pots  into  bottom  heat,  either  in  a  hot  bed 
or  pit ;  or  they  may  be  placed  in  a  green-house,  or  any 
convenient  place,  to  forward  them  previous  to  planting 
them  in  their  place  for  flowering,  which  may  be  perform- 

♦  See  "  Increase  of  tuberous  roots,"  page  33. 


64  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

ed  when  the  frost  has  disappeared,  and  the  weather  begins 
to  be  warm,  which  will  be  about  the  middle  or  latter  end 
of  May."^ 

Soil  and  location. — The  Dahlia  thrives  best  in  a  deep, 
rich,  loamy  soil,  where  its  roots  can  strike  deep,  which  is 
of  great  advantage  to  its  flowering,  in  a  dry  hot  climate  ^ 
its  location  should  be  such  that  the  plants  enjoy  a  free 
exposure  to  the  sun  and  air,  and  its  adaptation  should  be 
so,  that  the  height  of  the  plant  corresponds  to  its  intended 
purpose,  namely,  the  tallest  kinds  should  be  planted 
among  the  tall  shrubs,  in  a  small  parterre,  the  dwarf 
kinds  are  most  proper. 

To  each  plant  a  strong  stake  should  be  fixed,  to  tie  the 
plant  to,  and  guard  it  from  storms  and  the  like. 

In  the  autumn  when  the  frost  appears  and  kills  the  stalks, 
the  roots  are  to  be  taken  up,  dried,  and  placed  in  boxes, 
with  sand  amongst  them  ;  or  they  may  be  deposited  in 
the  green-house  under  the  stage  or  convenient  moist 
place  until  the  spring. 

The  roots  of  Dahlias  being  tender,  the  principal  object 
is  to  keep  the  frost  from  them,  in  a  moderately  moist  situa- 
tion, at  a  temperature  some  few  degrees  above  freezing 
point. 

There  are  many  instances  of  the  Dahlia  putting  forth 
its  flowers  in  June,  while  the  same  variety,  in  the  same 
neighborhood,  perhaps  will  not  show  a  flower  until  Sep- 
tember: —  this  is  principally  owing  to  the  culture,  and, 
generally,  those  plants  first  planted,  flower  the  earliest. 
When  the  object  is  to  have  a  few  fine  flowers  for  show 
late  in  the  fall,  late  planting  is  the  best,  and  but  few  flow- 
ers should  be   allowed  to  be   on  the  plant  at  the  time  ;  all 

*The  time  will  vary  in  different  climates;  when  the  weather  has 
settled  warm,  the  business  may  be  done  with  safety. 


ON    THE    CULTURE    OF    FLORISTS'    FLOWERS.  65 

imperfect  flowers  should  be  taken  from  the  plant  as  they 
appear,  and  the  white  and  delicate  mottled  kinds  should 
be  shaded  from  the  sun  of  mid-day.  For  an  explanation 
of  double  flowers,  colors  and  the  like  I  refer  the  reader  to 
the  proper  heads  in  the  compendium. 

Art.  2.  —  Descriptive  List  of  Double  Dahlias. 
The  plants  described  in  the  subjoined  list,  were  se- 
lected in  the  flowering-  season  last  year  from  the  best 
collections  in  the  neighborhood  of  Boston  ;  and  are  kinds 
which  produce  fine  flowers  of  their  color  and  free  bloom- 
ers. The  list  is  more  limited  than  might  be  expected, 
but  it  will  be  seen  that  the  number  of  varieties  will  be 
sufficient  for  small  collections.  To  the  connoisseur  it 
would  be  an  arduous  task  to  point  out  the  many  hundreds 
of  varieties  that  are  yearly  introduced  from  seed  from 
almost  every  part  of  the  world,  and  which  can  only  be 
designated  by  referring  to  numerous  catalogues  :  the  list 
here  presented  has  therefore  been  chosen  from  the  best 
known  varieties  adapted  to  the  purpose  of  private  collec- 
tions. I  have  omitted  the  time  of  flowering,  which  will 
entirely  depend  on  circumstances. 


Name. 

General  Character. 

Height. 

WHITE. 

Bride  of  Abydos 

fine  white 

from  4  to  5  ft, 

Harding's  Bride 

white 

(( 

5  "  6  " 

King  of  Whites 

delicate  paper  white 

u 

4  "  5  " 

Exemplar  (Widnall's) 

white  cupped  petals 

YELLOW. 

5  *' 

Golden  Sovereign  (Headley' 

s)  rich  gold  ye\.  perfect  bloom 

er" 

4  "  5  " 

Solomon 

deep  yellow 

C( 

4  "  5  '♦ 

William  Cobbetl 

fine  yellow 

(( 

4  »  5  .. 

Gloria  mundi 

light  yellow,  very  fine 

(( 

4  "  5  " 

King  of  the  bellows 

fine  yellow 

(( 

4  "  6  " 

66 


THE    FLOWER    GARBEN    COMPANION. 


Name. 

Jackson's  Rival 
Sulphurea  elegans 


General  Character. 

YELLOW, 

large  yelloAv 
sulphur-colored 


Height. 

from  4  to  5  ft. 

«    4  «<  5<c 


PARTl-COLORED. 

fine  wh.  laced  with  rosy  lilac  "     3 


Mary  (Dodd's) 

Mary  Queen  of  Scots  (Dodd's)  clear  wh.  tipped  with  purple 

Gem,  or  Royal  Adelaide 

Miss  Broadwood 


Lady  of  the  Lake  (Wells') 

Brown's  Desdemona 

Angelina 

Conqueror  of  Europe 

Urania 

Village  Maid 


4 
4 
white  edged  with  rose  4 

wh.  purple  tips,with  dark  centre 


white  and  lilac 
white  edged  with  pink, 
white  edged  with  lilac 
blush  shaded  with  pink 
pink  with  white  centre 
white  edged  with  pink 


King  of  Dahlias  (Widnall's)    pure  white  edged  with  rose  pink 


5  "  6  " 

4  "  5  " 

4  .c  5  ('. 

4  "  5  " 

4  "  6  " 

3  "  4  " 

3  " 


Queen  of  Dahlias 

white  edged  with  purple 

K 

4  »  6  « 

Widnall's  Rainbow 

purple  shaded  with  crimson 

and  red    5  " 

LILAC. 

Beauty  of  Camberwell 

rosy  lilac 

(C 

4  "  6  " 

Lilac  Perfection 

fine  lilac,  excellent  form 

{( 

3  »  4  <4 

In  wood's  Ariel 

mottled  lilac,  fine 

(( 

4  "  5  " 

Unicorn  (Gaines) 

rosy  lilac 

PURPLE. 

(( 

4  »  5  cc 

Adventure  (Toward's) 

fine  purple 

4  " 

Clio  (Widnall's) 

rich  purple 

(1 

3  "  4  " 

Dennisii 

fine  ruby  purple 

(( 

5  "  6  " 

Lord  Liverpool 

fine  dark  purple 

C( 

5  "   6  " 

British  Queen 

fine  rosy  purple 

(1 

3  "  4  " 

Warminster  Rival 

bright  purple 

({ 

4  <<  5  cc 

Barrett's  Susannah 

fine  purple  with  cupped  petals" 

4  •'  5  " 

Widnall's  Juliet 

fine  light  purple 

SCARLET. 

l( 

4  "  »  " 

Countess  of  Liverpool 

superb  scarlet,  fine  form 

(( 

6  "  7  " 

Douglas'  Glory 

fine  scarlet 

5  " 

Rising  Sun 

large  scarlet 

(C 

6  "  7  " 

Daniel  O'Connell 

fine  scarlet 

C( 

5  "  6  " 

Dennisii  coccinea 

fine  scarlet 

<{ 

4  «  5  " 

ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  FLORISTS'  FLOWERS.  67 

Name.  General  Character.  Height. 

CRIMSON. 

Mazeppa    (Thorburn's)  shaded  light  crimson,  fine  4  ft. 

Metropolitan  Perfection  dark  velvet  crimson  from  5  to  6  " 

Perfection  (Widnall's)  superb  rosy  crimson  "    4  "  6  " 

Sir  Henry  Fletcher  rosy  crimson,  fine  "    4  "  6  " 


MAROON. 

Granta  (Widnall's) 
Coronet 

fine  cupped  petals 
large  flower,  very  fine 

4 
cc     4  «  5 

King  Otho 
Zarah 

ROSE- COLORED, 

bright  rose 
delicate  pink 

"  3  "  4 
"     5  •'   6 

Art.  3.  —  Bulbous  Rooted  Plants. 

Under  the  head  of  "  florists  flowers,"  the  Tulip,  Hya- 
cinth and  Ranunculus,  with  the  Carnation  and  Pi?iky  may 
be  considered  the  most  prominent. 

The  above  named  varieties  are  known  to  be  of  value  to 
the  florist,  and  are  often  bought  and  sold  for  large  sums 
of  money ;  they  can  never  however  be   said  to  be  of  an 
equal  value,  as   forming  a  certain  class  of  plants  in    the 
mingled  group  of  the  flower  garden ;  the  attention  given 
to  them  in  common  with  other  flowers,  brings  them  more 
in  their  primitive  state  than  when  they  are  under  the  cul- 
ture of  the  professional  florist,  whose  object  is   always   to 
cultivate  in  such  a  manner,  as  that  the  natural  course  of 
vegetation  is  wrought  up  to  a  high  state  of  being,  which 
cannot  be  possibly  continued  without  the  strictest  atten- 
tion to  the  high  order  of  culture,  familiar  to  the  connoisseur 
and  florist.     To  point  out  the  most  proper  manner  of  cul- 
tivating these  flowers  in  beds  by  themselves,  and  fully 
to  elucidate  this  intricate  subject,  describing   the  proper 
compost,  &c.,  would   require  more    space  than   the  con- 
tents of  this  book.     I  shall  therefore  subjoin   a  list  of 


68  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

the  most  appropriate  varieties,  to  be  planted  indiscrimi- 
nately in  the  flower  borders,  and  particularly  recommend 
their  more  general  culture,  as  flowers  highly  deserving  a 
place  in  every  flower  garden,  as  the  prettiest  ornaments 
in  the  early  part  of  the  spring,  v/hen  few  other  flowers 
are  to  be  found. 

Management  of  bulbous  roots. — The  management  of 
bulbous  rooted  plants,  is  simply  to  plant  the  bulbs,  such 
as  Tulips^  Hyacinths,  and  others,  about  the  latter  end  of 
October,  in  the  vacant  places  of  borders. 

The  best  method  that  I  am  acquainted  with,  is  to  plant 
-the  roots  in  small  clusters  of  six  or  eight  together,  four 
inches  apart,  by  making  a  hole  two  or  three  inches  deep, 
into  which  insert  the  bulb  about  an  inch  under  the  earth's 
surface  ;  and  if  a  little  sand  is  put  into  the  hole,  it  will  be 
of  utility  to  the  bulb,  as  it  will  keep  it  from  rotting.  This 
manner  of  planting  may  be  applied  to  Hyacinths,  Tulips^ 
Narcissus,  Crocus,  and  Snowdrops.  When  the  leaves  of 
bulbs  decay,  they  should  be  taken  from  the  ground,  and 
moderately  dried  in  the  sun,  and  put  into  boxes  with  sand 
until  autumn  planting,  when  the  young  or  side  buJbs  are 
to  be  taken  from  the  parent  as  directed  in  the  "  increase 
of  bulbous  rooted  plants,"  and  planted  separately  from  the 
flowering  bulbs. 

Art.  4.  —  Descriptive  List  of  Bulbous  Rooted  Plants. 
DOUBLE  HYACINTHS. 

DARK   BLUE. 

Cseruleus  Imperialis,  puTyZe,  L'lmportante. 

Due  de  Nonnandie.  Mr  PiU,  dark. 

Datamus,  'purple.  Noir  Veritable,  black. 

L'Amitie,  very  dark.  Quiriaus,  dark. 


ON    THE    CULTURE    OF    FLORISTS     FLOWERS. 


69 


Lord  Wellington. 
Hannibal. 


Roi  de  Noirs,  dark. 
Trosbloem,  Bouquet  des  Fleurs. 


PeaCELAlN  AND   PALE  BLUE. 


Admiral  de  Ruyter. 

Belle  A  gathe,  paZe. 

Comte  de  St.  Priest, po/e. 

Globe  Terrestre. 

Habit  Brilliant. 

Joli  Bouquet. 

La  Gentillesse,  joa/e. 


Nouvelle  Mode. 

Parmenio. 

Parel  Boot,  pale. 

Bouquet  Constante. 

Celeslina. 

Grand  Roland,  paZe. 


Amarante  Trone,  red. 
Bouquet  Tendre. 
Duchesse  deParma,^ne  pink 
Habit  Nuptial,  rosy. 
Illustre  Pyramidale,  red. 
La  Beaute,  Supreme,  rosy. 
Madelaine,  rosy. 


BED    OR    ROSY    COLORED. 

Phenix,  red  and  green. 
Rex  Rubrorum. 
Waterloo,  _/ne  crimson. 
Madame  Elizabeth. 
Gen.  Moore,  cramoisi. 
Mathilda,  rosy. 


Gloria  Florum. 
La  Deesse. 


Flavo  Superbe. 
Heroine. 


PURE    WHITE. 

Triomph  Blandina. 
Van  de  Kasteelen. 

WHITE,  WITH  A    YELLOW  EYE. 

Sceptre  D'Or. 


WHITE,  WITH  RED  AND  ROSY  EYE. 

A  la  Mode.  Og,  King  of  Bashah. 

America.  Archduchesse. 

Gloria  Florum  Suprema.  Virgo  Vestalis. 

WHITE,  WITH  PURPLE   EYE. 


Bijou  des  Amateurs. 
Constantia  Elizabeth. 
Prins  von  Nassau  de  Weilburg. 
Herman  Langue. 


Passe  Virgo, 
Pourpre  Royale. 
Sophie. 
Miss  Kitty. 


Gold  of  Ophir. 
Louis  d'Or.. 
Pure  d'Or. 


YELLOW,  WITH  VARIOUS  EYES. 

L"Or  de  Peru. 
Grand  Alexandre. 


70 


THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 


SINGLE   HYACINTHS. 


Appius,  very  dark. 
AmicuSj  dark. 
Le  Crepuscule,  purple- 
L'Ombre,  dark. 


Madlle.  de  Ym[\\txQ,  fine  purple- 
Pronk  Jeweel,  pale. 
Madlle.  Zoutman,  dark. 
Plutarchus,  dark. 


RED    ARD    ROSY  COLORED. 


Amiable  Louise,  rosy. 
Diademe  de  Flore. 
Anna  Maria 

La  Beaut  e  Inexpressible. 
Lord  Wellington,  rosy. 
Pyramide  Royale. 


Beaute  Supreme. 

Countesse  de  Laval. 

Laborer. 

Mars. 

Rose  Bouquet. 


Due  de  Cumberland. 
Grand  Blanche  Imperiale. 
Heroine. 

Pj'ramide  Superbe. 
Premier  Noble. 
Prince  de  Galitzin. 
Roi  de  Bashan. 
Vainqueur. 

Aurora  d'Or. 
Isabelle. 
Sulpherina. 
Toison  d'Or. 


Flora  Mundi. 

Fortunatus. 

Le  Candeur. 

Hercules. 

Melpomene. 

Prince  de  Ligtenstein. 

Staatsraad. 

YELLOW. 

Crcesus. 

Le  Chasseur. 

Point  de  Jour. 


HYACINTHS,    DIFFERENT    VARIETIES. 


Blue  Grape. 
Purple  Grape. 
White  Grape. 


Large  Purple  Feathered. 
Large  Nutmeg. 


TULIPS  — EARLY. 


VARIOUS  COLORS    ON  WHITE  AND    YELLOW  GROUNDS. 


Amiable  Royale. 
Cramoisi  de  Baden. 
Due  Van  Thol. 
Due  de  Holstein. 


Keyser's  Kroon. 
Drapeau  Royale. 
The  Monument. 
Waterloo. 


ON    THE    CULTURE    OF    TLORISTS'    FLOWERS.  71 

BIZARRES. 

BROWN  AND    VARIOUS  COLORS,  ON  YELLOW  GROUNDS. 

Beaute  Parfaite.  Louis  rEffroi. 

Chapeau  Transpareute.  Lord  Mayor. 

Duchesse  de  Parma.  Prince  Ferdinand. 

Due  de  Richmond.  Roi  de  Golconda. 

Gloria  Mundi.  Vice-roi  Von  Ireland. 
Gordianus. 

BYBLOEMS. 

WHITE  GROUNDS    WITH  SHADES  OF  PURPLE. 

Due  de  Lancaster.  Prince  Mauri tz. 

Grand  Tamedlan.  Q,ueen  of  the  Moors. 

Holmes'  King.  Tour  de  Salisbury. 

Incomparable  Cyrus.  Violet  ma  Favorite. 

Koning  Von  Prussien.  Violet  Washington. 

FINE  CHERRVAND  ROSE. 

WHITE    GROUNDS     AND     ROSY     SHADES. 

Cerise  Superbe.  Ornament  de  Pare. 

Cerise  la  Belle  Forme.  Ponceau  Sanspareille. 

L'Arbe  de  Diana.  Princesse  de  Austurie. 

La  Couronne  Imperiale.  Queen  of  England. 

La  Grande  Rose  Roj-ale.  Reine  des  Roses. 

La  Ravisante,  striped  leaiied.  Rose  Rebecca. 
Maria  Stuart. 

FULL  DOUBLE  TULIPS. 

Admiral  Kingsbergen,^ne.  Rex  Rubrorum,^ne  crimson. 

Blanc  Borde  Pourpre.  Yellow  Rose,  sweet  scented. 

Couronne  Royale.  Bijoux  Imperiale,  Jaune^amee. 

Couronne  d' Or,  jaunejlamee.  Sophie,  jaunejiamce. 

Due  Van  Thol,  very  early.  La  Cceur  de  Portugal,  tres  belle. 

Duke  of  York,  violet  and  yellow.  Ne  plus  ultra. 

Paeony  Gold^^ne  yellow  and  red. 

PARROT  TULIPS. 

FRINGED  EDGES  ;  MOST  BRILLIANT  CRIMSON  AND  YELLOW,  WITH  SHADES 

BRIGHT  GREEN. 

Chevalier  Vert.  Margrave  of  Baden. 

Couleur  de  Cafe,  Yellow  Sweet  Florentine. 

Luteo  Major. 


72  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

CROCUS. 

Cloth  of  Gold.  Large  White. 

Large  Blue.  Large  Purple. 

Large  Yellow.  White  Scotch. 

FRITILLARIES. 
Persian  Fritillary,  curious.  Meleagris,  checkered. 

GLADIOLUS. 

Alatus,  bright  orange.  Floribunda. 

Byzantium,  delicate  purple.  Fragrans  Recurvus. 

Carneus,^es^  colored.  Hirsutus  Roseo. 

Cardinalis,  superb  scarlet.  Psittacina,  or  Parrot  like. 

LILIES. 

Auranlium,  or  Orange.  Elegant  Silver  Striped. 

Bright  Scarlet  Pompone.  Scarlet  Chalcedonian. 

Large  White.  Lilium  Superbum. 

Double  White.  Yellow  Pompone. 

TURK'S  CAP  LILIES. 

Caligula,  scarlet.  Orange,  La  Parisienue. 

Crown  of  Tunis, purjoZc.  Pure  White. 

Double  Violet  Flamed.  White  Spotted. 

POLYANTHUS  NARCISSUS. 

Bazelman  Major.  Grand  Monarque  de  France. 

Belle  Legioise.  Luna,  white  and  citron . 

Bouquet  Triumphant,  yellow.  Morgenster,  entirely  white. 

Dageraad,  yellow.  Reine  Blanche,  white. 

Double  Roman,  sweet  scented.  Sultan,  white  and  yelloxD. 
Glorieux,  yelloxo. 

DOUBLE  NARCISSUS. 

Albo  Pleno  Odorato, /ra^onf .  Orange  Phenix. 

Incomparable.  Hundred  Leaved. 

SINGLE  NARCISSUS. 

Hoop  Petticoat.  Trumpet  Major. 

Long  Flowered.  Poet,  with  crimson  nectary. 


ON   THE    CULTURE    OF   FLORISTs'   FLOWERS.  73 

Art.  5.  • —  The  Carnation, 

The  Carnation  is  highly  deserving  a  more  general  cul- 
ture than  has  been  bestowed  on  it.  It  requires  some 
care  and  attention  in  its  winter  management,  by  protect- 
ing it  in  frames,  as  it  seldom  thrives  when  exposed  to  the 
inclemency  of  the  winter. 

The  management  I  recommend,  is  to  propagate  the 
Carnation  by  layers,  in  August  or  September,  imme- 
diately after  they  have  done  flowering ;  and  when  the 
plants  are  well  rooted,  which  will  be  in  four  weeks,  they 
are  to  be  put  into  moderate  sized  pots,  in  a  compost  of 
two  thirds  loam,  and  a  portion  of  sand  and  rotten  leaf 
mould :  when  this  is  done  they  may  be  placed  where 
they  are  not  too  much  shaded,  nor  receive  too  much  influ- 
ence from  the  sun.  The  plants  are  to  remain  in  this  sit- 
uation until  the  first  frost  appears,  when  they  are  to  be 
placed  in  a  cold  frame,  well  lined  on  the  outside  with 
stable  manure ;  in  this  situation  during  the  winter,  they 
must  often  be  examined  and  divested  of  any  dead  leaves 
or  filth  they  may  collect;  and  air  admitted  every  op- 
portunity in  fine  weather.  When  the  winter  is  over,  the 
plants  may  be  plunged  into  the  proper  place  for  flowering, 
which  should  be  an  exposure  where  the  sun  has  not  full 
influence  over  them  :  they  may  again  be  layered  at  the 
proper  time  and  the  same  culture  continued  every  year. 

Name.  Color. 

Cartwright's  Rainbow.  Purple  Bizarre. 

Davey's  Royal  Sovereign.  Scarlet  Bizarre. 

Farrar's  Huntsman.  Scarlet  Bizarre. 

Lee's  Duke  of  Kent.  Purple  Bizarre, 

High  Admiral.  Scarlet  Bizarre. 

Orson's  Anticipation.  Purple  Flake. 

Smalley's  Foxhunter.  Scarlet  Bizarre. 


74 


THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 


Name. 
Yo«ng's  Earl  Grey. 
Woodshead's  Spitfire. 
Mount  Etna. 
Taylor's  Birmingham. 
Pride  of  the  Isle. 


Color. 
Scarlet  Bizarre. 
Crimson  Bizarre. 
Scarlet  Flake. 
Crimson  Bizarre. 
Purple  Flake. 


Art.  6.  —  The  Pink. 

The  Pink  may  be  considered  as  a  hardy  plant,  with 
the  exception  of  a  little  covering  for  the  winter.  It  is 
propagated  as  the  Carnation,  either  by  piping  or  layers. 

The  best  compost  as  recommended  by  Mr  Miller  who 
is  much  acquainted  with  the  culture  of  Pinks,  is  as  follows, 
for  one  barrow  of  fresh  loam,  1-2  barrow  of  vegetable  mould, 
1-8  of  sharp  sand,  1-8  of  well  pulverized  clay,  such  as  is 
used  for  bricks  laid  up  for  the  winter. 


General  Washington. 
Daniel  Webster. 
Miss  E.  Wilkins. 
Miss  M.  Rock. 
Conqueror. 

Cleopatra. 
Beauty. 

Blazing  Comet. 
Governor  Everett. 
Cardinal. 

Defiance. 
Beauty  of  Flora. 
Eclipse. 

Fair  Rosamond. 
Reformer. 
Fair  Ellen. 
R.  Wilkins. 


PURPLE    LACED    MELLERS. 

Highland  Lad. 
Lafayette. 
Roxbury  Beauty. 
General  Warren. 

RED  LACED  PINKS. 

Nimrod. 
Lord  Nelson. 
Trafalgar. 
Midshipman. 

BLACK  AND  WHITE    STAR  PINKS. 

Incomparable. 
Independence. 
N.  England  Beauty. 

BED  AND  WHITE    STAR    PINKS. 

Sir  John. 
Liberty. 
Jolly  Tar. 


ON   THE    CULTURE    OF    FLORISTS'    FLOWERS.  75 

Art.  7.  —  Polyanthus  and  Auricula, 
The  Volyanthus  and  Auricula  are  pretty  ornaments  of 
the  flower  garden,  when  well  cultivated  :  the  manage- 
ment of  both  is  similar  to  the  Carnation,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  their  increase,  which  is  effected  by  dividing  the 
roots  in  the  fall  of  the  year.  The  manner  that  I  recom- 
mend for  the  culture  of  these  plants  is,  that  they  be  rais- 
ed in  the  first  instance  from  seed,  and  the  choice  kinds  be 
selected  for  culture. 

The  time  to  sow  the  seed  is  early  in  the  spring  in  a 
northern  aspect :  when  the  seed  springs  up,  the  young 
plants  must  be  carefully  attended  to  until  the  autumn, 
when  they  are  to  be  potted  in  the  same  manner  as  is 
recommended  for  the  Carnation  ;  and  placed  in  frames  as 
recommended  for  them ;  early  in  the  spring  the  plants  may 
be  turned  out  in  the  natural  soil  in  a  moderate  aspect, 
where  they  will  flower  in  fine  perfection. 

POLYANTHUS. 

Yellow  or  English  Primrese. 
Purple  Primrose. 
Double  Lilac. 
Double  Crimson. 
J)ouble  White. 

POLYA^TTHUS    OF   VARIETIES. 

Double  cupped. 
Yellow  Cowlip. 
Yellow  Oxlip. 

AURICULAS. 

Large  purple  —  white  centre. 

Purple  —  yellow  centre. 

Fine  purple  —  crimson  border  and  centre. 

Pure  Yellow. 


76        THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

On  tlie   Monthly  Calendar. 


Art.  1.  —  Object  of  the  Monthly  Calendar. 
In  giving  a  monthly  calendar,  the  principal  object  is  ta 
take  a  cursory  review  of  the  management  of  the  flower 
garden,  at  the  different  seasons,  which  could  not  be,  in  any 
other  way,  done  in  so  condensed  a  form,  corresponding 
with  the  tenor  of  this  book,  which  is  as  much  as  possible, 
to  treat  on  every  thing  separately.  The  manner  of  pro- 
pagating most  kinds  of  the  plants  adapted  to  the  flow- 
er garden,  has  been  separately  treated  on  in  Part  1 ; 
and  it  now  remains  to  speak  of  their  general  culture, 
as  the  seasons  pass  on  from  spring  to  summer,  autumn 
and  winter.  In  commencing  this  subject,  I  shall  begin 
with  the  year ;  for,  although  in  the  month  of  January 
nearly  all  horticultural  operations  are  suspended,  it  is 
customary  to  allot  that  month  a  space  in  the  calendar. 

Art.  2.  —  Janicary, 

In  this  month,  little  can  be  done  in  the  flower  depart- 
ment, except  in  the  green-house,  and  taking  care  of 
plants  in  rooms,  which  I  shall  notice  in  their  separate 
places.  However,  if  the  weather  proves  changeable, 
which  is  often  the  case,  the  coverings  of  the  plants  are 
liable  to  be  misplaced  by  the  wind  and  other  causes  that 
may  happen  ;  therefore  it  is  proper  to  look  over  the  gar- 
den, to  see  that  all  is  in  due  order,  particularly  if  Car- 
nations  and  such  like  are  covered. 


ON  THE  MONTHLY  CALENDAR.  77 

Plants  in  frames  also,  as  the  Carnation,  Auricula,  Po- 
lyanthus, and  the  like,  maybe  looked  over  and  kept  in  or- 
der, by  taking  away  any  dead  leaves  or  filth  that  may  be 
collected  in  them ;  and  if  any  depredations  have  been 
made  by  mice,  rats,  or  other  vermin,  they  should  if  possi- 
ble be  destroyed.  If  the  weather  proves  mild,  which  is 
sometimes  the  case  in  this  month,  the  glasses  may  be  la- 
ken  off  in  the  middle  of  the  day,  and  closed  at  night ; 
care  must  be  taken  that  they  are  not  left  open  of  a 
night,  and  the  plants  frozen,  which  is  often  the  case. 

Art.  3.  —  February. 
In  this  month,  like  the  preceding,  little  can  be  done  to 
advantage  in  the  garden,  except  where  any  forest  trees 
are  to  be  pruned  or  cut  down,  which  may  be  done  to  a 
good  purpose  and  much  forward  the  business  of  the  flow- 
er garden  in  the  coming  spring;  the  frames  should  be 
attended  to  as  previously  directed,  and  the  garden  should 
often  be  looked  over  to  see  that  the  covering  and  the  like 
is  in  due  order. 

Art.  4.  —  March. 
This  month,  if  mild,  begins  the  principal  business  of 
the  flower  garden.  A  hot  bed  may  be  prepared  as  before 
directed,  (page  39,)  for  sowing  annual  flower  seeds  ;  bien- 
nials and  perennials,  that  are  intended  for  early  planting, 
may  also  be  forwarded  by  this  method.  The  plants  in 
frames  may  have  more  air  given  them,  and  every 
opportunity  should  be  taken  to  forward  them  as  much  as 
possible  for  the  planting  out  in  the  ground.  The  uncov- 
ering of  many  plants  may  be  seen  to  near  the  close 
of  the  month,  and  all  kinds  of  hardy  shrubs  and  plants 
may  be  pruned  and  tied  or  nailed  in  a  proper  manner, 
7^ 


78  THE    FLOWER    GAEDEN    COMPANION. 

either  to  fences,  walls  or  trellises,  to  which  they  are  in- 
tended to  be  trained. 

The  latter  part  of  this  month,  all  dead  stalks  may  be 
neatly  cut  from  the  plants  and  cleared  from  the  garden, 
and  the  grass  plot  may  be  raked  and  divested  of  all  the 
old  dead  grass,  and  any  thing  that  may  prevent  the 
young  grass  from  coming  up  in  a  regular  manner ;  any 
parts  of  the  walks  that  have  been  washed  either  by  rain 
or  snow  water,  should  now  be  repaired  and  put  into 
good  order  previous  to  the  spring  dressing.  The  pruning 
of  trees  and  shrubs  may  be  performed  by  simply,  in  the 
first  case,  divesting  them  of  all  dead  wood,  and  thinning 
out  all  weak,  superfluous  branches, and  those  which  cross 
one  another.  In  the  act  of  pruning,  a  few  simple  rules 
are  to  be  regarded,  viz  :  that  all  wounds  or  amputations 
be  cut  with  sharp  instruments,  and  left  in  a  clean,  slant- 
ing manner,  that  the  wet  may  not  collect  on  and  rot  the 
wound ;  the  next  thing  is,  that  the  plants  be  regulated  in 
a  manner  that  the  sun  and  air  have  free  access  to  every 
part  of  them  ;  and  thirdly,  that  their  natural  form  and 
habit  be  as  much  as  possible  retained.  In  cases  where 
plants  are  grown  into  a  straggling  habit,  they  may  be 
headed  in,  to  form  a  new  head  or  crown.  These  remarks 
will  be  found  to  answer  most  purposes,  if  correctly  at- 
tended to. 

Art.  5.  —  April. 

April  is  the  busiest  month  in  the  flower  garden. 
As  soon  as  the  weather  will  admit,  and  the  ground 
is  dry,  the  pruning  and  cleansing  of  the  plants  and  the 
garden  should  be  finished. 

The  borders  and  flower  beds  may  now  be  dug,  and  the 
box  or  other  edgings  mended  or  replanted,  and  every 


ON  THE  MONTHLY  CALENDAR.  79 

thing  must  be   done   preparatory   to   transplanting  per- 
ennials and  sowing  annuals. 

In  digging  borders  or  flower  beds,  care  must  be  taken 
that  they  are  so  dug  as  to  lay  rather  the  highest  in  the 
middle,  by  which  the  appearance  wall  have  a  more  pleas- 
ing effect  and  the  water  will   drain  from  them  in  a  regu- 
lar manner.     It  must  be  recollected  that  wherever  water 
is  allowed   to  lay  long  on  any  plants,  (except  aquatics,) 
they  are  much  injured   thereby.      The   borders   being 
dug,  the  places  required  to  be  planted  either  with  shrubs 
or  herbaceous  plants,  may  then  be  planted  after  the  man- 
ner  described   under  the   heads    of    planting  and    des- 
criptive lists,  where  every  information  will  be  found  rela- 
tive to  their  proper  position,  and  the  manner  of  performing 
the  work.  When  the  borders  are  dug  and  planted,  the  grass 
plot,  if  any,  and  walks  must  be  repaired  and  put  in  pro- 
per order. 

If  the  latter  part  of  the  month  proves  fine,  some  seeds 
of  hardy  annuals  and  perennials  may  be  sown,  and  the 
layering  of  plants,  dividing  roots,  putting  out  cuttings, 
and  the  like,  may  be  performed  as  directed  under  the 
head  of  "  Propagation." 

Art.  6.  —  May. 

Supposing  the  work  be  done  as  directed  in  April  or 
the  beginning  of  this  month,  the  principal  thing  to  be 
attended  to  is  to  sow  all  kinds  of  annual,  biennial  and 
perennial  seeds,  at  three  sowings  this  month  :  the  hardy 
kinds  at  the  beginning,  the  half  hardy  at  the  middle,  and 
the  tender  at  the  end  of  the  month.  The  beginning  of 
the  month  box  edgings  may  be  laid,  and  all  kinds  of 
edgings,  as  Moss  pink,  Iris,  Stone-crop,  and  the  like, 
may   be   neatly  repaired,   and   every  thing   completely 


60  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

finished  for  the  spring  dressing.  If  the  trees  and  shrubs 
have  not  been  pruned  and  trained  (which  see  under  the 
proper  head)  as  directed  in  April,  no  time  should  be  lost 
in  performing  that  work  the  early  part  of  this  month. 

The  middle  or  latter  part  of  the  month,  all  kinds  of 
green-house  plants  may  be  plunged  in  the  borders  or 
flower  beds  as  directed  under  their  proper  head.  The 
Dahlia^  Jacobean  Lily,  and  all  kinds  of  tender  rooted 
plants,  either  tuberous  or  fibrous,  may  also  be  planted  the 
latter  part  of  the  month. 

Tender  and  hardy  annual  flowers  may  now  be  trans- 
planted from  the  frames ;  the  hardy  at  the  beginning,  and 
tender  at  the  end  of  the  month. 

All  kinds  of  flowers  that  are  of  slender  growth  should 
now  be  supported  by  tying  them  neatly  to  sticks;  and 
every  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  health  of  the 
plants  and  neatness  of  the  garden. 

Art.  7.  —  June. 
The  principal  business  to  be  done  in  this  month  is 
hoeing  and  keeping  the  flower  beds  in  order,  often  mow- 
ing the  grass  plot,  and  cleaning  walks  ;  indeed  every 
department  should  at  this  time  meet  the  most  strict  at- 
tention. And  here  let  me  remind  the  reader  that  one  of 
the  principal  things  to  be  attended  to  in  flower-gardening, 
is  to  remove  all  weeds  in  their  infant  state ;  for  at  this 
stage  they  can  be  easily  destroyed,  but  if  allowed  to  grow 
and  get  strongly  rooted  in  the  ground,  they  exhaust  the 
soil,  as  well  as  have  a  bad  appearance.  Hoeing,  rak- 
ing and  destroying  weeds  are  operations  so  simple  and 
common  as  to  render  any  directions  on  the  subject  super- 
fluous ;  but  its  simplicity  does  not  prevent  it  from  being 
a  most  important  subject.     To  avoid  irksome  minuteness, 


ON  THE  MONTHLY  CALENDAR. 


81 


I  will  merely  remark  that  the  most  strict  attention  should 
be  paid  to  keeping  every  part  of  the  garden  at  all  times 
neat  and  cleanly  ;  and  having  once  called  attention  to 
this  point,  I  may  not  recur  to  it  hereafter. 

Particular  attention  must   be  paid  at  this  time  to  the 
tying  up  &11  the  slender  plants  to  stakes  or  sticks ;  as  the 
Dahlia  and  plants  of   a  rapid   growth.     For  this  purpose 
neat  sticks  or  stakes  should  be  prepared,  of  a  size  in  pro- 
portion to  the  height  of  the  plant ;  for  the  Dahlia,  sticks 
of  about  four  or  six  feet  planed  off  in  a  tapering  manner, 
either  round  or  square,  and  painted  green,  answer  a  good 
purpose  ;  in  the  operation  of  tying  up  the  Dahlia,  care  must 
be  taken  that  the  plant  is  not  tied  too  tight,  which  is  of- 
ten the  case  and  the  consequence  of  which   is,  that  the 
plant  is  nearly  cut  asunder  and  the  first  storm  that  comes 
blows  it  down.     In  tying  up  plants  care  must  also  be  ta- 
ken that  they  are  not  too  much   bundled  together,  which 
is  not  only  unsightly  to  the  eye,  but  is  often  the  cause 
of  the  centre  part  of  the  plant  being  in  a  measure  rotted, 
owing  to  the  leaves   being  too  much  confined  and  not  re- 
ceiving the  influence  of  the  atmospheric  air. 

Attention  must  now  also  be  paid  to  the  training  of  vines 
asHoneysuckle,  Clematis,  and  all  such  plants  as  are  train- 
ed to  trellises,  arbors,  &c. 

Annual  flow^er  seeds  may  now  also  be  sown  for  late 
flowering  ;  and  in  moist  weather  any  bare  places  in  the 
borders  may  be  planted  and  filled  up  with  annuals  to  make 
every  part  have  a  regular  and  sightly  appearance. 

Art.  8.  —  July. 
Every  favorable  opportunity  should  be  taken   in  this 
month  to  keep  down  weeds  as  they  appear,  and  to  tie  up 
any  plants  that  are  of  a  slender  habit.      The  Dahlias 


82  THE    FLOWER  GARDEN    COMPANION. 

should  be  carefully  looked  over  and  tied  to  their  stakes 
to  prevent  them  from  being  broken  down  by  rains  or  hea- 
vy storms.  Every  attention  must  now  also  be  paid  to  an- 
nuals by  thinning  out  those  that  are  growing  thickly 
together,  which  in  their  infant  state  causes  a  weakness  in 
their  habitual  constitution,  and  they  rarely  assume  their 
wonted  vigor  in  the  flowering  season  ;  and  the  consequence 
is,  that  they  never  flower  in  perfection. — Any  kind  of 
bulbous  roots,  as  Tulips,  Hyacinths,  Crocuses,  and  the 
like,  that  are  to  be  taken  up  and  replanted  in  the  autumn, 
may  be  removed  so  soon  as  their  leaves  are  ripe  and  de- 
caying :  for  the  method  of  performing  this  work  I  refer 
the  reader  to  page  68. 

It  will  be  proper  here  to  observe  that  there  is  an  ex- 
ception to  the  rule  of  taking  up  bulbous  rooted  plants  in 
most  kinds  of  Lilies,  as  the  White  Lily,  Orange  Lily 
and  the  like.  Indeed,  in  many  cases  they  are  much  in- 
jured by  being  often  removcu  ;  the  White  Lily,  seldom 
flowers  well,  if  at  all  the  first  year  of  its  removal ;  and 
many  other  kinds  flower  but  feebly.  The  best  method 
that  I  can  recommend  in  the  culture  of  Lilies  is,  to  thin 
out  the  roots  in  such  a  manner  yearly  that  the  large  flow- 
ering bulbs  are  three  or  four  inches  apart :  the  taking  away 
the  ofl^sets  and  small  bulbs  in  this  manner  gives  those  left 
to  flower  a  chance  to  obtain  the  difl^erent  nutriments  and 
food  in  the  grounds  in  which  they  are  growing. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  this  month  of  any  green-house 
plants  whether  plunged  in  the  ground  or  otherwise,  by 
watering  them  moderately  so  that  the  earth  they  are  grow- 
ing in  may  be  kept  moderately  moist.  This  is  the  most 
critical  month  in  the  summer  for  many  kinds  of  green- 
house plants,  particularly  the  Erica  and  Camellia,  which 
are  often  so  much  injured  that  they  never  recover,  owing 


ON  THE  MONTHLY  CALENDAR.  83 

to  the  earth  in  the  pots  being  allowed  to  be  dried  to 
dust.  The  consequence  is  that  the  roots  of  the  plants 
Perish  by  drought  and  the  leaves  turn  yellow  and  fall  off. 
Insects  also  attack  the  plants,  which,  being  in  a  weakly 
state,  by  degrees  dwindle  and  die.  In  all  kinds  of  tender 
annuals  and  herbaceous  plants  which  are  perishing  for 
want  of  water,  attention  may  be  paid  to  the  watering  at  the 
roots  moderately  of  an  evening;  but  care  must  be  taken 
not  to  overwater  at  this  season,  which  will  be  unnatu- 
ral and  greatly  injure  them.  Moderation  must  be  the 
guide  in  this  process  as  in  all  others  of  the  same 
nature. 

Art.  9.  — August. 
Little  is  required  to  be  done  in  this  month  besides  keep- 
ing the  flower  beds  and   garden   clean,  tying  up    plants, 
cleaning  walks,  &c.,  of  which  I  have  already  spoken.    If 
any  bulbous  rooted  plants,  that  are  to  be  taken  up  still  re- 
main in  the  ground,  their  removal  should  no  longer  be  de- 
ferred. The  inoculation  to  be  done  on  Roses  or  any  choice 
plants  should  be  attended  to  near  the  end  of  the  month  or 
as  soon  as  the  plants  are  in  a  proper  condition  to  be  oper- 
ated upon  ;  which  see  under  the  head  of  Inoculation,  page 
36.     Any  kinds  of  annual  or  perennial  plants  that  have 
done  flowering  and  are  encumbering  their  neighbors  may 
also  be  taken  away  or  cut  down,  and  the  garden  should 
at   this  time  go  through  a   regular   hoeing,  raking,  and 
cleaning,  which  is  very  important  at  this  season,  and  if 
neglected   is  many  times  the  cause    of  much   labor  by 
weeds  over-growing  and  spoiling  the  autumnal  flowering 
plants. 


84  THE    FLOWER   GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Art.  10. —  September. 

The  beginning  of  this  month  all  kinds  of  green-house 
plants  intended  to  be  taken  up  and  potted,  either  for  the 
green-house  or  rooms,  should  be  attended  to.  For  the 
manner  of  performing  the  potting  of  plants  I  refer  the 
reader  to  that  chapter  "  On  the  Management  of  Green- 
house Plants." —  All  kinds  of  annual  and  biennial  flowers 
may  now  also  be  potted  and  placed  in  a  situation  where 
they  can  be  partially  shaded  in  order  to  encourage  their 
rooting  freely  in  the  pots.  For  a  descriptive  list  of  the 
best  kinds  for  this  purpose  I  refer  the  reader  to  Articles  1 
and  2  in  the  Appendix.  Indeed  any  kind  of  plants  in- 
tended to  be  taken  into  winter  quarters  should  not  be  de- 
layed after  this  time  ;  they  are  rarely  well  rooted  and  pre- 
pared for  the  sudden  change. 

There  are  but  few  things  to  be  done  in  the  flower  gar- 
den that  require  more  practical  knowledge  and  are 
less  understood  than  the  taking  from  the  ground  and  pre- 
paring plants  for  winter  quarters.  In  this  I  would  wish  to 
be  understood  as  referring  to  all  kinds  of  annuals,  bien- 
nials and  perennials.  In  the  first  place  it  is  an  act  of  vi- 
olence on  nature  to  remove  plants  from  the  soil  when  they 
are  established  and  in  a  vigorous  growth,  to  a  small  pot  of 
earth,  perhaps  of  quite  a  different  compost  from  that  in 
which  they  have  been  growing ;  besides  they  have  in  most 
cases  their  principal  roots  cut  asunder^  which  have  extend- 
ed several  feet  in  search  of  a  proper  nutriment ;  conse- 
quently the  natural  channels  that  extract  food  for  the 
plant  are  severed  from  it  and  its  vigor  is  more  exhausted 
than  nourished ;  the  plant  being  thus  enfeebled  eventu- 
ally loses  a  portion  of  its  leaves,  in  proportion  to  the  loss 
of  such  members  ;  and  this  again  weakens  it,  owing  to  its 
losing  in  a  certain  degree  its  powers   of  imbibing  the 


ON  THE  MONTHLY  CALENDAR.  85 

moisture  of  the  atmospheric  air.  In  this  case  the  plant 
has  generally  to  undergo  a  change  in  habit  and  growth 
at  a  time  when  it  is  least  prepared  for  it:  namely, 
before  the  approach  of  winter,  when  it  requires  to  be  in 
fall  vigor,  which  can  only  be  regained  by  the  m.ost  at- 
tentive and  natural  management. 

Taking  the  plants  from  the  ground  and  potting  them. 
—  If  possible  an  opportunity  should  be  taken  to  lake  the 
plants  from  the  ground  or  pot  them,  on  a  moist,  humid 
day  after  a  shower  of  rain.  They  should  be  taken  care- 
fully from  the  ground,  and  their  fibrous  roots  as  much  as 
possible  retained.  Being  taken  from  the  ground  they 
should  be  immediately  potted,  and  well  watered  and  placed 
in  a  situation  where  they  are  partially  shaded  and  have 
a  free  circulation  of  air  :  it  will  be  the  better  for  them  if 
they  be  placed  under  trees  where  the  direct  rays  of  the 
sun  are  withdrawn  from  them  and  a  free  circulation  of 
air  can  act  on  them.  In  this  situation  the  plants  must  be 
regularly  attended  to,  by  keeping  the  earth  moderately 
moist  in  order  that  they  may  root  freely  in  the  new  pots. 
All  dead  leaves  should  be  taken  from  them  as  they 
appear,  being  often  very  injurious  to  plants  potted  in  this 
way  ;  for  the  decaying  leaves  being  in  a  state  of  putrefac- 
tion, create  an  impure  air,  which  is  imbibed  by  the  living 
leaves  and  sickens  the  plants. 

When  the  plants  are  well  rooted  in  the  pots  and  begin 
to  recover  their  strength,  they  are  to  be  gradually  ex- 
posed to  the  sun  and  their  natural  location,  in  order  that 
they  may  recover  their  natural  habit  previous  to  their  re- 
moval to  winter  quarters. 

In  this  month  the  principal  business  in  the  flower  gar- 
den is  keeping  it  clean  from  weeds,  gathering  all  kinds 
of  flower  seeds  as  they  ripen,  (which  see  in  the  Appendix, 
8 


86  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Art.  3,)  protecting  plants  of  slender  habits,  training  and 
tying  vines  to  trellises  ;  this  is  the  proper  time  to  divide 
and  propagate  many  kinds  of  hardy  herbaceous  plants 
where  wanted ;  and  if  any  alterations  or  new  arrange- 
ments are  to  be  made  in  the  flower  garden,  they  should  be 
immediately  attended  to. 

Art.   11. —  October. 

The  principal  thing  to  be  attended  to  in  the  flower  gar- 
den this  month  is,  to  give  particular  attention  to  the 
management  of  the  green-house  plants  that  are  not  taken 
into  the  green-house  or  rooms.  Green-house  plants 
should  be  protected  at  night  after  the  first  of  the  month 
in  most  parts  of  the  Northern  States :  for  the  first  frost 
which  is  always  to  be  expected  at  this  time,  will  much 
injure  them  if  exposed,  besides  spoiling  their  appearance^ 
Any  kinds  of  hardy  bulbs,  as  Tulips,  Hyacinths,  Lilies^ 
and  the  like,  may  be  planted  from  the  middle  to  the  end  of 
the  month,  as  directed  under  their  proper  head,  page  68. 

The  Carnation,  Polyanthus,  Daisy,  and  any  kind  of 
half  hardy  plants  in  pots,  that  are  intended  to  be  protected 
through  the  winter  in  frames,  should  be  placed  in  them 
and  covered  on  cold  frosty  nights. 

Every  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  Dahlia  and  tender 
rooted  plants  that  are  injured  by  the  early  frost.  It  is  a 
good  method  to  protect  them  by  laying  some  long  manure 
or  litter  about  the  roots  to  guard  them  from  being  in- 
jured by  the  first  frost. 

Art.   12. —  Nove-inber. 
Supposing  the  green-house  plants  to  be   housed,  their 
management  will  be  found   under  the  proper  head  of  the 
Green-house  department ;  but  the  half  hardy  plants   m 


ON  THE  MONTHLY  CALENDAR.  87 

the  frames  will  require  to  be  attended  to  by  giving  air, 
coverinof  on  cold  nio:hts  and  the  like,  as  recommended 
under  the  head  of  "  Frames."  Great  attention  must 
be  paid  to  the  Dahlia,  if  not  taken  from  the  ground,  thai 
it  be  not  frosted  at  the  root.  Indeed,  it  should  always  be 
the  rule,  even  in  mild  autumns,  to  take  the  roots  from 
the  ground  the  first  of  this  month.  But  if  left  after  that 
time,  a  double  covering  should  be  applied.  Little  will  re- 
quire to  be  done  in  the  garden  except  to  clear  away  any 
kind  of  dead  leaves  or  decaying  plants  which  appear 
to  be  a  nuisance  ;  and  everything  may  be  prepared  for 
the  winter. 

All  kinds  of  hardy  bulbs  that  were  not  planted  the  latter 
part  of  October,  may  be  planted  by  the  middle  of  this 
month,  and  if  any  new  plantations  either  in  the  shrub- 
bery or  flower  garden  are  to  be  made  in  the  fall,  they 
should  not  be  omitted  any  longer  than  the  middle  of  the 
month. 

Covering  Plants  and  Protecting  Shrubs. — About  the 
20th  of  the  month  or  as  soon  as  the  winter  begins  to  close, 
which  will  vary  from  15  to  50  days  in  the  different  parts 
of  the  States  for  which  this  work  is  intended  to  be  adapted, 
will  be  a  proper  time  to  protect  all  kinds  of  herbaceous 
plants  by  covering  them  on  their  crowns  with  long  ma- 
nure, or  if  leaves  can  be  obtained  they  will  answer  a  bet- 
ter purpose.  Tender  kinds  of  shrubs  as  the  Donble  Hi- 
biscus, Magnolia  purpurea,  &c.  may  be  protected  by  ty- 
ing up  the  branches  in  a  neat  manner  and  covering  them 
over  with  straw,  and  tying  it  neatly  around  them. 

Art.    13, — December. 

Little  can  be  done  in  the  garden  this  month  except  it  is 
a  very  mild  season,  when  the  covering  plants  and  the  like 


89  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

may  be  done  as  directed  in  November.  For  the  manage- 
ment of  the  Green-house  and  Frames  I  refer  the  reader  to 
their  proper  heads. 


CHAPTER   VII. 

On  the  Varialious  and  Diseases  of  Plants. 


Art.  1.  —  Variations  of  Plaats. 

In  order  to  diversify  the  subjects  of  the  "  Com- 
panion", I  have  introduced  several  that  are  not  altogether 
pertaining  to  culture ;  but  which  may  be  interesting  to 
those  who  are  desirous  to  be  made  acquainted  with  the 
different  qualities  and  variations  of  plants,  as  color,  mon- 
strous habits,  motions,  &c.  An  article  upon  the  diseases 
of  plants  concludes  this  chapter. 

Art.  2.  —  Color  of  Plants  and  Flowers. 

Milne  calls  '*  color  an  attribute  or  sensible  quality  of 
of  plants.'*  There  is  nothing  I  am  acquainted  with  in 
the  vegetable  kingdom,  that  is  more  changeable  and  de- 
serving notice  than  the  coloring  of  plants  ;  which  is  dif- 
ferent not  only  in  flowers,  but  also  in  leaves,  roots,  seeds, 
bark,  and  indeed  in  every  part  of  them.  When  the  earth 
is  clothed  with  vegetation  in  the  spring,  green  is  the 
predominant  color ;  and  so  varied  are  the  shades  of  this 
general  vestment  or  clothing,  that  it  is  hardly  possible 
to  find  two  different  varieties  of  plants  of  the  same  shade 


ON  VARIATIONS  AND    DISEASES.  89 

of  color.  This  general  clothing  of  plants  also  undergoes 
many  changes  during  the  season  from  spring  to  autumn  ; 
the  most  general  change  that  takes  place,  is,  the  ex- 
panding of  the  leaf  of  most  plants,  when  the  color  is 
commonly  of  a  light  green  inclined  to  a  yellow  ;  and  the 
forests  have  at  that  time  a  tinge  of  yellow  in  their  ap- 
pearance ;  this  coloring  is  soon  changed  into  a  deeper 
greerty  which,  when  the  leaf  is  at  its  maturity,  is  then  at 
its  deepest  color.  From  the  maturity  of  the  leaf  to  its 
decay,  or  dropping  from  the  plant  —  which  is  shorter  or 
longer  in  different  varieties — a  gradual  change  takes 
place  from  a  deep  green  to  a  yellow,  in  most  plants,  and 
in  some  varieties  it  is  again  changed  into  a  deep  red  or 
purple,  as  in  most  of  the  native  shrubs,  which  is  owing 
to  the  acidity  they  contain.  Leaves  of  plants  are  also  va- 
riegated or  checkered  in  many  ways  with  two  or  three 
distinct  colors,  which  is  exemplified  in  the  Amaranthus 
tricolor,  Variegated  Geranium,  and  many  evergreens,  as 
Hollies,  Box,  &c.  Some  leaves  of  plants  have  distinct 
colors  on  each  side,  as  the  Tradescantia  discolor ;  and 
in  some  cases  the  color  of  plants  is  entirely  extracted  and 
a  white  is  substituted,  which  is  caused  by  the  absence  of 
light  and  air  as  in  the  case  of  blanched  Celery. 

In  the  flowers  of  plants  many  changes  are  observable 
from  their  first  expanding  to  their  decay.  With  a  very  few 
exceptions  the  calyx,  or  covering  of  the  flower  is  mostly 
green  ;  there  is,  however,  an  exception  to  this  rule  in 
some  few  flowers.  The  Ear-drop,  or  Fuchsia  coccinea, 
has  a  beautiful  scarlet  calyx,  or  covering,  which  is  often 
taken  for  the  flower  cups,  which  are  purple  ;  and  the 
changeable  part  of  the  Hydrangea  hortensis,  is  nothing 
more  than  a  changeable  calyx  or  covering,  the  flowers  being 
no  larger  than  a  pin's  head.  The  petals  or  flower  leaves 
8* 


90  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

are  the  most  changeable,  as  in  most  flowers,  when  they 
begin  to  expand,  their  petals  are  of  a  light  green  color, 
which,  on  being  expanded  and  exposed  to  the  atinosphe- 
lic  air,  becomes  red-,  purple,  yellow,  or  any  color  natural 
to  them :  during  which  time  it  undergoes  many  changes. 
Flowers  are  also  variable  in  their  parts,  as  in  most  cases 
we  find  the  anthers,  which  contain  the  pollen,  are  of  a  yel- 
low color,  and  the  styles,  which  support  them,  of  a  hyali- 
nus  or  water  color.  The  flower  leaves  or  petals  are  also, 
in  many  cases,  mottled  or  variegated,  as  in  the  Geraniu^n, 
Balsam,  Camellias,  and  many  others. 

In  taking  a  general  view  of  the  colors  of  plants,  it  will 
be  found  that  white  is  most  common  in  the  petals  of 
spring  flowers,  as  the  Snowdrop,  Wood  anemone, 
Cherry,  Plum,  &c. ;  water  color  in  the  styles  and  stigma 
of  flowers ;  yellow  in  the  heads  or  anthers  of  flowers,  and 
in  the  petals  of  most  compound  flowers,  as  the  Sunjlow- 
cr,  Coreopsis,  Hawkiveed,  and  most  autumnal  flowers. 
Black  is  most  common  in  seeds  and  the  bark  of  roots. 
Blue,  red,  and  violet,  in  the  petals  of  summer  flowers,  as 
the  Rose,  Larkspur,  and  many  native  plants.  Red  is  also 
very  common  in  acid  fruits  and  berries,  and  green  pre- 
dominates in  leaves  and  the  calyx  of  plants. 

In  closing  the  present  article,  it  is  proper  to  add  that  the 
color  of  flowers  varies  from  their  natural  or  primitive  ac- 
cording to  tlie  location  they  are  placed  in,  and  by  obser- 
vation it  will  be  found  that  all  kinds  of  fulgid  flowers, 
as  the  Double  Lychnis,  Roses,  or  any  high  colored,  re- 
quire to  be  exposed  to  the  sun  and  air :  shade  generally 
causes  most  flowers  to  lose  their  deep  colors,  except 
those  of  a  pure  white,  as  the  Lily  of  the  Valley,  and 
and  those  which  naturally  grow  in  shaded  locations. 


ON  VARIATIONS  AND    DISEASES.  91' 

Art  3.  —  Double  Flowers. 

Double  flowers  are  vegetable  monsters  ;  they  are  ex- 
emplified in  the  Double  Dahlia^  Stock  gillijioicer,  Rose, 
and  Camellia  ;  they  are,  in  most  cases,  the  result  of  lux- 
uriance in  culture  or  other  causes  by  which  the  organs 
of  generation  are  transformed  into  gaudy  j^^'teZ^  or  flower 
leaves  ;  consequently,  such  flowers  cannot  possibly  pro- 
duce seed  ;  their  varieties  have,  therefore,  to  be  prolonged 
by  propagation  of  cuttings,  roots,  and  layers. 

Nothing  is  less  constant  in  plants  than  double  flowers, 
which  is  fully  exemplified  in  the  Dahlia  ;  as  we  may  see 
on  the  same  plant,  perhaps  twenty  flowers  all  differ- 
ently formed  ;  some  nearly  single,  with  the  organs  of 
generation,  as  the  male  and  female  parts,  with  a  yellow 
centre  ;  others  approaching  a  semi-double  and  some  a  per- 
fect double  flower  ;  until  the  variety  is  termed  "  ru7i  out," 
which  is  to  say  returned  to  its  primitive  state  of  a  single 
fioiver.  This  sporting  of  flowers  is  ver}^  different  in 
plants  of  the  same  family  ;  for  we  see  in  some  plants  that 
almost  every  flower  is  perfectly  double,  as  for  instance  in 
the  Dahlia  :  the  Countess  of  Liverpool  generally  forms  a 
fine,  clear,  well-formed  double  flow^er ;  whilst  others,  as 
the  Queen  of  Dahlias^  has  occasionally  a  fine  double 
flower;  others,  on  the  same  plant,  are  semi-double,  and 
some  nearly  single.  The  same  affinity  is  observable  in 
many  kinds  of  perennial  plants,  that  produce  double 
flowers. 

In  annual  flowers,  as  the  Stock  gilliflo2cer,  the  double 
flowers  are  more  perfect,  but  the  duration  is  shorter :  one 
year  only  it  can  be  said  to  continue,  although  it  is  often 
elongated  by  cuttings,  which  are  mostly  of  a  sickly  ap- 
pearance.    Whatever  may  be  the  value   of  double    flow- 


92  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

ers,  certain  it  is  that  they  sooner  or  later  will  cease   to  be 
in  existence. 

The  primitive  or  single  flowers  are  the  only  varieties? 
that  can  perpetuate  the  vegetable  kingdom  to  the  end  of 
time.  The  economy  of  nature  in  this  case,  as  in  all 
others,  has  given  a  variation,  that  too  much  sameness  may 
not  cloy  our  pleasure.  We  for  instance,  in  some  double 
flowers,  find  them  continue  their  perfect  character  for 
many  years  unaltered,  as  the  Double  lohite  Camelliu ; 
in  others  we  perceiv^e  a  continual  variation  for  a  few  years, 
as  in  the  Dahlia^  and  then  the  primitive  state  again  pre- 
dominates; in  other  denominations  of  plants,  as  annuals, 
a  yearly  variation  from  the  single  to  the  double  flower  is 
observable,  as  in  the  Stock  glllijiower  ;  whilst  the  primi- 
tive or  single  flower  at  all  times  presents  the  same  form 
and  number  of  parts,  and  is  perpetually  renewed  and 
continued  in  its  natural  habit  and  quality. 

Art.  4.  —  Motion  of  Plants. 
'*  Motus,  or  motion  ;  when  applied  to  plants,"  says 
Milne,  "  the  term  motion  is  very  limited,  and  expressive, 
not  of  an  absolute  change  of  place,  but  of  direction.'^ 
The  most  general  motion  of  plants  that  takes  place,  as  a 
natural  change,  is  the  well  known  fact  that  most  trees, 
shrubs,  and  the  lower  order  of  plants,  always  incline  to- 
ward the  light.  This  fact  is  observable  in  woods,  where 
trees  grow  close  together,  in  which  case  their  branches 
always  incline  towards  the  light  and  air,  as  the  vacant 
places,  and  the  outsides.  Plants  on  the  shelves  of  green- 
houses, or  in  windows,  always  incline  to  the  glass,  and 
when  their  position  is  changed  the  leaves  and  minor 
branches  change  their  position  also,  and  incline  to  the 
light.     If  a  number  of  plants  are  placed  in  a  dark  room. 


ON  VARIATIONS  AND    DISEASES.  93 

in  different  parts,  where  there  is  a  small  window,  each 
plant  will  be  found  to  direct  its  position  in  a  direct  line  to 
such  window.  In  conclusion  to  this  part  of  the  subject, 
it  may  be"  proper  to  state  that  soft-wooded  plants  alter 
their  position,  on  being  changed,  sooner  than  those  of  a 
hard-wooded  kind  ;  therefore,  the  time  of  regaining  the 
position  of  any  plant  depends  on  its  nature. 

The  movements  or  motions  of  the  leaves  of  plants  is 
exemplified  in  many  different  ways.  If  a  branch  of  a 
grape  vine  is  turned  from  its  natural  position  where  it 
grows,  so  as  to  turn  the  under  sides  of  the  leaves  to  the 
light,  they  will  in  a  few  days  regain  their  natural  position 
by  being  reversed  on  their  footstalks.  This  movement  is 
apparent  also  in  the  leaves  of  most  kind  of  plants  when 
reversed  from  their  natural  position,  which  they  again  re- 
sume in  a  shorter  or  longer  time  in  accordance  to  their 
habit,  as  before  stated.  In  some  varieties  of  plants  the 
leaves  fold  up  close  to  the  footstalk  in  the  night.  This 
motion  is  termed  by  botanists,  "  the^sleep  of  plants," 
and  is  observable  in  some  varieties  of  Oxalis  and  many 
of  the  winged  leaved  plants,  as  the  Acacia  lophanta^  which 
folds  its  leaves  close  to  the  stem  by  night,  and  unfolds 
them  at  the  approach  of  day.  The  same  movement  takes 
place  if  such  plants  are  put  into  darkness  in  the  day  time. 
Some  plants  are  known  to  close  their  leaves  on  being 
touched,  as  the  ScTisitive  plant  ;  and  some  leaves  are  put 
in  motion  by  the  most  gentle  breeze,  as  the  Aspe7i  tree, 
the  leaves  of  which  are  always  trembling  on  the  tree,  and 
hence  the  name  tremula.  In  flowers  a  motion  is  observa- 
ble in  their  folding  and  unfolding  in  different  periods  of 
the  day ;  an  example  of  this  is  observable  in  a  pretty 
green-house  plant,  the  Oxalis  versicolor,  which  opens  its 
flowers  in  the  middle  of  the  day,  when  the  sun  shines  on 


94  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

it  and  tlie  heat  is  above  sixty  deg. ;  but  closes  when  dark- 
ness comes  on  at  night,  and  on  the  following  day  the 
same  motion  is  observable  if  the  sun  and  heat  is  conge- 
nial, but  if  not,  the  flowers  remain  folded.  The  most 
beautiful  motion  in  flowers,  that  I  am  acquainted  with,  is 
exemplified  in  the  Edivardsia  grandijiora.  This  beauti- 
ful plant  expands  its  calyx  —  which  is  cloven  —  when  the 
sun  shines  strongly  on  it ;  from  between  the  calyx,  a  drop 
of  nectar  or  honey  appears  and  becomes  larger  as  the  sun 
has  more  influence  ;  the  upper  petals  of  the  flower  then 
ascend  to  catch  the  honey  and  protect  the  more  delicate 
part  of  the  flower,  which  in  time  fully  expands;  but  so 
soon  as  the  sun  withdraws,  the  tender  parts  of  the  flower 
close  and  the  upper  petals  descend  with  honey  adher- 
ing to  them,  which  amasses  the  whole  flower  in  nectar,  a 
rapid  decomposition  takes  place,  and  in  a  few  hours  the 
flowers  drop  from  the  plants,  and  putrefaction  immediately 
follows.  This  fact  accounts  for  the  difficulty  of  obtaining 
seed  from  the  plant  in  question. 

Art.  5.  —  On  Insects  and  J)iseases  of  Plants. 

In  treating  of  insects  and  disease  of  plants,  I  shall  make 
some  cursory  observations  on  those  kinds  that  are  com- 
monly injured,  and  give  some  remarks  on  the  causes, 
and  methods  of  evading  them. 

The  most  common  disease  of  plants  arises  either  from 
poverty  or  luxuriance ;  but  the  former  is  the  most  gen- 
eral. 

Of  all  the  insects  that  are  found  on  plants,  the  greenfly 
is  the  most  common  in  the  fl/)wer  garden  and  green- 
house. In  the  green-house  it  is  generally  bred  among 
Roses,  Stock  gilliflowers,  Geraniums,  and  soft-wooded 
plants,  at  a  time  when  they  are  making  a  feeble  growth, 


ON    VARIATIONS    AND    DISEASES.  95 

when  the  number   of  insect  on  the  leaves  soon  sickens 
them  and  brings  on  disease  in  their  system. 

The  remedy  to  destroy  the  green  fly,  in  the  green- 
house, is  a  fumigation  of  tobacco  leaves.  In  the  flower 
garden,  on  the  Rose  and  those  plants  affected,  by  dipping 
the  leaves  or  parts  infested  into  a  decoction  of  tobacco 
extracted  from  the  legives. 

The  next  common  insect  that  infests  plants  is  the  red 
spider,  a  small,  minute  insect,  bred  by  dry  harsh  heat  or 
internal  air.  Plants  that  are  affected  with  this  insect  have 
a  sickly  appearance,  and  their  leaves  turn  ijello2v  and  then 
red  ;  on  the  back  of  the  leaf  a  fine  iveb  is  seen,  and  the 
insect  is  readily  seen  through  a  magnifying  glass,  and 
sometimes  by  the  naked  eye.  There  is  no  insect  that  I 
am  acquainted  with  so  difficult  to  destroy  as  the  red 
spider.  In  the  green-house  steam  and  moist  internal  air 
counteract  its  ravages,  and  if  the  flues  are  whitewashed 
over  with  lime  and  the  sulphur  of  vivum,  it  will  in  a  great 
measure  destroy  it :  but  sulphur  should  in  all  cases  be 
very  cautiously  applied,  as  loo  great  a  quantity  suffocates 
and  scalds  plants. 

Many  plants,  as  Ericas  and  Acacias,  are  very  subject 
to  a  white  scaly  insect,  which  must  be  removed  by  taking 
it  from  the  leaf  either  with  the  point  of  a  knife  or  brush  ; 
after  removing  the  insect,  take  a  wash  made  by  a  de- 
coction of  soft  soap  with  a  small  portion  of  sulphur  and 
tobacco  juice,  with  which  the  parts  affected  are  to  be 
spunged  over  three  or  four  times.  Oleanders,  Camellias, 
and  many  evergreens,  are  often  infested  with  a  large, 
black,  scaly  insect,  which  can  be  removed  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  before  named. 

There  are  many  other  insects  that  infest  and  injure 
plants,  which  are  in  most  instances  at  first  generated  by 


96  THE    FLOWER  GARDEN   COMPANION. 

unwholesome  air  or  some  stagnation  in  the  plant,  which 
of  course  can  be  counteracted  or  avoided  by  keeping 
plants  clean  and  healthy,  the  very  best  remedy  against 
disease. 

In  many  cases  plants  and  trees  are  cankered  by  al- 
lowing the  branches  to  cross  and  rub  each  other  ;  and 
some  throw  out  knobs  or  protuberances  where  they  have 
been  bitten  by  insects,  or  some  stagnation  has  taken 
place  in  the  sap.  It  is  not  always  warrantable  to  say 
that  such  appearances  are  always  injurious  to  the 
tree  or  plant,  although,  in  most  cases,  their  absence  is 
better  than  their  presence,  and  they  may  generally  be  com- 
pared to  wens  on  the  animal  creation.  They  act  as  reser- 
voirs of  stagnated  sap,  which  is  mostly  of  an  acid  quali- 
ty, and  in  some  instances  breeds  insects,  as  worms,  and  the 
like.  Indeed,  such  appearances  are  mostly  the  result  of 
perforation  by  Jiies  and  other  insects,  made  for  a  depository 
to  hatch  their  young  into  life  ;  therefore,  the  propriety  of 
their  removal  is  at  once  apparent. 


PART  3. 

CONSTRUCTION   AND    MANAGEMENT    OF  THE  GREEN- 
HOUSE. 


CHAPTER    I. 

On  the  Construction   of  the  GreenIiou8e« 


Art.  1. — Location  and  Plan. 

The  Green-house  being,  at  this  time,  an  almost  general 
appendage  to  the  flower  garden,  particularly  in  city  resi- 
dences, where  it  is  generally  connected  with  the  dwelling 
house,  is  the  principal  reason  for  introducing  some  re- 
marks on  the  subject  in  this  place. 

The  position  of  the  green-house  should,  if  possible,  be 
such  that  it  may  face  to  the  south,  although  a  southeast 
or  southwest  aspect  may  answer ;  it  must  be  a  consider- 
ation with  the  owner,  as  to  which  is  the  most  convenient 
place  on  the  premises.  In  all  cases  it  should  be  protected 
as  much  as  possible  on  the  northeast  and  cold  quarters, 
and  be  exposed  to  the  south  and  southeast.  The  site  on 
which  it  is  to  be  built  must  be  dry,  which  facilitates  the 
working  of  it  in  winter,  and  is  most  conducive  to  the 
health  of  the  plants.  The  house  may  be  of  almost  any 
plan  ;  it  will  appear  to  good  advantage  with  a  circular  front, 
although  a  straight  one  is  the  most  general  and  answers 
9 


98  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

best.  Thirtyfive  feet  long,  and  fourteen  wide  in  the  in- 
side, is  perhaps  a  good  house  ;  but  when  the  length  is 
greater  the  width  must  be  in  proportion.  The  front  and 
end  walls  should  be  of  brick  and  may  be  placed  two  feet 
above  the  surface  of  the  earth  ;  on  the  front  wall,  upright 
sashes  from  two  and  a  half  to  three  feet  high,  must  be 
conveniently  fixed  so  as  to  give  air,  either  by  sliding  in  a 
grooved  chase,  so  that  the  whole  or  any  portion  of  them 
can  be  taken  out  at  either  end,  and  air  given  if  required, 
at  any  part  of  the  front  of  the  house ;  or  they  may  be 
suspended  on  hinges  to  be  lifted  up  at  pleasure.  The 
back  wall  must  be  carried  to  such  a  height  that  when  the 
roof,  which  must  be  glass,  is  put  on,  it  forms  an  angle 
of  forty  deg. ;  the  ends,  which  should  also  be  glass,  will 
have  a  pitch  accordingly  ;  the  roof  should  be  composed  of 
sashes  four  feet  wide,  the  top  ones  to  slide  by  pulleys  and 
reels  over  the  bottom.  The  rafters  may  be  four  inches 
wide  on  the  outside,  and  bevelled  to  an  angle  inside  ;  the 
panes  should  be  five  by  seven  inches,  well  glazed  with  a 
lap  of  not  more  than  a  quarter  of  an  inch,  the  wood  and 
all  other  materials  require  to  be  of  the  best  quality. 

Art.  2. — Mode  of  Heating. 

The  house  may  be  heated  either  by  a  dry  flue,  or  hot 
water,  but  the  dry  flue  is  most  general,  and  perhaps  best. 

Materials  for  the  flue.  —  The  materials  are,  about  fifty 
fire  bricks,  for  an  arch  over  the  furnace,  six  bars  of  cast 
iron  for  the  grate,  eighteen  inches  long,  the  ends  of  which 
must  be  two  inches  square  and  the  other  part  two  inches 
thick,  and  three  fourths  wide  at  the  top,  and  half  an  inch 
at  the  bottom  ;  which  will  allow  a  sufficient  draught  and 
room  for  the  ashes  to  pass  through. 

The  two  frames  required  for  the  furnace  and  ash-hole 


ON  THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  GREEN-HOUSE.  99 

should  be  the  same  in  size,  twelve  inches  square,  and 
from  two  to  three  inches  wide,  with  iron  doors  hun^-  in 
the  usual  way :  next  are  two  iron  bars  as  supporters  for 
the  grate,  which  must  be  two  feet  long  ;  the  other  mate- 
rials are  flue  tiles,  which  should  be  twelve  inches  square 
and  grooved  ;  they  can  be  had,  of  superior  quality,  at  the 
Salamander  Works,  New  York.  Soft  bricks  and  good 
mortar  are  the  other  requisites. 

Building  the  furnace.  —  The  furnace  is  the  first  to  be 
attended  to,  which  should  be  at  least  fifteen  or  eighteen 
inches  below  the  level  of  the  flue,  in  order  to  have  a  good 
draught.  The  size  of  the  furnace  must  be  thirteen  inches 
wide,  in  order  to  give  space  for  taking  out  the  bars,  when 
it  is  requisite  to  clean  the  furnace  :  the  bars  must  rest  on 
the  two  iron  supporters,  underneath  which  will  be  the  ash- 
hole  of  the  same  dimensions.  An  arch  of  fire  bricks  must 
be  turned  over  the  grating,  fifteen  inches  high  in  the 
cejitre. 

There  should  be  a  neck  of  a  curvilinear  form,  about 
three  feet  long,  with  a  regular  ascent  of  one  foot,  to  cause 
a  good  draught. 

Position  of  the  flue. —  The  position  of  the  flue  should 
be  such  as  to  turn  round  the  front  of  the  house,  from  the 
northeast  to  the  northwest  corner,  where  the  smoke  should 
be  carried  horizontal  from  the  neck  before  spoken  of. 

Dimensions  of  the  flue.  —  In  building  the  flue,  I  recom- 
mend for  a  foundation,  that  bricks  be  laid  in  mortar,  to  the 
width  of  twentyone  inches  from  the  wall ;  on  this  foun- 
dation, two  courses  of  bricks  must  laid  on  their  edges; 
one  three  inches,  the  other  fifteen  from  the  wall  ;  leaving 
a  space  of  four  inches  between  each  brick  so  as  to  form  a 
pigeon  hole  under  the  flue  :  on  these  two  courses,  lay  tiles 
for  the  bottom  \  then  proceed  with  three  bricks  on  their 


100  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

edges  each  side  the  tile,  which,  when  covered  with  the 
upper  tiles,  forms  the  flue,  the  inside  of  which  will  be 
twelve  inches  deep  and  eight  wide. 

Art.  3. —  Walk  and  Stages. 

Adjoining  the  foundation  of  the  flue,  round  the  front 
of  the  house,  I  recommend  a  paved  walk,  of  white  mar- 
ble, two  feet  wide,  to  be  laid  in  an  inclined  manner  of  half 
an  inch  in  eight  feet,  to  the  southeast  or  southv/est  corner^ 
to  carry  off  the  water,  which  can  be  conducted  through  a 
pipe,  three  inches  in  diameter,  to  pass  under  the  wall,inta 
a  reservoir ;  on  the  inside  of  the  walk,  a  row  of  bricks 
may  be  laid  in  a  standing  direction,  to  keep  the  earth 
from  covering  the  walk. 

Staging  of  the  house.  —  Over  the  flue,  around  the  fronts 
a  stage  may  be  built  for  the  accommodation  of  small 
plants,  consisting  of  four  shelves;  that  near  the  glass  to 
be  eight,  the  second  seven,  the  third  six,  and  the  fourth 
five  inches  wide ;  to  descend  towards  the  walk  six  inches  ; 
which  wilt  be  two  inches  between  each  shelf.  A  stage  should 
also  be  erected  from  the  walk,  to  the  back  of  the  house, 
according  to  the  following  scale,  viz :  the  first  shelf  next 
the  walk  to  be  four  feet  six  inches  from  the  front  glass,  its 
height  three  feet,  and  width  seven  inches  ;  the  second  six 
inches  above  that,  and  the  same  width  ;  the  third  and 
fourth,  eight,  fifth  and  sixth,  ten,  seventh,  twelve,  and 
eighth  the  remaining  space  to  the  wall.  Their  height,  one 
above  another,  gradually  to  increase  ;  so  as  to  leave  the 
seventh  twelve  inches  from  the  eighth,  which  should  be 
five  feet  from  the  top  of  the  wall.  In  addition  to  the  above,, 
shelves  may  also  be  erected  in  other  parts  of  the  house^ 
for  succulent  plants,  as  the  Cactus,  and  dry  stove  plants, 
with  many  little  things  tliat  may  be  added  to  suit  the 
owner's  taste. 


ON  THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  GREEN-HOUSE.         101 

Having  completed  the  house,  the  next  thing  to  be  at- 
tended to  is  painting  the  wood  work  white, —  the  stage 
excepted, —  the  brick  work  and  walls  require  whitewash- 
ing, for  the  benefit  of  the  plants  and  its  neat  appearance. 

Art.  4. — Repairing  and    Cleansing. 

Before  entering  on  the  subject  of  green-house  plants, 
there  remain  one  or  two  observations  on  the  internal  ar- 
rangement of  the  green-house,  which,  though  not  strictly 
pertaining  to  the  subject  of  this  chapter,  may  be  brought 
in  here  with  advantage. 

To  have  the  house  in  proper  order  for  the  reception  of 
plants  in  the  fall,  it  should  be  minutely  inspected  in  the 
month  of  August  each  year,  that  all  repairs  which  appear 
requisite  may  be  done.  The  flue  should  be  exam- 
ined first,  which  requires  that  a  few  tiles  be  taken  off  the 
tops,  in  order  to  clean  out  the  soot,  which  has  collected 
during  the  winter ;  this  may  be  done  with  a  hoe  and 
brush  ;  the  soot  must  be  drawn  to  the  place  where  the 
tiles  are  taken  off;  the  flue  being  cleansed,  it  is  next  to 
be  examined  outwardly,  the  tiles  properly  replaced,  re- 
paired, and  whitewashed ;  the  back  wall  and  every  part 
of  the  brick  work,  must  also  be  whitewashed,  which  will 
be  of  material  benefit  to  the  plants  when  growing  in  the 
house. 

Lime  washing  improves  the  appearance  of  the  house 
and  is  a  great  preventive  against  the  many  insects  which 
always  infest  plants.  If  a  portion  of  sulphur  be  beaten  fine 
and  mixed  with  the  wash  intended  for  the  flue,  the  red 
spider,  that  minute  pest  to  plants,  will  be  greatly  deterred 
from  injuring  those  which  are  at  the  dry  end  of  the  house. 
The  furnace  is  next  to  be  inspected  and  repaired. 
The  internal  part  of  the  house  being  cleansed  and  repair- 
9# 


102  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

ed,  ihe  roof  should  be  inspected  and  all  broken  glass  re- 
paired. The  wood  work  should  be  painted  if  required^ 
and,  in  fact,  every  part  put  in  perfect  order. 

When  the  house  is  filled  with  plants,  great  care  must 
be  taken  not  to  allow  any  leaves  or  filth  to  collect,  as  it 
occasions  an  impure  air,  which  often  causes  the  plants  to 
have  a  sickly  appearance. 

The  leaves  of  plants  being  porous  and  having  the 
power  of  absorbing  ihe  surrounding  air  in  which  they 
grow,  it  is  evident  that  their  health  greatly  depends  oa 
the  pure  state  of  it^  consequently,  care  should  be  takeii 
to  obtain  that  which  is  most  congenial,  and  which  will 
be  found  to  be  a  sweet  and  pleasant  internal  heat. 


CHAPTER    II, 

On  the  Management  of    Gieen-house  Plants* 


Art.  1.—  Ta/cing  the  Plants  into  Winter  Quarters  and 

Potti7ig. 
In  treating  of  the  management  of  green-house  plants, 
taking  them  into  winter  quarters  should  be  the  first  con- 
sideration ;  this  must  be  attended  to  about  the  middle  of 
September,  although  in  many  cases  it  may  be  deferred  to 
the  beginning  of  October,  yet  the  latter  month  cannot  be 
recommended,  as  in  many  instances  plants  are  much  in- 
jured by  frost  before  that  time. 


ON  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  GREEN-HOUSE  PLANTS.       103 

Potting  the  plants.  —  Previous  to  taking  the  plants  into 
the  house,  those  that  require  repotting  into  a  fresh  com- 
post should  be  attended  to,  in  order  that  they  may  be  well 
rooted  and  established  in  the  pots,  so  that  they  may  have 
a  good  appearance  in  the  house  ;  many  others  that  are 
not  properly  green-house  plants,  may  be  potted  and  taken 
in,  to  flower  during  the  winter,  as  Pohjanthus,  Primrose, 
Stock  gillijiower,  Carnations,  and  others  ;  also  many 
varieties  of  bulbous  roots  may  be  potted,  as  Tulips,  Hya- 
cinths,  and  Narcissus,  which  will  flower  and  decorate  the 
house  in  the  winter. 

Previous  to  taking  the  plants  into  the  house,  the  pots 
require  to  be  cleansed  of  all  dirt  or  any  substance  attached 
to  them  ;  all  dead  leaves  should  also,  at  this  time,  be  taken 
from  the  plants  :  indeed  everything  should  be  done  to 
bring  them  into  the  house  as  clean  as  possible. 

Art.  2.  —  Arranging  the  Plants  in  the  House. 

To  put  the  plants  in  proper  order,  requires  some  taste 
and  judgment.  Most  plants  have  a  peculiar  location  in 
their  native  state,  therefore  it  is  equally  requisite  that 
they  have  something  similar  in  their  artificial  location. 

The  Geranium,  or  Pelargonium,  may  be  placed  in  a 
situation  as  close  as  possible  to  the  glass,  where  they  can 
obtain  the  full  influence  of  the  sun.  The  Camellia,  on 
the  contrary,  requires  a  shady  situation,  but  should  be  so 
placed,  that  a  free  circulation  of  air  can  act  upon  it,  which 
should  be  wholesome,  or  the  flower  buds  will  eventually 
drop  off*  before  they  expand.  All  kinds  of  succulent 
plants,  as  the  Cactus,  and  Aloe,  should  be  placed  on 
shelves  in  a  warm,  dry  situation,  where  they  can  receive 
the  sun  and  air  which  is  at  the  east  end.  On  the  front 
shelves,    small   plants,  of    almost    every  kind,    may  be 


104  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

placed,  and  particularly  the  hardy  kinds,  as  China  roses, 
Bulbs,  and  those  of  a  dwarf  habit.  If  this  plan  be  ob- 
serv^ed  their  appearance  will  be  graceful  and  pleasing. 

Some  taste  is  also  required  in  arranging  the  plants  in 
such,  a  manner,  that  the  whole  form  a  mingled  group,  not 
too  formal.  Their  various  colors  and  forms  should  be  so 
managed  that  there  is  not  too  much  sameness,  which  will 
be  the  case  if  several  plants  of  a  similar  kind  are  put  to- 
gether. Some  plants,  of  tall  habit,  should  be  selected 
and  placed  separately,  where  they  can  be  seen  to  good 
advantage. 

Art.  3. —  Watering  the  Plants. 

The  best  criterion  for  watering  the  plants,  is  to  observe 
those  which  dry  the  earth  in  the  pots  soonest ;  such  will 
generally  require  the  most  water ;  but  there  is  an  excep- 
tion to  this  rule  in  the  fleshy  plants,  as  the  Cactus  and 
succulent  tribe,  which  require  water  but  seldom. 

All  kinds  of  evergreens,  in  a  growing  state,  should  be 
well  watered  :  as  the  Myrtle,  Orange,  Lemon,  Lauresti- 
71US,  &c.  China  roses  require  often  watering,  and  so  do 
also  the  Calla  cethiopica;  however,  if  pans  containing  wa- 
ter are  kept  under  them  the  better  ;  though  not  generally 
recommended  in  a  green-house. 

In  some  cases  plants  are  much  benefited  by  watering 
them  all  over ;  this  must,  however,  be  done  cautiously, 
and  at  a  time  when  the  water  will  quickly  dry  upon  them  ; 
for  if  it  is  left  on  them  too  long,  it  greatly  injures  and  pre- 
vents their  respiration  and  perspiration. 

The  time  of  watering  plants  must  depend  on  circum- 
stances ;  the  evening  is  the  best  early  in  the  autumn,  after 
a  fine  sunny  day;  but  in  the  winter  months,  the  morning 
is  the  best,  for  by  watering  in  the  evening,  in  winter,  both 


ON  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  GREEN-HOUSE  PLANTS.       105 

the  house  and  plants  are  injured  by  being  cooled  too 
much.  In  most  cases  a  waterpot  with  a  rose,  is  most  to 
be  recommended,  as  it  is  not  so  likely  to  wash  the  earth 
out  of  the  pots. 

Art.  4.  —  Temperature  of  the  House. 

Admitting  air  to  the  green-house  requires  some  care 
and  practical  knowledge  ;  to  do  it  properly,  regard  must 
be  had  to  the  nature  of  the  plants,  and  the  time  of  the 
year.  When  the  plants  are  first  housed  in  the  autumn, 
the  sashes  should  be  wholly  let  down  in  the  day,  and  the 
house  closed  at  about  half  an  hour  before  sunset. 

As  the  winter  approaches,  and  the  air  gets  colder,  it 
must  be  admitted  more  moderately  in  the  morning,  and 
the  house  closed  sooner  in  the  evening,  in  order  to  shut  in 
the  sun  heat.  The  temperature  of  the  house  will  de- 
pend on  what  state  the  plants  are  to  be  kept  in. 

The  green-house  is  m.ostly  considered  as  mere  winter 
quarters  for  plants ;  to  keep  out  the  frost  is  considered 
sufficient ;  but,  for  my  own  part,  I  think  the  green-house 
should  be  made  as  inviting  as  possible  in  the  winter,  and 
the  plants  forwarded  a  little,  and  forced  into  flower  for 
the  gratification  of  those  who  visit.  The  house,  under 
such  circumstances,  will  require  to  be  kept  warmer  than 
usual,  by  five  or  ten  degrees. 

The  temperature  of  the  green-house,  is  usually  regu- 
lated by  the  thermometer  of  Fahrenheit,  and  the  prin- 
cipal object  is  to  keep  it  a  little  above  freezing,  say  from 
thirtysix  to  forty  deg.,  in  a  cold  night;  but  to  forward 
plants  into  an  early  flowering,  from  forty  to  fortyfive  deg. 
is  the  lowest  it  should  be  allowed  to  fall  to.  The  heat  in 
the  day  time  when  the  sun  shines,  may  be  allowed  to  rise 
fifteen  degrees  higher  than  at  night. 


106  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN    COMPANION. 

In  conclusion,  I  must  again  particularly  recommend 
that  the  plants  be  kept  cleansed  from  all  dead  leaves  and 
other  filth,  that  may  either  be  attached  to  the  pots  or 
plants  ;  the  pots  must  be  either  washed  or  new  ones  u?ed 
in  shifting,  about  the  beginning  of  March,  so  that  they 
have  a  clean  and  healthy  appearance  ;  the  shelves  should 
be  often  cleaned  during  the  winter,  and  the  pots  often 
moved  to  prevent  water  from  collecting  under  them, 
which  stagnates  and  injures  the  roots.  It  is  also  very 
requisite  that  a  quantity  of  water,  of  a  proper  tempera- 
ture, be  always  kept  in  the  house  for  watering  the  plants, 
and  to  be  at  hand  in  case  of  fire.  Every  attention  should 
be  paid  to  the  hottest  end  of  the  flue  ;  no  chips  or  sha- 
vings should  be  left  near  it,  which,  in  many  cases,  I  be- 
lieve, has  been  the  cause  of  the  destruction  of  the  house 
by  fire.  The  house  should  be  examined  during  the  win- 
ter, and  if  any  parts  in  consequence  of  the  severe  heat 
have  given  way,  they  should  be  immediately  repaired. 

Art.  5.  —  Descriptive  List  of  Green-house  Plants. 

In  forming  a  descriptive  list  of  green-house  plants,  I 
have  selected  those  kinds  w^hich  are  of  easy  culture,  and 
free  flowering.  Some  attention  has  also  been  paid  to 
select  such  kinds  as  would  give  a  variety  of  flowers  during 
the  season,  with  the  addition  of  the  list  of  the  Geranium, 
Camellia,  &c.,  that  are  to  follow.  No  particular  attention 
has  been  paid  to  those  plants  of  a  recent  introduction, 
unless  they  have  been  proved  worthy  of  notice  as  stand- 
ard varieties  ;  the  principal  object  of  the  list  being  to 
describe  such  plants  only,  as  are  hoped  to  be  worthy  al- 
ways of  a  place  in  the  green-house.  I  have  designated 
under  their  heads,  the  succulent  plants,  which  require  a 
dry  soil  and  little  water  in  the  winter. 


ON  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  GREEN-HOUSE    PLANTS.       107 

[Those  marked  thus  *  are  running  vines  adapted  to  train  on  walls, 
pillars,  &c.  Those  marked  with  initials  B.  E.  are  plants  that  thrivfs 
best  in  black  peat  earth  or  mould.] 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color,     lieight. 

Time  of  flowering. 

ACACIA. 

verticillata 

armata 

suaveolens 

decipens 

longifolia 

lophanta 

Acacia. 

whorl-leaved 

simp-Id  prickly 

sweet-scented 

paradoxical 

long-leaved 

two-spiked 

Yellow 
Yellow 
Yellow 
Yellow 
Yellow 
Yellow 

6 
4 
3 
3 

10 
8 

March,  April. 
March,  April. 
Feb.,  June. 
March,  June. 
March,  April. 
March,  April. 

AGAPANTHUS. 

umbellatus 
variegatus 

African  Lily. 
large -flower 
striped-leaved 

Fleshy 
Blue 
Blue 

Rooted. 
3    April,  June. 
2    April,  June. 

AGAVE. 

americana 
variegata 

American  Aloe.     Succident  Plants. 
common  Amer.  Yellow       20    March,  Sept. 
variegated            Yellow       20     March,  Sept. 

ALOE. 

■"■ariegata 

arborescens 

pumila 

Aloe.                         Succulent  Plants. 
partridge-breast  Pink             2    March,  Sept. 
tree                       Red               6    March,  Sept. 
small  cobweb       Green            1     March,  April. 

AZALEA. 

indica 
alba  indica 
purpurea  plena 
phoenecia 

Azalea. 
Indian, 
white 

double  purple 
purple 

B.  E. 

Scarlet 
White 
Purple 
Purple 

4 
4 
4 
3 

Feb.,  April. 
Feb.,  March. 
Feb.,  March. 
Feb.,  March. 

BANKSIA. 

serrata 
grandis 
ericifolia 
speciosa 

Banksia. 
saw-leaved 
great  flowering 
heath -leaved 
long-leaved 

Yellow 
Yellow 
Yellow 
Green 

12 
4 
6 
5 

July,  Sept. 
May,  Aug. 
Jan.  December. 
May,  Aug. 

BUDDLEA. 
globosa 

Buddlea. 
round-headed 

Orange 

15 

May,  June. 

BEAUFORTIA. 

decussala 

sparsa 

Beaufortia. 
splendid               Scarlet 
alternate  leaved  Red 

3 

3 

May,  July. 
May,  July. 

BOUVAtlDIA. 

triphylla 
versicolor 

BOUVARDIA. 

three-leaved 
various-colored 

Scarlet 
Red 

2 
2 

April,  May. 
July,  Sept. 

108 


THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.     H( 

sight. 

Time  of  flower: 

BURCHELLA. 

BuRCHELLA. 

capensis 

cape 

Scarlet 

3 

March,  June. 

CACTUS. 

Cactus. 

Succulent  Plants. 

speciosissimus 

beautiful 

Crimson 

3 

July,  Aug. 

grandiflorus 

night-flowering 

White 

2 

June,  Aug. 

flagilliformis 

creeping 

Pink 

2 

March,  June. 

truncatus 

truncatus 

Pink 

1 

January. 

Jinkensonii 

Jinkenson's 

Crimson 

2 

March. 

CALCEOLARIA. 

Slippebwort. 

inlegrifolia 

entire-leaved 

Yellow 

2 

May,  Sept. 

rugosa 

rugose 

Yellow 

2 

July,  Sept. 

Foihergilla 

Fothergill's 

Orange 

h 

May,  Aug. 

plalida 

pale  yellow 

Yellow 

2 

March,  May. 

CALLA. 

Calla. 

aethiopica 

Ethiopian 

White 

2 

March,  June, 

CORR^A. 

CORR^A. 

alba 

white-flowered 

White 

3 

April,  July. 

speciosa 

red-flowered 

Red 

3 

April,  July. 

virens 

green-flowered 

Green 

3 

May,  Nov. 

*COB.EA, 

COB.EA. 

scandens 

climbing 

Purple 

15 

May,  Oct. 

CORONILLA. 

CORONILLA. 

valentina 

nine-leaved 

Yellow 

3 

March,  Nov. 

CRASSULA. 

Crassula. 

coccinea 

scarlet 

Scarlet 

2 

March,  June, 

versicolor 

changeable 

Variegated  2 

March,  June. 

falcata 

sickle-leaved 

Scarlet 

2 

May,  June. 

CISTUS. 

Rock  Rose. 

ladaniferus 

gum 

White 

3 

May,  June. 

incanus 

hoary-leaved 

Purple 

2 

CITRUS. 

Orange  Tree 

myrtifolia 

myrtle-leaved 

White 

3 

April,  May. 

litnonum 

lemon 

White 

12 

April,  May. 

aurantium 

sweet 

While 

15 

April,  May. 

nobilis 

mandarin 

White 

15 

April,  May. 

CYC  AS. 

Sago-palm. 

revoluta 

narrow-leaved 

3 

DAPHNE. 

Daphne, 

odora 

sweet-scented 

Purple 

2 

Feb.,  March. 

vaHeg-ata 

variegated 

Purple 

2 

Feb.,  March. 

ON  THE  MANAGEMENT  OP  GREEN-HOUSE  PLANTS. 


109 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.      Heij 

?ht 

Time  of  flowering. 

DIOSMA. 

odora 

capitata 

hirsuta 

DiOSMA. 

sweet-scented 
pale  purple 
hairy-leaved 

B.  E. 

White 
Purple 
Pink 

2 
2 
2 

March. 
March,  May. 
March. 

EPACRIS. 

grandiflora 

pulchella 

purpuracens 

Epacrib. 
crimson 
sweet-scented 
riged 

Crimson 

Pink 

Purple 

2 
4 
3 

Feb.,  June. 
April,  June. 
January,  March. 

FICUS. 
elasticus 

Fig  Tree. 
Indian  Rubber 

8 

FUCHSIA. 

coccinea 
gracilis 
globosa 
microphylla 

Ear  Drop. 

scarlet 

slender 

globe-flowered 

small-leaved 

Scarlet 
Scarlet 
Scarlet 
Scarlet 

3 

3 
2 
2 

April,  Sept. 
April,  Sept. 
April,  Sept. 
April,  Sept. 

GARDENIA. 

florid  a 

radicans 

lalifolia 

Gardenia. 
Cape  Jasmine 
rooting 
broad-leaved 

B.  E. 
White 
White 
White 

4 

1 
3 

May,  Sept. 
May,  Sept. 
May,  Sept. 

GNAPHALIUM. 

glomeratum 

Everlasting-Flower.     B 
cluster-flowered  Yellow 

;.  E 

1 

March,  June. 

HELIOTROPIUM. 

peruvianum 
grandiflonim 

Heliotrope. 

Peruvian 

large-flowered 

Purple 
Purple 

2 
3 

March,  Sept. 
March,  Sept. 

HOYA. 

*camosa 

HoYA. 

fleshy-leaved 

Pink 

4 

April,  May. 

HYDRANGEA. 

hortensis 

Hydrangea. 
changeable 

Red;  Blue 

April,  Sept. 

HYPERICUM. 

monogynum 
glandulosum 

Saint  John's- 

Chinese 

glandulous 

WORT. 

Yellow 
Yellow 

1 
1 

April,  May. 
April,  May. 

ILLICIUM. 

flondanum 

Aniseed  Tree 
red-flowered 

Red 

2 

March,  April. 

IRIS. 

chinensis 
susiana 

Iris. 

Chinese 

Chalcedonian 

Blue 
Striped 

1 

1 

March,  April. 
Feb.,  March. 

KENNEDIA. 

*rubicuuda 
*coccinea 

Kennedia 

dingy-flowered 

scarlet 

10 

B.E. 

Scarlet 
Scarlet 

2 
3 

Feb.,  June. 
Feb.,  June. 

110 


THE    FLOWER  GARDEN   COMPANION. 


Bounical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.    Hei 

ight. 

Time  of  flowering. 

LAGERSTRCEMIA 

.  Lagerstkoemiji 

I. 

indica 

Indian 

Red 

5 

May,  Sept. 

LANTANA. 

La>-tana. 

mista 

nettle-leaved 

Purple 

2 

May,  July. 

camara 

various -flowered  Pur.  Or. 

2 

May,  July. 

LAVENDULA. 

Lavender. 

spicata 

common 

Lilac 

2 

April,  May. 

dentala 

tooth-leaved 

Lilac 

2 

April,  May. 

LINUM. 

Flax. 

trigynum 

three-styled 

Orange 

2 

Dec,  March. 

LOTUS. 

BiRD's-FeoT  Trefoil. 

jacobaeus 

dark-flowered 

Black 

I 

March,  Sept. 

MAGNOLIA. 

Magnolia. 

purpurea 

purple 

Purple 

2 

March,  April. 

conspicua 

downy-leaved 

White 

3 

Dec,  Feb. 

grandiflora 

laurel-leaved 

4 

METROSIDEROS. 

Metrosideros, 

saligna 

willow-leaved 

Crimson 

4 

March,  May. 

lanceolata 

spear-leaved 

Crimson 

4 

March,  May. 

speciosa 

showy 

Crimson 

4 

March,  May. 

NANDINA. 

Nandina. 

domestica 

panicled 

4 

NERIUM. 

Rose-Bay. 

splendens 

double-hybrid 

Red 

4 

May,  Sept. 

allmm 

white-flowered 

White 

4 

May,  Sept. 

▼ariegatum 

variegated 

Striped 

4 

May,  Sept. 

OLEA. 

Olive  Tree. 

fra  grans 

fragrant 

White 

3 

March,  May. 

PiEONIA. 

P^ONY. 

arborea 

tree 

Purple 

4 

March,  May. 

papavera 

poppy-flowered 

White 

3 

March,  May. 

mouian 

shrubby 

Purple 

4 

March,  May. 

PASSIFLORA. 

Passion-Flower. 

*alata 

wing-stalked 

Varieg. 

15 

March,  Nov. 

*princeps 

15 

March,  Nov. 

♦racemosa 

racemose 

Striped 

20 

March,  Oct. 

*coerula 

blue-flowered 

Blue 

3 

May,  June. 

PASSERINA. 

Sparhow-wort. 

filiformis 

heath-leaved 

White 

1 

June,  Aug. 

ON  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  GREEN-HOUSE  PLANTS.       Ill 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.     Heig 

lit. 

Time  of  flowering. 

spicata 

spiked 

White 

2 

May,  June. 

grandiflora 

great-flowered. 

White 

1^  May,  June. 

PITTOSPORUM. 

PiTTOSPORUM. 

tobira 

Chinese 

White 

3 

April,  May. 

undulatum 

wave-leaved 

White 

3 

April,  May. 

PLUMBAGO. 

Lead-wort. 

capensis 

cape 

Blue 

2 

April,  May. 

POLYGLA. 

Milk-wort. 

myrtifolia 

myrtle-leaved 

Purple 

3 

March,  April. 

speciosa 

showy 

Purple 

3 

March,  April. 

PROTEA. 

Pbotea. 

speciosa 

splendid 

Purple 

2 

March,  June. 

longifolia 

long-leaved 

Purple 

2 

March,  April. 

RHODODENDRON.Rose-Bay. 

arboreum 

tree 

Purple 

20 

March;  April. 

catawbiense 

catawba 

Purple 

4 

June,  August. 

ponticum 

purple 

Purple 

12 

March,  April. 

hybridium 

hybrid 

Pink 

6 

March,  April. 

Russellianum 

Russel's 

6 

March,  April. 

SERISSA. 

Serissa. 

fcEtida 

fetid 

White 

2 

March,  Sept. 

STAPELIA. 

Stapelia. 

Succulent  plants. 

grandiflora 

great-flowered 

D.  Purple 

^  Sept.,  Dec. 

asterias 

slar-fish 

P.  Striped 

i  May,  Nov. 

variegata 

variegated 

Y.  Striped 

d 

;  June,  Sept. 

STRELITZIA. 

Strelitzia. 

regina 

canna-leaved 

Yellow 

2 

May,  Sept. 

THEA. 

Tea-Plant. 

verdis 

green 

While 

3 

March. 

bohea 

black 

White 

3 

March. 

Art.  6.  —  Tender  Bulbous  Rooted  Plants. 

The  plants  named  in  the  following  list  are  of  easy 
culture,  and  deserve  a  place  in  the  green-house  ;  most  of 
them  are  natives  of  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope  or  South 
America.  They  require  to  be  placed  in  a  warm  part  of 
the  house,  where  they  will  flower  to  perfection ;  the  front 
or  east  end  is  most  proper.      A   compost  of  one   third 


112 


THE  FLOWER    GARDEN  COMPANION. 


good,  sharp  sand,  one  third  rotten  leaf  mould,  and  the  re- 
mainder good,  fresh,  black  earth,  from  a  dry  location, 
should  be  prepared  when  the  bulbs  are  to  be  potted  in  it, 
whilst  in  their  dormant  state,  which  is  generally  in  the 
months  of  November  and  December  ;  they  may  then  be 
placed  over  the  flue  and  watered  sparingly  until  they  be- 
gin to  vegetate  ;  it  may  then  be  more  copiously  applied, 
and  the  pots  placed  where  they  can  receive  the  full  influ- 
ence of  the  sun.  When  the  plants  have  done  flowering, 
and  the  leaves  begin  to  turn  yellow,  they  are  to  be  placed 
on  some  back  shelf  where  they  can  ripen  regularly  ;  but 
little  water  is  then  necessary ;  in  this  state  they  are  to 
remain  in  the  pots  until  the  time  of  repotting  as  before 
described. 


Name.  Color.  Tim«  of  flowering. 

ALSTR.^MERIA. 
Pelegrina     Striped        June,  Sept. 
Ligtu  Striped        Feb.  Mar. 

flookeri 

flos  Martini  W.  Pur.  Y.  Jan. 

AMARYLLIS. 

Johnsonii  Crimson  Apri',,  May. 
ibrmosissimusCrimson  May,  June, 
vitata  Varieg.       May,  June, 

psiitaciua  Scarlet  May,  Aug. 
insignis  Scarlet        July,  Aug. 

equestris  Scarlet  Aug.,  Sept. 
Belladonna  Flesh  color  July,  Sept. 
ANTHOLYZA. 

sethiopica  Orange  May,  June, 
viltigera  Orange     Jan. 

BABIANA. 

rubra  cyanea  Red,  blue  March,  A  p. 
plicala  Purple       March,  Ap. 

sulphurea      Yellow      March,  Ap. 
tubiflora       Yellow,  red  June. 
CRINUM. 
americanum  July,  Aug. 


Name.        Color.  Time  of  flowering: 

Commelini 

June,  Aug. 

longifolium 

June,  Aug, 

amoenum 

June,  Aug. 

augustum 

June,  Aug. 

amabile 

June,  Aug. 

DIANELLA. 

coenila          Blue 

May,  Aug. 

divaricata    Blue 

July,  Aug. 

EUCOMIS. 

punctata       Varieg. 

June,  July. 

striata 

June,  July. 

GLADIOLUS. 

versicolor      Varieg. 

May,  Jui>e. 

cardinalis      Dark  red 

May,  July. 

psillacinus   Yellow 

H.EMANTHUS. 

coccinius       Scarlet 

June,  Aug. 

carneus         Red 

June,  July. 

IRIS. 

moraeoides 

April,  Aug. 

persica           Varieg. 

March. 

IXIA. 

crateroides    Crimson 

May,  July. 

ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  THE  CAMILLIA. 


113 


Name.         Color.  Time  of  flowering. 

Name      Color.  Time 

of  flowering. 

conica        Orange 

May,  June. 

ORNITHOGALUM. 

maculata   Varieg, 

April,  May. 

niveum          White 

Aug. 

leucantha  White,  blue  April, 

flavum           Yellow 

June, July. 

LACHENALIA. 

altissimum    White 

June,  Aug. 

tricolor      Varieg. 

March,  Ap. 

PANCRATIUM. 

quadricolor    " 

March,  Ap. 

augustum 

May,  Aug. 

pendula         " 

May,  June. 

amoenum 

May,  Aug. 

OXALIS. 

rotatum 

May,  Aug. 

versicolor  Varieg. 

Jan.  Mar. 

speciosura 

May,  Aug. 

caprina      Red 

Feb. 

TRITONIA. 

crenata      Red 

March. 

crispa          Flesh  color 

May,  June. 

fabosfolia   Yellow 

Oct. 

crocata         Yellow 

May,  June. 

rosacea      Pink 

Feb.  Mar. 

rosea           Pink 

June,  July. 

CHAPTER    III. 

On  tbe  Culture  of  tlie  Camellia  Japoniea. 


Art.  1.  —  Remarks. 
The  Camellia  Japoniea,  or  Japan  Rose,  may  be  consid- 
ered as  one  of  the  nobles  of  the  green-house,  during  the 
period  of  its  flowering,  which  happens  —  in  a  good  selec- 
tion—  from  November  until  April.  No  collection  of 
green-house  plants  can  be  said  to  be  complete  or  respecta- 
ble, unless  it  contains  from  ten  to  fifteen  varieties  of  these 
beautiful  plants  ;  they  are  all  delicate  and  of  the  most  fin- 
ished cast.  The  foliage  is  glossy  and  of  a  perpetual  green, 
which  affords  a  striking  contrast  of  shade  with  the  flow- 
ers. When  we  consider  its  longevity,  annual  increase  in 
10  # 


114  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

magnitude  and  blossom,  together  with  its  easy  and  simple 
culture  under  proper  treatment,  it  is  a  most  desirable 
plant.  It  should  be  cultured  in  the  following  manner : 
In  its  location,  either  in  the  green-house  or  open  air, 
daring  the  summer  season,  it  must  be  partially  excluded 
from  the  burning  rays  of  the  sun,  especially  at  mid-day,  at 
which  time  it  often  bums  and  injures  the  leaves  and  also 
damages  the  plant ;  too  much^^re  heat,  in  a  confined  situa- 
tion, is  also  injurious  to  the  Camellia,  and  frequently 
causes  the  buds  to  fall  off  before  they  expand ;  every 
opportunity  should  be  taken  to  afford  it  plenty  of  air. 

Art.  2.  —  Propagation. 

The  methods  of  increasing  the  Camellia  arevarious, 
viz.  by  cuttings,  layers,  buds,  and  inarching  the  finer  sorts 
on  the  single  flowering  red. 

The  most  successful  and  generally  adopted  plan,  is 
however,  to  propagate  the  single  red,  by  cuttings  from  off 
the  young  wood,  which  should  be  taken  from  the  plant  in 
September  or  October  ;  and  rooted  either  under  hand  or 
bell  glasses.  The  method  of  performing  this  is  to  prepare 
a  sharp  sandy  loam,  which  is  put  into  pots,  or  on  a  bed, 
with  a  quantity  of  old  tan  underneath ;  the  cuttings  are 
put  into  the  pots  in  the  usual  manner.  When  the  cut- 
tings are  well  rooted,  which  will  be  in  two  or  three 
months,  they  may  be  put  into  small  pots  of  light 
earth,  or  sandy  loam,  mixed  with  a  quantity  of  black  earth 
or  sandy  peat.  They  should  remain  in  these  pots  until 
they  are  filled  with  roots  ;  they  are  then  to  be  shifted  into 
pots  of  a  larger  size,  for  the  purpose  of  inarching  ;  the 
best  time  for  this  is  the  latter  end  of  February  or  beginning 
of  March,  and  the  scion  may  be  taken  from  the  mother 
plant  in  August,  if  well  united. 


ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  THE  CAMELLIA.       115 

Art.  3.  —  Management  in  the  Green-house, 
The  Camellia  should  be  placed  in  the  house  so  as  to  be 
partially  shaded  from  the  sun ;  and  if  on  the  ground 
where  some  sand  has  been  placed,  the  better.  They  will 
require  a  moderate  watering,  in  order  to  fully  expand  their 
flowers  ;  and  if  moderately  syringed  in  fine  weather  at 
sun  rise,  they  will  be  much  benefited  in  their  flowering  : 
but  care  must  be  taken  that  it  is  not  done  too  copiously, 
for  if  the  water  remains  too  long  on  the  buds,  it  often 
causes  them  to  fall  oif ;  if  they  are  kept  too  dr}^  especi- 
ally when  much  fire  heat  is  applied,  they  will  also  fail. 
The  leaves  should  be  often  sprinkled,  morning  and  even- 
ing, as  they  absorb  a  considerable  quantity  of  nutriment  • 
being  elastic,  the  leaves  of  the  Camellia  perspire  less  than 
than  those  of  deciduous  plants,  and  consequently  act  as  a 
reservoir  of  nutriment,  as  we  see  by  experiment ;  if  a 
Camellia  loses  its  leaves  death  often  ensues,  which  is  not 
the  case  with  deciduous  plants  and  shrubs.  I  have  had 
evident  proof  that  by  refreshing  Camellias  in  this  way,  it 
gives  health  and  vigor  to  them,  and,  at  certain  seasons, 
causes  the  sap  to  descend,  and  buds  will  burst  forth  from 
the  bare  parts  of  the  plant  even  when  it  has  been  divested 
of  all  the  fibrous  roots  but  a  short  time  before.  And  fur- 
ther, this  process  is  essential  to  the  flowering  of  the  plant. 
I  have  seen  instances  of  large  flowers  being  produced 
from  plants  almost  rootless  ;  the  watering,  or  sprinkling 
over  of  these  plants,  may  be  done  more  or  less  according 
to  the  season,  and  the  state  of  the  internal  air  in  the  situa- 
tion in  which  they  are  growing. 

In  the  spring,  when  the  flowering  is  over  and  the 
plants  begin  to  grow,  refresh  them  often  at  their  roots,  as 
they  require  a  considerable  quantity  of  water  when  in  a 
growing  state. 


116  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Care  should  be  taken,  not  to  water  the  top  of  the 
plant  while  in  flower,  when  the  sun  shines  on  it, 
which  causes  the  blossoms  to  have  spots  on  them,  by 
the  water  collecting  on  their  petals  and  especially  on  the 
while  kinds.  This  process  may  be  omitted  in  cloudy 
weather,  as  they  will  not  be  in  a  propter  state  to  imbibe 
the  water  ;  the  plants  will  not  dry  their  foliage  or  buds, 
in  consequence  of  which  the  moistened  buds  will,  in  a 
measure,  decay,  and  the  calyx  fall  off  when  the  flow- 
er expands  ;  this  appears  to  be  owing  to  that  part  being 
moistened  too  long,  which  prevents  respiration,  in  conse- 
quence of  which  it  becomes  inert,  and  putrefaction  fol- 
lows. 

The  heat  of  the  house  should  be  moderate,  from  forty 
to  forty  five  deg.,  and  at  all  times  a  wholesome  and  mellow 
internal  heat  and  air,  should  be  the  principal  aim  of  the 
manager  ;  extremes  of  either  are  always  injurious. 

Art.  4.  —  Repotting  the  Plants. 

Shifting  or  repotting  the  Camellia  may  be  perform- 
ed any  time  after  they  have  done  flowering,  which  is 
generally  in  the  month  of  March  ;  in  doing  this,  care 
must  be  taken  to  give  plenty  of  drainage,  in  order  to 
let  off*  the  water,  which  sometimes  settles  at  the  bot- 
tom and  saturates  the  soil,  and  the  consequence  is  the 
roots  are  often  rotted  off".  Broken  pots  will  answer  the 
purpose  for  drainage. 

The  soil  best  adapted  for  the  Camellia,  is  a  good, 
mellow  loam,  with  a  portion  of  black  earth,  well  mixed 
together ;  if  the  loam  is  not  of  a  sandy  nature,  some 
good  sharp  sand  may  be  added,  to  make  it  more  porous, 
for  the  fibrous  roots  to  grow  and  work  more  freely  in. 

When  the   plants  are  potted,  they  are  to  be  located  in 


ON  THE  CULTURE    OF    THE    CAMELLIA. 


117 


such  a  manner  that  they  may  have  the  full  benefit  of  the 
air;  if  they  are  too  much  confined,  they  often  become 
very  weak ;  they  seldom  set  their  flower  buds  strong  and 
vigorous,  and,  indeed,  it  often  causes  them  to  lose  their 
buds,  and,  if  not  this,  to  flower  weakly.  The  plants  at 
this  time  require  plenty  of  water,  to  cause  them  to  grow 
freely  and  strong.  As  early  as  the  weather  will  permit, 
the  plants  maybe  taken  from  the  green-house,  and  placed 
in  their  summer  situation,  which  should  be  in  a  north  or 
northeast  aspect;  where  they  are  fully  exposed  to  the  air 
and  not  under  the  drip  of  trees  or  buildings. 

Art.  5.  —  Descriptive  List  of  Camellias. 
[Those  marked  thus  t  are  best  adapted  to  rooms.] 


Botanical  Name.     English  Name. 


talba  plena 
tfimbriata 
tflavescens 
candidissima 

tvariegated 

imbricata 

Chandelerii 

Colvilea 

tEclipse 

Punctata 

Cambellii 

altheaflora 

elegans 

tMyrtifolia 

Aneraoneflora. 

C  live  an  a 

reticulate 

Floyii 

Hendersonii 

rubro  pleno 


WHITE. 

Double  white 
white  fringed 
Lady  Harris' 
double  white 

STRIPED. 

double  striped 

imbricated 

Chandeler's 

Colvil's 

Pressis 

Cambell's 

Althea-flowered 

English 

BED. 

Myrtle-leaved 

Anemone-flow'd 

red 

red 

Floy's 

Henderson's 

double  red 


General  character  of  the  flower. 

prime  white,  beautiful  shape, 
margin  of  petals  beautifully  fringed, 
compact  white  with  a  tinge  of  blush  oa 
fine  form.  [the  petals. 

clear  red,  striped  with  white, 
double  crimson,  spotted  with  white, 
dark  red,  with  white  spots, 
white,  blush  spotted  or  striped, 
double  white,  striped  with  pink, 
fine  white,  blush  spots  or  stripes, 
double  white,  spotted  with  pink, 
dark  red,  with  white  spots, 
rose,  spotted  with  white. 

double  light  red,  beautiful  form, 
double  dark  red,  verj'  fine  flower, 
double  dark  red,  very  fine  flower, 
red,  shaded  with  crimson. 
fine  red,  extra  fine  flower, 
light  rose,  beautiful  form, 
fine  large  red. 


118  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN    COMPANION. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

On  tbe  Culture  of  tlie  Geranium,  China  Rose  and  Erica* 


Art.  1.  —  The  Geranium  or  Pelargonium. 

This  beautiful  tribe  of  plants  are  mostly  natives  of  the 
Cape  of  Good  Hope,  and  their  elegance,  when  in  a  flow- 
ering state,  particularly  recommends  them  to  every  lover 
of  flowers  :  indeed,  no  green-house  is  perfect  without  a 
good  collection  of  them. 

The  general  management  of  the  Geranium  is  some- 
thing different  from  the  Camellia,  although  they  will  both 
thrive  well  in  the  same  house,  and  with  the  same  heat ; 
but  their  location  should  be  different,  as  they  require  to 
be  situated  so  as  to  obtain  the  influence  of  the  sun  and 
air,  and  as  near  the  glass  as  possible  ;  if  this  is  not  done 
the  wood  will  grow  weak  and  succulent,  and  consequent- 
ly will  seldom  flower  strong  and  healthy. 

Propagatio7i  or  increase. — The  Geranium  is  increased 
by  cuttings  in  the  months  of  August  and  September,  or 
at  any  time  when  the  young  wood  is  well  ripened,  or  by 
its  roots  being  cut  into  joints  and  inserted  in  a  pot  of 
compost  and  treated  the  same  as  cuttings. 

The  compost  best  adapted  for  this  purpose,  is  one  third 
sandy  loam,  one  third  peat,  with  a  little  rotten  leaf  mould, 
and  some  river  sand. 

When  the  compost  is  prepared,  begin  to  propagate  by 
cutting  the  ends  of  the  cuttings  to  a  joint,  transversely 
and  in  a  clean  manner ;  then  take  the    pot,  which  should 


ON    THE    CULTrRE    OF    THE    GERANIUM.  119 

be  six  inches  deep,  and  six  wide  at  the  top,  and  fill  it  two 
inches  from  the  bottom  with  broken  pots,  beat  fine  with  a 
hammer  ;  after  which  the  remainder  should  be  filled  up 
to  the  rim  with  the  soil,  into  which  the  cuttings  may  be 
inserted  half  way  in  a  neat  manner  ;  the  pots  are  then  to 
be  shaken  gently  to  close  the  earth  to  the  cuttings,  after 
which  they  may  be  gently  watered,  and  the  pots  plunged 
into  the  ground  to  the  rim,  in  a  shady  situation,  under  a 
wall  or  fence.  They  will  require  to  be  watered  when 
the  soil  appears  dry  :  in  four  weeks,  if  carefully  attended  to, 
they  will  be  rooted  and  fit  for  potting  off'. 

Potting  the  young  plants.  —  When  the  cuttings  are 
well  rooted,  they  must  be  potted  singly,  into  smalls  pots, 
three  inches  deep,  and  the  same  in  diameter.  The  man- 
ner of  performing  this  work  is  to  put  two  or  three  small 
pieces  of  broken  pots  at  the  bottom  and  on  them  a  small 
portion  of  rotten  leaves,  and  fill  up  with  the  same  soil, 
as  before  recommended  for  the  cuttings.  When  they  are 
well  rooted  they  may  be  taken  into  the  green-house. 

The  principal  object  in  growing  the  Geranium  being  to 
have  a  strong  dwarf  plant  for  flowering,  care  should  be 
taken  not  to  over  water  it  nor  keep  it  too  warm.  It  should 
be  always  kept  entirely  dry  about  the  roots  and  in  small 
pots  during  the  winter  season.  When  the  plant  is  grown 
four  inches  high,  the  heart  is  to  be  pinched  out  in  order  to 
make  it  form  a  bushy  head. 

About  the  latter  end  of  February,  or  beginning  of 
March,  Geraniums  may  be  shifted  into  the  pots  they  are 
intended  to  flower  in ;  for  this  purpose  the  soil  should  be 
similar  to  that  recommended  above,  with  this  exception, 
that  more  rotten  leaf  mould,  or  manure  be  added,  which 
causes  the  plants  to  flower  finer.  They  require  as 
much  air  to  be  given  them  as  possible,  and  more  water  as 
the  weather  grows  warm. 


120  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Art.  2.  —  List  of  Geraniums. 

WHITE   OB    BLUSH,    WITH    DARK    LIXE3    OH    SPOTS. 

*Beauty  of  Brooklyn.  *Micans. 

*Americanum.  *Fosterianuin. 

♦Admiral  Codrington.  *Macranthon. 
*Brightoniensis. 

LILAC   BLUSH,    WITH   DARK    LINES    AND   SPOTS. 

Louis  Philip,  *Ontario. 

Armesbury.  Boll's  Humii. 

ROSY    RED    OR    PINK,   WITH   DARK    LINES    AND    SPOTS. 

Queen  Emma.  *Queenii. 

*Anne  Boleyn.  *Roseum  Multiflorum. 

*Clintoniae.  *Coplice. 

♦General  Washington  (new.)  *Cleopatra,  (new.) 

♦Lord  Munster.  Juliet. 

BRIGHT    RED,  WITH    DARK    LINES    AND    SPOTS. 

Platagenet.  *Youngii. 

*  Latilobium.  *Rubescens. 

Paganini,  (new.)  *Seneca. 

BRIGHT    CRIMSON   AND    PURPLE,    WITH   DAHK    LINES    AND   SPOTS. 

*Eminet.  Perfectum. 

♦Brundenellioe.  *Reuben  Apsley, 

PURPLE    AND    PUCE,   WITH   DARK    LINES    AND    SPOTS. 

*Glorianura.  *Albinotatuin. 

♦Blue  Beard.  ♦Juno. 

♦Drakiae.  Lady  Comberaiere. 

DARK   SHADE,    RED    OR    CRIMSON,    WITH    DARK    LINES    AND   LARGE 

SPOTS. 

*Tory.  William  the  Fourth. 

♦De  Vere.  ♦Fastuosum. 

♦Earl  Gray.  ♦Hosackii. 
♦Grandissimum. 

BRIGHT    RED    OR    CRIMSON,  WITH   BLACK    LINES    AND    SPOTS. 

Admiral  Nelson.  Flagons,  or  Lord  Yarborougb. 

Ne  plus  ultra.  Romeo. 


ON  THE  CULTTJRE  OF  THE  CHINA  ROSE.  121 

ORAKGE,    CRIMSON    OB    SCARLET,    WITH   BLACK    LINES   AND   SPOTS. 

^Princess  Augusta.  *Russellianum. 

*Brown's  Lady  Gore.  Queen  Adelaide. 

De  Burghae.  *Daveyanum. 

RED,  WITH  DARK  CLOUDED,  PURPLE,  CRIMSON. 

Obscurum  Grandiflorum.  *Jenkinsonia. 

Beauclarkii,  (Duke  of  St  Johns.)    *Y€atmanianum, 

VARIOUS. 

^Scarlet  Superbum.  *Sanguinium. 

*Scutulatum.  *(iuercifolium  Superbum. 

[N.  B.  Those  marked  thus  *  in  the  preceding  list  are  select  varieties.] 

Art.  3.—  The  China  Rose. 

The  China  i?05e  should  always  be  found  in  a  collection 
of  green-house  plants,  amongst  which  it  sustains  a  pro- 
minent character  ;  and  the  high  estimation  in  which  the 
buds  and  flowers  are  held  in  the  winter,  enhances  its 
value.  Independently  of  this,  it  is  one  of  the  best 
plants  to  decorate  the  flower  garden  in  the  summer,  and 
is  almost  perpetually  in  flower  ;  with  the  exception  of 
some  of  the  tall  growing  kinds,  which  are  ornamental  in 
covering  arbors,  trellises,  and  the  like. 

hicrease.  —  The  China  Rose  may  be  increased  either 
by  cuttings  or  layers,  in  the  manner  described  for  green- 
house plants.  It  thrives  well  in  the  temperature  of  the 
green-house,  and  its  location  should  be  on  the  front 
stage  near  the  glass,  as  being  the  most  appropriate. 

The  soil  best  adapted  for  the  China  Rose,  is  a  compost 
of  one  fourth  of  sand,  taken  from  a  road  side,  (where  it 
has  been  drifted  or  washed  by  water ;)  one  fourth 
of  well  rotted  leaf  mould  ;  and  two  fourths  of  the  top 
sod  of  a  pasture  of  naturally  rich,  mellow  loam,  where 
sheep  or  other  animals  have  been  for  some  time.  This 
forms  an  excellent  compost  for  the  China  Rose. 
11 


122  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Art.  4.  —  List  of  Chi?ia  Roses. 
In  giving  a  list  of  China  Roses,  no  descriptive  charac- 
ter can,  with  any  propriety,  be  given;  most  of  the  varie- 
ties being  of  a  light  or  dark  red,  with  the  exception  of  those 
that  are  either  white  or  yellow,  which  are  so  named  to 
enable  those  desirous  of  purchasing,  to  become  fully  ac- 
quainted with  their  characteristic  of  flowering.  I  have 
therefore  designated  the  color  by  the  abreviations,  D.  for 
dark,  L.  R.  for  light  red,  B.  for  blush,  and  W.  for  white. 

[Those  marked  thus  *  are  choice  kinds.] 

^Undulata,  d.  Odorata,  or  tea  scented,  b. 

India  minor,  l.  r.  *      "       Lutea,  Y. 

♦White  China,  w.  *      "       Alba,  w. 

*Sanguinea,  d.  *      "       Rubra,  r. 
Lawrenceana,  l.  "       Golcondi,  k. 

Due  de  Berri.  Noisettiana,  or  Noisette. 

*Belle  de  Monga,  d.  *        "  Purpurea. 

*Amaranthe,  d.  "  Coccinea,  l. 

Bourbon.  '*  Lutea,  y. 

*Barclayana,  d.  *Bengalensis. 

Incarnata,  d.  Boursaltii. 

Duchess  de  Parma.  Banksia. 
Champneyana,  b.  "        Lutea,  y. 

Multiflora,  b.  Cherokee. 

Grevillea,  l.  h.  *Jacksonia. 

Art.  5.  —  The  Erica. 

The  Erica  is  one  of  the  prettiest  families  of  plants  cul- 
tivated in  the  green-house ;  and  its  culture  is  highly  de- 
serving of  more  general  attention  than  has  hitherto  been 
bestowed  upon  it.  However,  there  are  many  pretty  va- 
rieties finding  their  way  into  the  collections  in  the  vicin- 
ity of  Boston,  which  I  hope  will  still  continue  to  receive 
additions.  The  plants  are  neat  and  pretty  in  habit ;  and 
when  in  flower  form  a  lively  contrast  with  other  plants  of 
the  green-house :  they   are  indeed,  a  class  of  plants  that 


ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  THE  ERICA.         123 

are  grateful  to  the  common  observer — claim  the  strict  at- 
tention of  the  ameteur  —  and  are  worthy  the  most  minute 
examination  of  the  curious  and  refined.     In  a  good  col- 
lection they  possess  many  shades  of  color,  as  luhite,  green, 
red,  pinky  &c. ;  and  in  some  instances  they  are  variegated 
or  checkered  in  a  very  pretty  manner.      The  manner  in 
which  they  flower  is  also  various  ;  as,  in  clusters,  spikes, 
and  in   numerical  order  which  are   designated  as  bijiora, 
triflora,  and  so  on;  and  in  different  habits  as  pendulous, 
erect,  &c.     The  formation  of  the  flowers  also  varies  and 
has  a  definitive  character,  as  that  of  tuhifiora,  curvifiora, 
and  the  like  regular  forms.     But  their  intrinsic  value  is 
only  to  be  discovered  by  examining  the  flower  minutely  ; 
when  the  neat  form  and  prettily  contrasted  colors  always 
reward  those  who  bestow  such  pains  with  a  rich  treat  of 
one  of  nature's  most  finished  copies. 

Ill  the  bouquet,  the  Erica  is  not  surpassed  by  any 
flower  of  its  season ;  and  no  flower  keeps  longer  as  a  cut 
flower  in  water. 

To  my  fair  patrons  I  must  recommend  the  more  general 
culture  of  this  pretty  family  of  plants  ;  and,  hope  the  lit- 
tle treatise  to  follow  will  at  least  assist  those  who  are  de- 
rous  to  cultivate  them  in  their  management,  which  when 
better  understood,  I  am  convinced  will  greatly  add  to  the 
interest  already  manifested  in  the  Erica. 

Art.  6.  —  Its  Culture  and  Propagation. 
The  culture  of  the  Erica  is,  by  many  persons,  consider- 
ed very  difficult,  although,  when  practically  understood, 
it  may  be  said  to  be  very  simple.  Soil,  situation,  and 
temperature,  must  be  in  accordance  with  the  nature  of 
the  Erica,  or  it  will  never  flourish  and  flower  well.  All 
kinds   of  the   Erica  require  a  black  peat  or  bog  earth   to 


124  THE    FLOWER   GARDEN    COMPANION. 

flourish  to  perfection  ;  for  the  roots  of  the  plants  being  fine 
and  thready,  cannot  perforate  into  a  heavy  loam  or  close 
soil ;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  a  very  spungy  soil  would 
be  quite  as  uncongenial  to  its  nature.  In  fact,  two  kinds 
of  soil  are  requisite  to  grow  the  difTerent  varieties  to  per- 
fection :  the  small,  dwarf  kinds  require  a  dry  peat,  ob- 
tained from  high,  dry  ground  ;  and  the  tall,  luxuriant  kinds, 
a  soil  obtained  from  a  low,  moist  ground  ;  this  is  readily 
accounted  for,  as  the  dwarf  varieties  are  found  naturally 
growing  on  high  ground,  and  the  taller  varieties  on  low 
grounds,  but  the  nature  of  the  soil  is  very  similar.  The 
situation  of  the  Erica  should  always  be  that  of  a 
cool,  shaded  place.  If  the  plants  are  exposed  to  the  sun 
in  summer,  they  will  suffer  at  the  root ;  and  placed  where 
they  receive  too  much  fire  heat  in  the  winter,  the  leaves 
will  be  injured.  The  Erica  should  be  moderately  water- 
ed ;  it  should  never  be  very  dry  at  the  root  or  very  moist : 
if  the  roots  are  allowed  to  be  entirely  dried,  the  plant 
will  sicken  accordingly  —  if  too  moist,  they  will  nuike  a 
slender,  feeble  growth  at  the  leaf,  and  decay. 

The  Erica  is  propagated  from  seed,  which  I  recommend 
to  be  sown  in  the  month  of  December,  or  so  soon  as  it  is 
ripe,  in  a  pot  of  black  peat  earth,  and  placed  in  the  green- 
house. Care  must  be  taken  that  the  seed  is  not  covered  too 
deep;  if  a  quantity  of  white  sand  can  be  procured  and  pla- 
ced on  the  top  of  the  earth,  the  better.  When  the  seed  is 
sown,  the  top  of  the  pot  may  be  covered  with  glass,  until 
the  plants  make  their  appearance,  when  it  may  be  re- 
moved from  them. 

In  the  spring,  when  the  plants  are  grown  an  inch  or 
two  in  height,  they  are  to  be  potted  off,  in  small  pots, 
for  flowering,  which  will  be,  in  the  dwarf  varieties,  in  the 
following  spring  ;  —  the  larger  kinds  will  not  flower  until 
the  second  year. 


ON    THE    CULTURE    OF    THE    ERICA. 


125 


The  propagation  by  cuttings  is  performed  by  filling  pots 
of  soil  as  before  directed,  and  covering  the  top  with  white 
sand.  The  cuttings  may  be  taken  from  the  plant  at  a 
time  when  the  young  wood  is  grown  an  inch  or  two  long, 
which  will  generally  be  in  the  month  of  September.  They 
are  to  be  taken  off  at  a  joint,  the  lower  leaves  taken  off 
with  a  sharp  pair  of  scissors,  and  the  cuttings  neatly 
pricked  into  the  sand  and  covered  with  a  bell-glass  ;  the 
bell-glass  must  be  regularly  taken  off  every  day  and 
rubbed  dry  with  a  cloth,  in  order  to  remove  any  mois- 
ture, and  prevent  their  being  damped  off.  When  they 
are  well  rooted,  they  are  to  be  potted  off,  in  a  small  pot, 
as  recommended  for  seedlings. 

Art.  7.  —  Descriptive  List  of  Ericas. 

[Those  marked   thus  t  are  to  be  found  in  most  collections  and  seed 
freely.] 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.     Height. 

Time  of  flowering. 

ERICA. 

Heath. 

tgrandiflora 

great-flowered 

Yellow 

3 

May,  Sept. 

teruenta 

bloody-flowered  D.  Red 

2 

May,  Sept. 

ignescens 

fiery 

Red 

^h 

March,  June. 

ttubiflora 

tube-flowered 

Pink 

2 

April,  July. 

Hibbertia 

Hibbert's 

0.  Yellow 

2 

June,  Sept. 

tcolorans 

coloring 

W.  Red 

2 

April,  June. 

verdis 

green-flowered 

D.  Green 

2 

May,  Sept. 

Massoni 

Masson's 

R.  Green 

3 

July,  Oct. 

tbicolor 

two-colored 

G.  Red 

2 

March,  Oct. 

tventricosa 

Porcelain 

Fleshed 

I 

April,  Sept. 

Atonia 

Alton's 

W.  Purple 

2 

June,  Sept. 

tbaccans 

Arbutus-leaved 

Purple 

2 

April,  June. 

biflora 

two-flowered 

White 

1 

April,  June. 

hardens 

glowing 

Scarlet 

2 

April,  June. 

tarborea 

tree 

White 

4 

Feb.,  June. 

rubens 

red -flowered 

D.  Red 

1 

June,  Sept. 

tgracilis 

gracile 

White 

I 

Feb.,  June. 

tpersoluta 

garland 

Purple 

la 

,  Feb.,  May. 

taus  trails 

Spanish 
11  # 

Purple 

h 

March,  July. 

126 


THE    FLOWER   GARDEN    COMPANION. 


Botanical  Name. 

English  Name. 

Color.      Height. 

Time  of  flowering. 

tMediterranea 

Mediterranean 

Purple 

4 

Feb.,  May. 

vagans 

Cornish 

Red 

1 

July,  August. 

formosa 

beautiful 

Red 

2 

June,  Sept. 

tpubescens 

pale -downy 

Purple 

1^ 

Feb.,  Dec. 

tconcinna 

blush 

Flesh  color  2 

Sept.,  Oct. 

coccinea 

scarlet-flowered  D.  Red 

Ik 

Jan.,  Sept. 

Leeana 

Lee's 

0.  Yellow 

2 

Jan.,  August. 

blanda 

charming 

L.  Purple 

1 

April,  Sept. 

Cliffordia 

Lady  Clifford's 

White 

1 

April,  May. 

elegans 

elegant 

Green 

1 

March,  Nov. 

triflora 

three-flowered 

White 

I 

May,  June. 

rubella 

thrift-flowered 

Pink 

2 

June. 

floribunda 

many-flowered 

Purple 

1 

May,  June. 

imbricata 

imbricated 

Pink 

1 

May,  August. 

PART  4. 

THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  MISCELLANY. 


CHAPTER   I. 

On    the    City  Floiver  Garden. 


The  flower  garden  attached  to  city  residences,  —  when 
well  managed,  —  embraces  many  useful  features  relative 
to  health  and  pleasure,  and  in  every  way  conveys  to  the 
proprietor  a  moral  lesson  in  natural  history  of  the  most 
refined  nature.  I  trust  that  every  intelligent  person  is 
aware  that  the  continual  working  of  the  ground,  attached 
to  city  residences,  is,  in  every  way,  conducive  to  the 
health  of  the  inmates,  by  dispelling  and  rectifying  the 
impure  vapor,  arising  from  smoke  and  other  causes,  that 
condenses  and  settles  on  the  surface  of  the  ground ; 
which  is  purified  if  the  earth  is  frequently  turned  up;  and, 
in  conjunction  with  this,  the  benefit  arising  is  of  com- 
mon interest,  in  proportion  to  the  quantity  of  ground  kept 
in  such  order,  in  any  city  or  town. 

Phytologists  and  philosophers  inform  us  that  the  vege- 
table kingdom  exhales  certain  gases  conducive  to  the 
health  of  mankind ;  and  hence  we  infer  the  utility 
of  trees  and  plants  in  cities,  especially  when  we 
take  into  consideration   their  beauty  and  cooling  shade. 


128        THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

Nature,  the  best  criterion,  convinces  us  of  the  use  of 
plants  and  flowers,  the  earth  being  covered  in  a  measure 
with  them,  no  doubt  for  the  wise  purpose  of  the  welfare 
of  the  animal  kingdom. 

In  order  to  derive  pleasure  from  a  fine  collection  of 
flowers,  it  is  necessary  to  pay  proper  attention  to  their 
varied  and  perpetual  flowering  ;  so  much  the  more  in- 
viting would  they  appear  to  the  admirer ;  and  the  sure 
guide  to  this  gratification,  is  to  furnish  the  flower  garden 
with  a  suitable  collection  of  plants.  These  are  the  in- 
ducements to  the  culture  of  the  city  flower  garden  ;  and 
that  a  moral  lesson  may  be  derived  from  flowers,  is  proved, 
from  the  researches  of  the  most  learned  philosophers,  to 
the  untaught  prattling  of  the  humble  cottage. 

The  fragrance  of  the  Rose  is  admired  by  all ;  its  struc- 
ture gives  a  pleasing  lesson  to  the  young  botanist  or  na- 
turalist ;  to  the  artist  it  furnishes  a  superior  copy  for 
many  purposes  ;  and  the  apothecary  extracts  many  essen- 
tial oils  and  Avaters  from  its  petals,  which  are  also  used 
in  a  dry  state,  as  conserves  and  for  various  other  purposes. 
Nor  is  the  White  Lily.,  in  its  purity,  less  deserving  a 
place  in  every  city  flower  garden.  Its  fragrance,  together 
with  its  pure  white  petals,  is  produced  from  bulbs,  which 
are  valuable  in  cases  of  swellings  and  wounds. 

Flowers  contain  also,  in  their  primitive  state,  male  and 
female  parts,  covered  with  the  petals  or  colored  leaves, 
which  are  in  their  infant  state  ;  enveloped  in  a  calyx,  or 
outer  covering,  by  which  they  are  protected  or  supported 
w^hen  expanded  ;  most  flowers  have  also  an  equal  propor- 
tion, and  an  exact  number  of  parts,  in  many  thousands  of 
blossoms  ;  and  in  these  there  is  every  thing  to  please, 
and  nothing  to  ofl^end,  the  most  refined  or  chaste  obser- 
vers. 


ON    THE    CITY    FLOWER    GARDEN. 


129 


In  concluding  this  subject,  it  may  be  necessary  to  offer 
a  few  remaks  on  the  management  of  the  city  garden.  I 
earnest^  recommend  it  to  be  kept  neat  and  clean,  in  order 
to  promote  the  heahh  of  the  plants  and  their  owners.  It 
should  be  often  worked,  to  create  a  clear,  sweet,  healthy 
air  ;  and  at  different  times  fresh  mould  should  be  added, 
to  give  new  vigor  to  the  plants  ;  much  manure  is  seldom 
requisite,  as  city  gardens  are  often  too  rich,  owing  to  the 
quantity  of  lime,  ashes,  and  the  like,  incorporated  with 
the  soil. 

The  grass  plot  requires  to  be  often  mowed  for  conve- 
nience, neatness,  and  the  well  being  of  the  grass. 

The  plan  of  the  garden  I  recommend  to  be  such  as  to 
give  ease  with  variety ;  so  as  to  accommodate  various 
plants  and  shrubs;  the  walks  to  be  of  clean  gravel,  with 
an  edging  of  box  or  neat  dwarf  plants  —  as  the  Thrift, 
Dwarf  Iris,  Moss  pink,  and  such  like. 

The  trellises,  arbors,  ic alls,  fences,  and  so  on,  should  be 
covered  with  vines  and  creepers,  so  that  the  whole  may 
have  a  corresponding  appearance. 

In  laying  out  flower  gardens,  let  them  be  so  managed 
that  many  kinds  of  flowering  shrubs  may  be  introduced  ; 
for  this  purpose  beds  should  be  appropriated.  The  most 
common  error  in  laying  out  city  gardens  is,  that  they 
are  too  much  cut  up  into  small  figures,  and  consequently 
shrubs,  so  essential  to  give  a  variety,  cannot  be  admitted. 
Nothing  should  be  cramped,  but  every  thing  should  have 
an  open,  easy  appearance,  in  the  flower  garden.  (See 
Part  1,  Chapter  I,  "  On  Laying  out  the  Flower  Garden.") 


130  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION* 

CHAPTER    II. 

On  the  Kative  American  Plo-wer  Garden. 


Native  plants  and  flowers  are  those  which  are  found 
growing  spontaneously,  without  the  aid  of  culture  ;  per- 
haps no  country  has  a  finer  or  more  numerous  collec- 
tion of  hardy  flowering  plants  than  the  United  States  ; 
indeed,  no  collection  can  be  said  to  be  complete,  without 
the  American  Flora,  which  has  engaged  the  attention  of 
horticulturists  to  such  an  extent  in  Europe,  that  grounds 
have  been  prepared  and  adapted  for  American  plants  ;  and 
it  is  greatly  to  be  hoped  that  the  present  good  taste  for 
gardening  in  this  country,  will  be  the  means  of  intro- 
ducing the  many  pretty  varieties  of  flowers  that  are  to 
be  found  in  every  part  of  the  Union  ;  particularly  the 
beautiful  Azelias^  Kalmias,  Rhododendroiis,  and  many 
others,  that  are  much  wanted  in  the  flower  garden. 

It  would  far  exceed  my  prescribed  limits  to  give  a  de- 
scriptive list  of  the  many  varieties  of  plants  that  deserve 
a  place  in  the  native  flower  garden.  I  have,  therefore, 
given  Q  list  of  those  which  most  deserve  notice ;  and,  as 
in  every  section  of  this  country,  there  are  to  be  found 
native  plants  adapted  to  their  peculiar  situation,  I  recom- 
mend that  such  as  are  pretty  be  selected  and  planted  as 
similar  as  possible  to  their  natural  location.  This  method 
will  at  once  create  a  taste  for  cultivating  native  plants  and 
flowers,  and  facilitate  a  practical  knowledge  of  their  habits 
and  location,  in  a  natural  state.  Nothing  can  be  a  more 
inviting  appendage  to  the  country  residence,  where  a  sufii- 


ON  THE  NATIVE  AMERICAN  FLOWER    GARDEN.         131 

cient  quantity  of  ground  can  be  appropriated,  than  a  plot 
converted  into  an  American  flower 'garden  ;  especially  on 
the  banks  of  rivers  and  streams,  as  those  of  the  Hudson, 
and  many  others,  from  which  water  might  be  introduced. 
In  such  situations,  every  variety  of  native  plants  might 
be  commodiously  planted,  and  grown  to  a  high  state 
of  perfection. 

The  best  method  of  laying  out  such  gardens,  is  to 
manage  the  water  so  as  to  form  a  narrow  strip  or  stream 
two  or  three  feet  deep,  and  if  a  natural  stream  can  be  had, 
the  better  :  at  the  end  an  artificial  pond  might  be  made 
at  a  trifling  expense,  for  growing  the  Water  Lily,  and 
Native  Aquatics  ;  and  also  for  the  purpose  of  introducing 
gold  and  silver  fishes. 

The  south  margin  of  the  stream  might  be  advantageous- 
ly planted  with  native  flowering  shrubs,  as  the  Azelias^ 
Kahnias,  Spireas,  and  those  that  are  found  growing  in 
such  situations  :  the  margin  of  the  pond  should  be  plant- 
ed with  drooping  willows  and  trees  of  a  pendulous  habit 
for  shade,  under  which  a  rustic  seat  might  be  properly 
placed  for  the  accommodation  of  those  who  desire  to  view 
the  sporting  fishes,  and  other  interesting  objects  by  which 
they  are  surrounded.  Attached  to  the  pond  or  streams, 
I  recommend  a  well  arranged  grass  plot,  with  a  few 
figures  cut  therein,  wdiich  should  be  planted  with  native 
herbaceous  plants,  and  dwarf  shrubs.  On  the  margin  of 
the  grass  plot,  a  serpentine  or  some  well  contrived  walk, 
bordered  with  shrubbery,  leading  to  a  rockery,  of  a  semi- 
circular form  on  the  north  side,  and  almost  straight  on 
the  south.  A  rockery  so  situated,  might  be  planted  with 
various  perennial  and  annual  plants,  and  dwarf  shrubs, 
which  \vould  there  find  a  natural  aspect  and  location.  On 
the  circular   side  of  the  rockery,  divided  by  a  walk,  a 


132  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

broad  belt  mig-ht  be  planted  with  different  kinds  of  native 
shrubs,  as  Rhododendrons,  Kalniias,  Azelias,  Andro7ne- 
das,  and  Spireas. 

In  some  convenient  place  near  the  rockery,  a  rustic 
arbor  may  be  very  properly  placed,  and  covered  with 
native  vines  and  creepers,  for  the  accommodation  of  visit- 
ers, and  the  junior  members  of  the  family  who  wish  to 
study  botany.  The  plants  should  be  properly  labelled 
with  the  botanical  name  on  one  side  of  a  neat  tally,  and 
the  native  state  on  the  other.  For  the  better  accommo- 
dation of  those  who  collect  native  plants,  they  should  be 
furnished  with  "  NuttaWs  Genera  of  the  Plants  of  North 
America,^''  a  work  which  in  a  very  concise  and  correct 
manner,  gives  the  habit,  time  of  flowering  and  location  of 
all  native  plants,  and  should  be  in  possession  of  every 
lover  of  botany. 


CHAPTER  III. 

On  Plunging^  Oreen-house  Plants  in  tbe  Flower  Borders. 


The  flower  garden  may  be  greatly  beautified  in  sum- 
mer, by  plunging  into  the  borders  and  beds,  many  varieties 
of  green-house  plants,  in  their  different  compartments,  in 
order  to  give  a  diversity  of  foliage.  The  plants  are  also 
much  benefited  by  this  method.  Being  placed  in  the 
ground  in  this  way,  their  roots  are   in   a  better   situation 


ON  PLUNGING  GREEN-HOUSE  PLANTS  IN  BORDERS.       133 

and  receive  a  more  regular  supply  of  moisture  than  could 
possibly  be  applied  to  them  in  their  former  position. 

The  best  time  and  manner  of  performing  this,  is  to  turn 
out  some  of  the  most  hardy  kinds  in  the  beginning  of 
May,  as  the  China  Rose,  Laurestinus,  Mi/rtle,  and  the 
like  :  the  more  tender  kinds,  as  the  Geraniums,  Fuchsias, 
and  others,  may  remain  until  the  middle  or  latter  part  of 
that  month,  at  a  time  when  the  frosts  are  over.  This 
process,  like  many  others,  must  be  managed  agreeably 
to  the  situation  of  the  country  in  which  it  is  to  be  per- 
formed, and  the  nature  of  the  season  at  the  time  of  doing 
the  work,  which  a  judicious  person  will  at  once  discover, 
as  a  practical  knowledge  is  worth  volumes  of  theory. 

Care  should  be  taken  to  place  every  plant,  as  near 
as  possible,  in  a  situation  the  best  adapted  to  its  na- 
ture. The  Camellia,  Daphne,  Nerium,  and  most  kinds  of 
evergreens,  thrive  best  in  a  shaded  situation;  others  thrive 
and  flower  more  effectually  in  an  exposed  location,  as  the 
Geranium  and  most  kinds  of  fulgid  flowers. 

Some  taste  is  also  required  in  placing  the  plants 
where  their  habit  will  have  the  desired  effect ;  some 
require  sticks  to  cling  to,  and  should  be  placed  in  the 
centre  of  small  figures,  as  the  Thunbergia  alata,  and 
Maurandia  Barclayana,  and  all  convolvulous  plants  : 
others  are  more  proper  for  the  facings  of  borders  and 
clumps,  being  of  a  trailing  nature,  as  the  Verbena  melin- 
dris,  and  Verbena  capitata.  Vines  and  creepers  are  best 
adapted  to  the  covering  of  arbors,  trellises,  and  so  on. 

The  Thunbergia  alata,  Maurandia  Barclayana,  and 
the  like  climbing  plants,  may  be  trained  to  appear  to  ad- 
vantage on  trellis  of  an  ornamental  form,  as  that  oiafan, 
balloon,  ox  pyramid,  which  should  be  of  a  size  correspond- 
ing to  the  place  they  are  planted  in. 
12 


134  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

There  are  many  kinds  of  plants  belonging  to  the  green- 
house that  ought  to  be  propagated  either  in  the  fall  by 
cuttings  and  remain  in  the  house  through  the  winter,  or 
to  be  propagated  early  in  the  spring,  for  the  express  pur- 
pose of  ornamenting  the  flower  garden  in  the  summer  ; 
as,  the  different  varieties  of  the  Heliotrope,  the  Fuchsia 
or  Ear-drop,  the  Verbena,  and  soft,  free-flowering  plants, 
which  should  be  plunged  out  of  the  pots ; —  they  should 
be  mixed  indiscriminately  among  the  other  plants  in  the 
vacant  places ; —  however,  in  some  cases  they  are  planted 
separately  in  beds  by  themselves,  as  in  small  figures  on 
grass  plots,  where  they  have  a  very  pretty  effect  in  the 
flowering  season. 

All  plants  set  out  not  to  be  taken  up  in  the  autumn  for 
the  green-house  or  rooms,  should  be  plunged  into  the 
ground  out  of  their  pots.  But  those  intended  to  be  taken 
into  winter  quarters,  as  most  kinds  of  evergreens  and  the 
like,  should  be  plunged  in  the  pot  into  the  ground.  Being 
plunged  in  the  pot,  the  strong,  luxuriant  growth  they 
would  acquire,  will  be  in  a  measure  repressed,  owing  to 
the  roots  being  curtailed ;  whilst  if  turned  out  of  the  pot 
they  would  extend  their  roots  some  distance  in  the  soil. 
and  when  taken  up  in  the  fall,  the  roots  would  be  severed 
and  the  plants  weakened  so  as  to  require  some  time  to 
recover. 

The  management  of  green-house  plants  in  this  way  is 
simply  to  water  them  when  they  need,  and  prune  any 
straggling  branches  that  appear  during  the  season. 


ON  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  CUT  FLOWERS.      135 

CHAPTER  IV. 

On  the   Manasemeut   of  Cut  Flowers. 


It  being  now  an  almost  universal  practice  to  have  cut 
flowers  in  rooms  as  natural  ornaments,  some  hints  rela- 
tive to  the  management  of  them  may  perhaps  be  of  service 
to  their  fair  patrons.  To  preserve  cut  flowers,  such  as  the 
Dahlia  and  succulent  kinds,  in  a  fresh  manner,  and  to 
keep  them  from  wilting  and  fading  in  summer,  when  cut 
from  the  plant  they  should  be  immediately  immersed  in 
clean  water,  by  which  the  pores  will  be  nlleu  with  Vv'^t^r 
and  exhaustion  prevented,  and  consequently  the  flower 
will  remain  in  a  fresh  state. 

Packing  cut  floivers. —  In  packing  cut  flowers  to  go 
some  distance  in  the  winter  season,  I  recommend  to  put 
them  in  a  wooden  box  of  a  size  corresponding  to  the  quan- 
tity to  be  packed,  the  inside  of  the  box  to  be  lined  with 
cotton  wool,  and  the  flowers  to  be  laid  loosely  in  the  box» 
beginning  at  the  bottom  with  the  hardiest  kinds,  placing 
them  in  such  a  manner  that  the  flowers  are  upwards  and 
that  the  leaves  intersect  them ;  arranging  the  whole 
so  that  one  part  will  spring  lightly  on  the  other  in 
case  of  a  sudden  jerk  in  travelling:  in  this  manner,  pro- 
ceed with  the  whole  to  the  top,  which  cover  with  a  lid  lined 
with  cotton  wool  like  the  sides.  In  this  mode  of  pack- 
ing, the  wool  serves  to  keep  out  the  cold,  and  gives  way 
to  the  flowers  that  press  it  without  bruising  or  injuring 
them. 


136  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    CO3IPANI0Nc 

For  the  preserving  of  flowers  in  rooms,  I  extract  tne 
following  from.  Sweet's  Hot-house  Manual,  which  is  the 
only  article  I  have  seen  in  print  and  the  best  method  I  can 
recommend  on  the  subject ;  he  says, 

"  Many  persons  have  expressed  a  wish  to  be  acquainted 
with  the  best  method  of  preserving  cut  flowers  for  a  length 
of  time  in  water  ;  this  we  have  never  seen  satisfactorily 
explained,  though  it  is  a  very  simple  question  :  the  only 
method  we  have  seen  adverted  to,  is  to  frequently  change 
the  water;  this  of  itself  is  scarcely  of  any  essential  bene- 
fit :  the  only  method  is  to  cut  off  half  an  inch  or  an 
inch  of  the  stem  that  has  been  in  the  water,  according  to 
the  length  of  it ;  this  will  again  open  the  pores  that  have 
become  closed  with  glutinous  matler  that  has  exuded 
from  the  stem  when  first  cut,  and  the  pores  being  stopt^ 
very  often  before  the  stem  is  placed  in  the  water,  fre- 
quently occasions  rapid  withering  :  by  cutting  the  bottom 
of  the  stem,  the  moisture  immediately  begins  to  flow 
upwards  and  the  branch  soon  recovers  its  vigor : 
the  stems  of  flowers  are  also  frequently  kept  in  water  un- 
til the  bottom  begins  to  rot  and  decay  ;  those,  if  cut  above 
that,  will  also  recover  again^  and  when  placed  in  fresh 
water  will  frequently  continue  fresh  for  some  time  after- 
wards. Flowers  bought  in  shops  and  markets,  are  often 
dried  at  the  bottom,  before  restored  again  to  the  water; 
the  bottoms  of  the  stems  of  these  should  therefore  be  al- 
ways cut  before  immersed  in  water  again.  Specimens 
of  plants  coming  from  a  long  distance  are  frequently  much 
withered  when  they  arrive  ;  they  should  therefore  be  en- 
closed at  the  bottom  in  wet  moss,  tied  round  them  before 
they  are  packed  in  a  box  or  basket ;  we  have  frequently 
had  them  arrive  much  withered,  and  find  the  best  way  of 
recovering  them  to  cut  the  bottom  of  the  stem  or  branch. 


ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  PLANTS  IN  ROOMS,  ETC.    137 

and  place  their  ends  in  about  an  inch  of  water  in  the  bot- 
tom of  a  large  bread  pan,  or  some  such  vessel,  and  sprin- 
kle a  little  water  on  their  leaves,  and  they  will  in  general 
be  all  fresh  in  the  morning :  the  vessel  must  be  covered 
close  with  a  wooden,  or  other  cover,  that  fits  close,  and 
excludes  the  air." 


CHAPTER   V. 

On   the    Management  of  Plants  in    Rooms,  and  of  Bulba 
in   Pots  and  Water  Glasses. 


Art.  1.  —  Result  of  Mismanagejnent. 

In  order  to  be  as  explicit  as  possible  on  the  manage- 
ment of  plants  in  rooms,  I  refer  the  reader  to  the  first  part 
of  this  book  and  to  carefully  peruse  the  articles  on  the  food 
of  plants  and  the  necessary  stimulants y  as  heat,  light,  air, 
4*c.,  with  the  remarks  on  the  bud,  the  root,  and  the  leaf: 
which  will  give  some  useful  hints  on  the  tendency  of 
plants  to  the  presence  of  such  natural  food  and  stimulants 
as  contribute  to  their  health  and  well  being. 

After  a  careful  reading  of  those  articles  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  management  of  plants  in  rooms  is  not  so  diffi- 
cult a  task  as  is  generally  supposed,  and  that  much  of  the 
assiduous  attention  paid  to  them  is  more  conducive  to 
their  sickness  than  their  health  and  vigor. 

In  most  cases,  plants  are  taken  into  rooms  at  an   early 
part  of  the  autumn  on  the  approach  of  the  frost,  and  are 
12=^ 


138  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

subjected  to  a  sudden  and  injurious  change  of  air,  tem- 
perature and  treatment.  From  receiving  what  nature 
bestowed  upon  them,  as -the  dew,  the  sun,  and  air,  they  at 
once  become  objects  of  the  tender  and  dib'gent  attention 
of  their  fair  cultivators,  who  foster  them  in  a  close  room, 
watering  them  frequently  at  a  time  when  they  require  to 
be  hardened  to  withstand  the  severity  of  the  coming  win- 
ter. Under  this  management  the  natural  growth  and 
quality  of  the  plant  is  reversed,  by  its  being  forced  into  a 
lueaJi,  slender  habit  and  constitution,  and  the  consequence 
is  that  having  put  forth  its  vigor  at  a  time  unnatural  to 
vegetation,  its  property  is  partly  exhausted  and  a  weakness 
ensues  from  which  it  cannot  possibly  recover  till  its  whole 
system  undergoes  a  renovation,  which  will  take  a  year  at 
least,  and  in  some  cases  the  plants  never  can  be  brought 
again  to  their  proper  healthy  state. 

Art.  2. —  Management  of  the  Plants. 

Previous  to  the  plants  being  brought  into  the  room  they 
should  be  divested  of  any  dead  leaves,  repotted  and  clean- 
ed as  directed  under  the  head  of  green-house  plants  in  the 
green-house  department. 

Much  of  the  health  and  thriftiness  of  the  plants 
will  depend  on  their  being  so  situated  that  they  can  enjoy 
the  light  from  a  window,  and  if  in  a  situation  to  receive 
the  morning  and  mid-day  sun  the  better.  The  best  man- 
ner of  arranging  them  is  on  a  semicircular  stage  with 
running  casters  to  it  by  which  it  can  be  moved  to  any  part 
of  the  room  at  pleasure;  and  as  light  will  have  no  benefi- 
cial effect  on  plants  at  night,  the  stage  may  be  removed 
to  any  part  of  the  room  the  most  convenient  and  corres- 
ponding to  their  nature.  The  dimensions  and  construction 
of  the  stage  should  be  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the  win- 


ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  PLANTS  IN  ROOMS,  ETC.    139 

dow,  and  should  be  so  made  that  the  lower  shelf  is  on  a 
level  with  the  bottom  of  the  window,  in  order  that  the 
plants  placed  on  it  may  receive  the  light.  The  plants 
should  be  placed  on  the  stage  in  a  manner  that  they  can 
all  receive  the  light  from  the  window.  They  should  often 
be  turned,  as  all  plants  always  incline  to  the  light,  and  be- 
ing reversed  they  reverse  their  position  also,  and  hence 
they  are  by  this  method  kept  in  handsome  form,  and  every 
part  of  them  will  have  an  equal  share  of  v^igor. 

Every  opportunity  should  be  taken  to  let  in  fresh  air  to 
the  room,  through  the  window  in  fine,  soft  weather,  and  in 
any  other  manner  in  cold  weather.  So  essential  is  fresh 
air  to  plants  that  the  least  possible  quantity  let  in  mixes 
with  the  impure  air  and  greatly  rectifies  it  —  and  of 
course  the  more  pure  the  air  the  more  healthy  is  the  plant. 
Indeed  cleanliness  and  wholesome  air  are  the  two  princi- 
pal things  to  be  attended  to  in  this  case. 

Watering  plants,  is  by  many  persons  considered  as  a 
very  difficult  point  in  growing  plants  in  rooms ;  however, 
a  few  practical  hints  on  the  subject  will  I  think  so  sim- 
plify it,  that  any  person  may  water  plants  with  the 
greatest  advantage.  The  rule  is  that  all  plants  indicate 
when  water  is  necessary  to  be  applied  by  their  drying  the 
earth  in  pots.  If  the  plants  suffer  for  the  want  of  pro- 
per moisture,  they  lose  their  leaves  and  breed  scaly 
insects,  red  spiders,  &c.,  (for  a  more  particular  notice  of 
which,  see  the  article  on  diseases  of  plants.  Part  2, 
Chapter  VII. j  On  the  other  hand,  when  they  are  over- 
watered,  the  earth  in  the  pots  continues  in  a  moist  state, 
and  from  the  eflfect  of  saturation  often  so2irs,  which  is  very 
injurious  to  the  plants.  Most  kinds  of  fleshy  plants  as  the 
CacticSj  Aloes,  and  the  like,  require  but  little  water  in  the 
winter.     Camellias  and  hardy  evergreens  require  but  lit- 


140       THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

tie  water  in  the  winter  months, and  more  when  the  flower- 
ing season  comes  on.  Most  plants  in  a  growing  state  re- 
quire to  be  often  watered,  but  at  the  same  time  they  should 
be  as  much  as  possible  situated  so  as  to  receive  the  atmos- 
pheric air;3.nd  it  should  be  at  all  times  a  consideration  not 
to  allow  plants  of  any  kind  to  grow  but  as  little  as  possible 
in  rooms  or  in  a  confined  situation. 

Art.  3. —  Groiving  Bulbous  Rooted  Plants  for  Rooms, 
In  the  latter  part  of  November,  a  compost  of  mellow 
loam  mixed  with  a  little  sand  and  leaf  mould  may  be  pre- 
pared for  potting  such  bulbs  as  Hyacinths,  Narcissus  and 
those  kinds  required  to  be  grown  in  rooms.  The  pots 
may  be  filled  with  the  above  compost,  and  the  bulb  placed 
in  the  centre  by  pressing  it  down  in  the  earth  so  that  its 
crown  is  level  with  the  earth  ;  the  pots  must  now  be  plac- 
ed in  a  situation  where  they  do  not  receive  much  light,  as 
bulbs  always  strike  root  much  better  in  darkness  than 
when  fully  exposed  to  light.  Little  water  will  be  requir- 
ed to  be  given  until  the  bulbs  begin  to  grow,  when  the  wa- 
tering may  be  gradually  increased  as  they  increase  in 
height,  and  when  the  flowers  show  they  may  be  co- 
piously watered.  When  the  plants  have  done  flowering 
they  maybe  placed  in  the  ground  as  tsoon  as  the  weather 
will  admit,  to  renovate  their  strength. 

Art.  4. —  Growiiig  Bulbs  in  Glasses. 
Hyacinths  and  Narcissus  may  be  grown  to  good  ad- 
vantage in  glasses  in  rooms.  The  best  time  to  commence 
this  business  is  in  November  :  the  glasses  may  be  filled 
with  clear  water  and  the  bulbs  placed  in  them ;  they  should 
then  be  placed  in  a  light,  airy  room  where  the  temperature 
of  air  is  moderate,  in    order  to   start  them  in  a  vigorous 


ON  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  FRAMES.         141 

manner  ;  as  often  when  they  are  placed  where  they  are 
started  into  growth  too  rapidly  they  are  drawn  very  weak 
and  flower  badly.  In  the  process  of  growing  bulbs  the 
water  should  be  changed  every  three  or  four  days  and  the 
fibrous  roots  rinsed  in  clean  water,  as  any  putrid  substance 
or  impure  matter  that  either  collects  about  them  or  is  in 
the  water  is  likely  to  injure  them  in  the  process. 

If  the  weather  is  mild  when  the  flowering  is  over,  they 
may  be  managed  like  those  in  pots,  by  planting  them  in 
the  flower  beds  to  regain  their  vigor. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

On   tlie  Management  of  Garden  Frames* 


In  flower  gardens  where  choice  collections  of  plants 
are  always  fostered,  it  is  proper  to  have  two  or  three 
garden  frames  for  the  protection  of  the  half  hardy  kinds 
of  herbaceous  plants,  as  the  Carnation^  Polyanthus,  Atc- 
ricula,  &c.  The  frames  for  this  purpose  may  be  of  al- 
most any  dimensions,  but  those  of  a  moderate  size  are 
the  best  —  say  of  three  lights,  from  nine  to  twelve  feet 
lonsr,  and  from  four  to  five  feet  wide.  The  location  of 
the  frame  should  be  where  it  can  have  the  full  influence 
of  the  sun ;  it  should  be  well  protected  from  the  cold 
winds  by  a  board  fence  or  otherwise.  Care  must  be 
taken  that  the  place  is  chosen  where  it  is  perfectly  dry, 
or  the  snow  water  running  into  it  will  rot  and  destroy 
the  plants. 


142  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Having  the  ground  and  frame  thus  prepared,  about 
the  middle  of  September  a  lining  of  leaves  or  manure 
may  be  placed  around  it,  of  about  two  or  three  feet  wide. 
In  the  bottom  of  the  frame,  some  cinders  or  ashes  may 
be  laid,  to  keep  it  dry  and  to  keep  the  worms  from 
working  up  the  earth  among  the  pots.  Place  the 
plants  in  a  regular  manner  in  the  frame,  the  largest  at 
the  back  and  the  smallest  in  the  front ;  be  careful  that 
they  stand  level,  in  order  that  when  watered  the  water 
may  not  wash  off  at  one  side. 

The  management  of  the  frame  in  the  fall  is  simply  to 
water  the  plants  when  they  require  it ;  to  pick  off  all  the 
dead  leaves,  and  keep  it  in  every  way  neat  and  clean. 
The  sashes  must  be  regularly  taken  off  in  the  morning 
and  closed  at  night,  on  fine  days,  until  the  cold  weather 
appears ;  when  they  must  be  left  on  at  all  times ;  except- 
ing fine,  mild  days,  when  they  are  to  be  taken  off  in 
order  to  air  and  strengthen  the  plants. 

When  the  weather  sets  in  severe,  the  frame  must  be 
lined  all  around  two  or  three  feet  thick,  and  as  high  as 
the  glass,  with  hot  horse  manure  ;  and  the  lights  must 
be  regularly  covered  at  night  with  shutters,  boards,  mats, 
or  the  like,  and  uncovered  in  the  morning  unless  the 
frost  is  too  severe,  in  which  case  the  covering  may  be 
kept  on  all  day. 

During  the  winter  the  interior  of  the  frame  should 
often  be  looked  over  of  a  fine  day,  and  divested  of  any 
dead  leaves  or  other  nuisance.  As  the  spring  advances, 
more  air  may  be  given,  and  the  plants  hardened  by  de- 
grees to  plunge  into  the  flower  garden,  as  directed  under 
the  proper  head. 


ON    SPRING   AND    FALL    MANAGEMENT. 

CHAPTER  VII. 

On   Spring   and   Fall    Management. 


143 


Art.  1.  —  Spring  Management. 

When  the  snow  begins  to  disappear  in  the  spring,  the 
shrubbery  and  flower  garden  may  be  often  overlooked, 
and  some  of  the  plants  and  shrubs  that  have  much  cover- 
ing over  them,  may  have  a  part  of  it  taken  off:  for  it  often 
happens  that  plants  being  too  much  covered  at  this  season 
of  the  year,  make  a  feeble  growth  and  are  much  weaken- 
ed and  injured  thereby  when  fully  exposed  ;  we  should 
therefore  uncover  all  kinds  of  plants  and  shrubs  by  de- 
grees as  the  spring  advances,  for  by  either  exposing  them 
too  soon,  or  keeping  them  covered  too  long,  we  cause  them 
to  make  a  weak  and  tender  growth. 

When  the  snow  is  all  gone,  the  garden  may  be 
cleansed  of  all  kinds  of  covering  and  rubbish  that  have 
collected  during  the  winter,  and  everything  should  have  a 
neat,  cleanly  appearance.  The  grass  plot  may  also  have 
a  good  raking  in  order  to  remove  from  it  all  the  dead 
leaves  and  decaying  substances,  which  often  deter  the 
the  young  growth  of  grass  from  coming  up  in  a  regular 
manner :  and  the  consequence  is  that  it  seldom  has  a 
handsome  appearance  during  the  summer  season. 

Pruning  and  traiiiing.  — The  earliest  opportunity 
should  be  taken  to  prune  and  train  all  kinds  of  shrubs, 
vines,  creepers  and  the  like.  In  this  operation  a  few 
leading    principles    are    requisite  to  be   known,  and    the 


144         THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

thing  is  so  simple  and  easy  tliat  any  intelligent  person 
can  perform  it  in  the  most  accurate  manner. 

The  first  thing  to  be  observed  in  pruning  any  kind  of 
trees  or  shrubs  is,  to  take  particular  notice  of  the  natural 
shape  or  habit  of  the  plant  to  be  pruned.  This  will  be 
found  to  be  different  in  almost  every  different  kind  of 
plants  ;  for  instance,  in  some  plants  we  find  them  naturally 
to  assume  an  upright  habit ;  in  others  a  straggling,  and  in 
some  a  weeping :  the  first  is  exemplified  in  the  Rose  of 
Sharon;  the  second  in  the  Rose  and  Snowberry ;  and  the 
third  in  the  Weeping  willow,  Cherry,  and  the  like. 

To  retain  these  habits  and  improve  the  symmetry  of 
plants,  in  such  a  manner  that  the  sun  and  air  may  have  as 
much  as  possible  a  regular  access  to  every  part  of  them, 
is  the  leading  principle  of  pruning  :  for  although  in  many 
cases  the  natural  habits  of  shrubs  and  plants  are  cramped 
into  unnatural  forms,  in  order  to  give  variety  of  effect* 
it  cannot  be  recommended  to  be  followed  as  a  general  rule  ; 
for  whenever  the  natural  habits  of  trees  or  plants  are 
distorted  into  unnatural  forms  or  positions,  it  has  more 
the  appearance  of  mockery  than  reality.  Nature  in  this 
and  every  other  case  should  he  as  much  as  possible  copied 
and  assisted,  but  never  cramped  into  unnatural  forms 
andpositio7is. 

The  natural  habits  of  the  plant  being  noticed,  the  next 
thing  is  to  examine  and  cut  out  all  the  dead  wood. 
In  this  operation  the  pruner  must  not  be  deceived  and  dis- 
figure the  plant  by  cutting  out  such  shoots  as  will  be  re- 
quired to  be  left  to  fill  the  vacancies  of  the  dead  wood  in 
the  growing  season.  The  dead  wood  being  taken  out,  the 
next  thing  is  to  prune  the  plant  in  a  regular  manner  by 
cutting  out  all  the  weakly  shoots  and  thinning  in  such  a 
manner  that  the  sun  and  air  have  a  free  access  to  every 


ON    SPRING   AND    FALL    MANAGEMENT.  145 

part :  all  long  straggling  shoots  should  be  taken  off  that 
the  shrubs  or  vines  may  have  a  regular  compact  appear- 
ance. In  performing  this  operation,  sharp  knives  and  in- 
struments should  be  used  that  the  wounds  may  be  cut 
clear  and  heal  freely. 

Training  all  kinds  of  vines,  as  Honeysuckles,  Clematis, 
Bignonia,  and  the  like,  may  be  done  with  despatch  in  or- 
der that  everything  may  have  a  neat  and  cleanly  appear- 
ance. The  training  of  vines  is  simply  done  by  tying 
them  neatly  with  bass  or  other  strings,  in  such  a  manner 
that  every  part  is  equally  divided  at  a  regular  distance, 
and  to  allow  a  sufficient  space  for  the  summer-wood  to 
grow  and  be  trained  between  the  shoots  laid  in  at  this 
season.  In  training  vines  and  shrubs,  regular  systems  are 
often  adopted  to  a  good  purpose  as  ornamental,  for  which 
I  refer  the  reader  to  that  head  in  page  133,  where  the  dif- 
ferent methods  are  described. 

Art.  2.  —  Fall  Management  and  Covering  Planets. 

We  should  be  cautious  that  the  early  frost  does  not 
destroy  the  Dahlia  roots  and  tender  green-house  plants 
before  they  are  centered  or  housed  :  I  mention  this  the  more 
particularly  as  it  is  very  often  the  case,  especially  with 
young  beginners  in  flower-gardening,  that  tender  plants 
are  left  too  long  unprotected,  and  thus  are  much  injured, 
if  not  totally  destroyed. 

The  potting  of  plants,  putting  them  in  the  frames,  and 
the  like,  are  spoken  of  under  their  proper  heads  in  the 
Miscellany,  to  which  I  refer  the  reader. 

The  covering  or  protecting  plants  should  be  attended 

to  so   soon   as  the   frost  begins   to  be  severe.     The  Box 

edgings  may  be  protected  by  seaweed,  hemlock  brush,  or 

other  light  covering.     Merely  to  keep  off  the  sun    from 

13 


146  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

scalding  Box  edging  will  be  sufficient,  as  it  is  more  inju- 
red by  the  sun  thawing  and  bursting  the  sap  vessels  than 
by  being  severely  frozen ;  and  hence  it  is  that  the  leaves 
of  Box  edgings  have  a  scalded  appearance  in  the  spring. 

The  same  rule  that  is  here  given  with  regard  to  Box 
edging,  is  applicable  to  covering  most  other  plants.  The 
principal  object  is  to  protect  them  from  the  sun  :  for  it  is 
not  the  severe  frost  that  injures  them,  so  much  as  the  sun, 
which  when  it  exerts  its  full  power  on  them,  bursts  their 
veins  in  a  frozen  state  and  causes  the  plants  to  sicken, 
and  in  many  cases  to  die.  Many  plants,  as  bulbs  and 
herbaceous  plants,  are  often  materially  injured  in  the 
spring  by  being  in  a  warm  state  and  commencing  growth 
when  excluded  from  air ;  and  when  uncovered,  the  leaves 
made  are  tender,  and  suffer  very  much  on  being  exposed 
to  the  sun  and  air. 

If  any  China  roses,  tender  vines  or  the  like  are  to  be 
left  out  during  the  winter,  they  must  be  protected,  either 
by  bending  them  down  and  covering  them  with  soil,  or 
by  strawing  them  up  in  a  neat  manner,  —  first  tying 
up  the  branches,  and  then  snugly  covering  them  with 
straw. 

In  many  cases  the  flower  borders,  if  not  in  too  conspi- 
cuous a  place,  would  be  much  better  if  the  stalks  of  herba- 
ceous and  other  plants  were  not  cut  down  in  the  fall ;  for 
there  is  no  better  protection  than  the  stalks  of  plants,  and 
especially  if  leaves  can  be  obtained  from  woods  or  else- 
where and  put  around  the  crowns  of  the  plants,  in  which 
case  the  stalks  will  keep  the  light  leaves  in  their  places 
until  the  snow  binds  them  down.  Recollect  that  nature 
has  given  leaves  and  stalks  to  plants  as  a  natural  cover- 
ing, and  therefore  they  are  best  adapted  to  the  purpose. 


ON    THE    SHRUBBERY.  147 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

On  the  Shrubbery. 


The  shrubbery  is  so  nearly  allied  to  the  flower  garden 
that  in  a  work  professedly  treating  of  the  latter,  a  parti- 
cular notice  of  the  former  subject  is  required.  In- 
deed, it  is  rarely  that  the  flower  garden  has  a  good 
and  natural  appearance  without  the  presence  of  the 
shrubbery,  either  as  forming  an  outline  on  the  margin,  or 
occupying  a  prominent  situation  at  one  end  for  the  conve- 
nience of  a  shady  retreat  or  other  useful  purpose.  Upon 
a  careful  observation  of  the  general  methods  of  laying 
out  flower  gardens,  it  will  be  seen  that  there  is  too  much 
sameness  in  their  appearance,  arising  [from  the  neglect 
to  appropriate  a  part  of  the  ground  to  the  shrubber3^ 
This  I  imagine  to  be  chiefly  owing  to  the  geometrical  or 
Dutch  system  being  mostly  followed  in  the  laying  out^of 
flower  gardens :  and  hence  a  system  has  been  adopted 
that  is  altogether  proper  and  natural  to  a  foreign  climate, 
but  has  little  claim  upon  good  taste  in  this  country, 
where  climate  and  local  circumstances  are  so  opposite. 
It  is  a  well  known  fact  that  the  Dutch  are  the  most  suc- 
cessful cultivators  of  the  Tulip,  the  Hyacinth,  and  most 
other  kinds  of  bulbous  rooted  plants,  in  the  known  world  ; 
and  it  is  also  known  that  the  soil  and  situation  in  which 
they  are  grown  are  of  a  humid  nature,  which  is  congenial 
to  most  kinds  of  bulbous  rooted  plants.  Such  local  cir- 
cumstances, united  with   industry  and  intelligence,  have 


148         THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

put  the  Dutch  in  possession  of  an  annual  income  from 
flower  roots  of  a  very  large  amount,  which  it  is  probable 
will  not  be  equalled  by  any  other  country  for  ages.  But 
the  climate  of  America  is  not  favorable  to  the  culture  of 
bulbs  to  a  great  extent,  owing  to  the  soil  and  atmosphere 
being  dry  :  on  the  other  hand,  hard-wooded  shrubs  of 
most  kinds,  are  well  adapted  to  our  soil  and  climate,  and 
flourish  in  almost  any  part  and  place  in  the  Northern 
States.  The  native  varieties  of  shrubs,  as  American 
Honeysuckles,  American  Laurel,  AndroTnedas,  and  the 
like,  are  particularly  adapted  to  the  shrubbery,  and  are 
highly  deserving  a  more  general  introduction  into  it. 

I  recommend  that  shrubbery  be  more  frequently  plant- 
ed on  the  margin  of  lawns,  the  outsides  of  the  flower 
garden,  and  indeed  in  all  kinds  of  foregrounds  and  side 
entrances  to  residences  of  almost  any  denomination.  To 
residences  on  the  main  road  and  in  the  immediate  vicini- 
ty of  cities,  shrubbery  can  with  every  propriety  be  intro- 
duced on  the  side  wings  of  the  lawn  and  carriage  roads  : 
and  in  many  cases  if  a  belt  or  border  of  some  seven  or 
eight  feet  wide  of  shrubbery  be  planted  in  front  next  to 
the  road  that  passes  such  places,  it  would  add  much  to 
the  beauty  and  value  of  the  property.  In  many  places 
of  this  description  the  front  entrances  are  planted  alto- 
gether with  forest  trees,  as  the  Balsam  Fir,  Sugar  Ma- 
ple, Horse  Chestnut,  and  the  like  tall-growing  kinds, 
which  when  grown  to  the  full  size  give  a  heavy  and 
gloomy  appearance  where  a  lively  variation  should  have 
the  precedence.  There  can  be  no  objection,  however,  to 
a  few  ornamental  trees  being  planted  in  front  of  such 
houses  or  even  mingled  with  the  shrubbery,  and  particu- 
larly if  so  managed  as  to  form  a  screen  or  outline  to  pro- 


ON   THE    SHRUBBERY.  149 

tect  the  building  from  the  cold  winds,  when  trees  so  situ- 
ated serve  the  double  purpose  of  shelter  and  ornament. 

In  planting  shrubs  of  every  denomination,  the  general 
rule  must  be  to  place  the  plants  so  that  their  habit  and  ap- 
pearance will  be  really  ornamental  and  at  the  same  time 
subserve  (or  at  least  seem  to)  some  useful  end :  for  in- 
stance, the  taller  kinds,  as  the  Lilac,  Snoioball,  and  the 
like,  are  the  most  proper  to  cover  board  fences,  and  the 
back  part  of  shrubberies  ;  the  more  dwarf  kinds,  as  the 
Double  Almond,  Roses,  Mezeron  and  so  on,  for  the  front 
or  facing.  There  is  also  some  taste  required  in  mixing 
the  varieties  of  foliage  and  habits  of  the  different  kinds 
to  be  planted,  which  can  only  be  acquired  by  a  due  ob- 
servance of  shrubs  when  in  full  foliage.  The  planting 
should  be  so  managed  that  when  grown  up  the  outline  is 
natural,  that  is  to  say,  not  too  formal ;  but  here  and 
there  a  little  broken  by  some  tall  shrub  growing  above 
the  rest. 

In  the  front  of  such  plantations  a  part  of  the  ground 
should  be  planted  with  herbaceous  and  other  kinds  of 
plants,  which  when  nicely  mingled  with  the  shrubs  form 
a  pretty  contrast  in  the  flowering  season.  Indeed  the 
margin  of  a  shrubbery  is  the  only  situation  where  such 
plants  will  flourish  and  show  to  good  advantage,  besides 
giving  a  fine  finish  to  the  whole. 

For  the  manner  of  planting  shrubs,  I  refer  the  reader 
to  an  article  on  that  subject  in  a  former  part  of  the  book ; 
(Part  2,  Chapter  III.) 


13^ 


150  THE  FLOWER  GARDEN    COMFANIO??, 

CHAPTER   IX. 

On   Potting    and    Repotting  Plantev 


Art.   1.  —  Potting  Green-house  Plants. 

[The  following  directions  for  potting  green-house  plants- 
are  equally  applicable  to  hardy  plants,  &c.] 

Potting  green-house  plants  is  mostly  done  a  short  time 
previous  to  taking  the  plants  into  the  house,  which  is 
generally  the  beginning  or  middle  of  September.  In 
performing  this  business,  the  first  thing  to  be  attended  to 
is  the  procuring  of  clean  pots,  compost,  &c.  to  be  used. 
The  compost  that  will  answer  most  plants,  consists  of 
about  two  thirds  of  good  mellow  loam  taken  from  the 
top  sod  of  a  pasture  or  other  place  where  sheep,  oxen  or 
other  animals  have  lain  and  enriched  it :  this  should  be 
taken  off  about  six  inches  deep  and  laid  in  a  heap  some 
time  in  order  that  it  may  rot  and  incorporate  together. 
The  loam  may  be  mixed  with  one  third  of  well  rotted 
leaf  mould,  or  other  rich  old  manure  that  will  mix  and 
incorporate  with  the  loam  ;  —  if  the  loam  is  not  of  a 
sandy  quality,  a  little  sand  may  be  applied  in  order  to 
give  a  little  drainage  to  the  plants  to  be  potted  in  it.  For 
some  families  of  plants,  as  the  Erica,  Dios??ia,  &c.,  a 
black  peaty  or  bog  earth  is  the  most  proper  and  must  be 
obtained  from  the  sides  of  woods,  natural  bogs,  &c. 

Having  the  soil  prepared,  the  potting  may  be  com- 
menced by  carefully  turning  the  plants  out  of  the  pots, 
and  paring  off  with  a  sharp  knife  part  of  the  roots  matted 


ON  POTTING  AND  REPOTTING   PLANTS.  151 

around  the  ball.  This  done,  select  a  pot  of  a  size  to 
allow  some  fresh  compost  to  be  put  into  the  bottom  and 
side ;  then  pot  the  plant,  thus :  —  lay  a  few  pieces  of 
pots  or  other  crockery  at  the  bottom  of  the  pot  to  act  as  a 
drainage ;  place  two  or  three  inches  of  the  compost  over 
the  crockery  in  the  bottom  of  the  pot,  and  then  place  the 
plant  with  the  ball  in  the  centre  of  it,  filling  the  sides 
between  the  pot  and  ball  with  compost,  when  the  pot 
may  have  a  gentle  shake  with  the  hands  to  settle  the 
earth  about  the  ball  and  roots  of  the  plants.  The  plants 
may  then  have  a  gentle  watering,  and  be  placed  where 
they  are  to  remain  until  they  are  taken  into  the  green- 
house. 

Art.  2,' —  Potting  of  Plants  taken  from  the  Ground. 

The  beginning  of  September  is  the  best  time  to  take 
from  the  ground  and  pot  such  plants  as  are  intended  to 
be  taken  into  the  green-house  or  rooms.  In  performing 
this  business  the  plants  must  be  taken  as  carefully 
as  possible  from  the  ground  with  a  portion  of  earth 
about  their  roots  and  potted  in  the  same  manner  as 
directed  above  ;  but  their  treatment  requires  to  be  some- 
thing different  by  placing  them  in  a  shady  situation  after 
being  potted,  in  order  that  they  may  root  the  more  freely 
into  the  new  soil  that  they  are  potted  in.  When  the 
plants  begin  to  make  new  roots  into  the  fresh  soil,  they 
are  to  be  divested  of  any  dead  leaves  that  may  be  about 
them,  and  more  exposed  to  the  sun  previous  to  their  be- 
ing removed  to  the  green-house  or  rooms. 

Art.  3.  — Potting  of  Young  Plants  from  Cuttings. 
All   kinds  of  young  plants,  as  Geraniums,  Roses,  and 
the    like,   propagated    from   cuttings,   should  be  potted 


152  THE  FLOWER    GARDEN  COMPANION. 

in  small  pots  as  soon  as  they  are  well  rooted.  Having" 
your  compost  and  pots  (which  should  always  be  small 
for  this  "purpose)  prepared,  commence  the  business  by 
carefully  turning  out  the  cuttings  with  the  Jball  of  earth 
entire ;  when  the  plants  may  be  divided  with  as  much 
earth  as  possible  about  their  fibres,  and  potted  in  the 
same  manner  as  directed  for  the  above.  The  plants 
when  potted  off  should  be  placed  in  a  frame,  where 
their  rooting  freely  into  the  soil  in  the  pots,  may 
be  facilitated  by  covering  them  when  the  sun  shines 
strongly  on  them.  If  a  frame  is  not  at  hand,  the  plants 
may  be  placed  in  a  shady  situation  until  they  are  well 
rooted. 


CHAPTER   X. 

On  the  Culture  of  tbe  Pansy  or  Heartsease. 


The  Pansy  having  become  so  favorite  a  plant  in  the 
flower  garden,  I  shall  devote  a  small  space  to  remarks 
on  its  culture. 

To  obtain  new  varieties  the  same  process  as  with 
other  flowers  must  be  resorted  to,  namely  ;  selecting  out 
the  best  kinds  and  impregnating  one  with  the  other  in 
order  to  mix  the  colors  and  obtain  those  which  are  con- 
sidered by  florists  the  best  marked  fiowers,  which  are 
those  with  a  clear,  dark  ground,  and  well  shaped  petals 


ON  THE  CULTURE  OF  THE  PANSY.        153 

that  are  regularly  margined  or  laced  either  with  white  or 
yellow  ;  but  white  is  the  most  delicate  and  is  considered 
the  best. 

Having  procured  the  seed,  it  may  be  saved  to  the 
spring,  when  it  may  be  sown  either  in  a  pot  of  light, 
rich  earth,  or  in  a  frame.  As  soon  as  the  plants  are 
grown  to  a  moderate  size,  they  are  to  be  pricked  out 
either  into  beds  or  borders  of  rich  earth  of  a  moist, 
loamy  nature  ;  in  many  cases  they  are  planted  as  a 
bordering  for  flower  borders,  —  and  when  they  are  of  a 
good  width  they  have  a  very  pretty  effect  in  the  flowering 
season.  But  the  more  proper  way  is  to  plant  them  in 
four-feet  beds,  and  if  a  little  shaded  from  the  noonday 
sun  the  better. 

The  Pansy  IS  in  most  cases  hardy;  however,  if  the  choice 
and  tender  kinds  are  a  little  protected  in  the  winter,  they 
will  flower  much  better  in  the  spring  following.  The 
general  manner  of  planting  the  Pansy  is  to  prepare  a 
piece  of  ground  in  the  usual  way  for  planting  and  divide 
it  into  .four-feet  beds  with  "  eighteen-inch  alleys  ;  and 
plant  .the  seedlings  across  the  beds  about  a  foot  apart 
each  way ;  and  they  are  to  be  in  every  way  treated  as 
other  flowers.  When  the  plants  are  fully  grown  or  fit 
for  transplanting,  they  may  be  mixed  with  other  flowers 
in  the  borders  for  flowering,  and  a  little  shaded  from  the 
mid-day  sun,  which  generally  runs  the  delicate  colors 
af  them. 

The  Heartsease,  or  Pa?tsy,  of  choice  kinds  may  be 
potted  and  protected  in  frames  during  winter,  or  they 
may  be  planted  in  the  soil  in  frames  and  covered  ;  and 
indeed  the  more  choice  kinds  may  be  with  every  pro- 
priety placed  in  the  green-house  to  flower  early,  where 
they  will  have  a  pretty  appearance. 


154  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

I  quote  the  following  article  from  Harrison's  Floricul- 
tural  Cabinet,  (for  Oct.  1837,)  as  containing  some  excel- 
lent directions  for  the  culture  and  propagation  of  the 
Pansy.  "  The  compost  I  use  is  one  fourth  maiden  loam, 
two  fourths  black  garden  mould,  and  one  fourth  rotten 
dung.  When  the  bed  is  prepared,  I  draw  lines  longitudi- 
nally from  one  end  of  the  bed  to  the  other,  by  which 
lines  I  set  the  plants  in  rows.  A  bed  four  feet  wide  will 
allow  of  four  longitudinal  rows  of  plants ;  there  should 
be  one  foot  allotted  to  each  plant  in  the  rows.  I  always 
choose  short  strong  plants,  which  are  small  in  circumfe- 
rence, When  I  have  finished  planting,  I  procure  some 
hoops  and  mats,  for  the  purpose  of  shading  the  plants  for 
a  few  days,  until  they  have  fully  established  themselves. 
As  soon  as  the  season  of  propagating  commences,  which 
I  consider  about  the  first  of  July,  or  if  a  late  season  it 
may  be  delayed  till  the  first  of  August ;  I  proceed  cutting 
off  the  strongest  shoots,  observing  to  cut  them  off  at  a 
joint,  and  then  putting  the  different  varieties  into  separate 
vessels  of  soft  water,  for  a  few  hours,  which  I  find  greatly 
to  promote  their  striking.  The  cutting  bed  is  composed 
of  about  one  third  pit  or  river  sand,  to  ensure  a  closeness 
round  the  cuttings  ;  then  the  cuttings  of  each  variety  are 
planted  separately  and  numbered,  and  are  allowed  to  re- 
main in  that  situation  until  the  following  spring,  when 
they  are  taken  up  and  planted  in  beds.  It  greatly  im- 
proves the  flowers,  if  the  plants  are  watered  with  liquid 
manure,  twice  or  three  times  a  week  ;  it  is  necessary  to 
to  keep  a  watchful  eye  upon  the  plants  that  are  left  for 
seed,  for  it  will  disperse  itself  in  a  few  minutes  after  it  is 
matured." 


THE    PRAIRIE. 

[selected.] 

The  Prairie  was  ciad  in  its  richest  array, 
Its  brightest  of  scarlet  and  gayest  of  green  ; 
And  the  sun  seemed  to  pause  in  his  luminous  way, 
And  to  sparkle  with  joy  o'er  the  beautiful  scene. 

The  flowers,  though  florists  will  hardly  agree 
To  a  doctrine  so  strange  and  so  novel  to  them, 
Were  blushing,  and  luring,  and  making  as  free, 
As  if  each  had  a  heart  in  its  delicate  stem. 

Every  gay  little  bud,  had  a  smile  for  her  peers, 

Though  the  violet  certainly  looked  rather  blue ; 

And  the  blush  of  the  rose  seemed  to  glow  through  her  tears ; 

But  perhaps  as  'twas  early  the  drops  were  of  dew. 

Had  you  seen  them,  dear  Myra,  you  never  again 
Would  be  sceptic  enough  to  deny  that  a  flower 
Had  tender  sensations,  and  pleasure  and  pain, 
And  sweet  recollections  of  sunshine  and  shower. 

The  wild  deer  was  gracefully  bounding  along, 
And  tossing  his  anthers  so  proudly  the  while. 
That  the  gay  little  blossoms  he  cantered  among. 
Were  restrained  by  good  manners  alone,  from  a  smile. 

The  Prairie  bird  strutted  about  with  the  air, 
Of  a  tragedy  king,  or  a  comedy  lover ; 
While  a  pair  of  fond  turtles,  an  amorous  pair, 
Were  quietly  cooing  a  love  lecture  over. 

And  music,  such  music !  the  air  bore  along. 
As  it  swept  the  green  hillocks,  and  shook  the  lone  tree  ; 
The  Prairie  bird's  note  and  the  mocking  bird's  song, 
And  the  hoot  of  the  owl,  and  the  hum  of  the  bee. 


156        THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

And  the  cracking  of  twigs  as  the  wolf  trotted  by, 
And  the  bark  of  the  hunter's  dog  far  o'er  the  plain  ; 
The  report  of  the  rifle,  and  the  favvn's  plaintive  cry, 
And  the  dirge  of  the  crow,  and  the  shriek  of  the  crane. 

And  the  cattle  bell  tinkling,  just  heard  far  away, 
And  a  farmer's  boy  whistling,  the  time  to  beguile  ; 
And  a  voice  in  my  heart,  what  it  was  I  can't  say. 
That  was  warbling  of  Myra  and  love  all  the  while. 

And  I  thought  how  delightful  a  change  it  would  be. 
When  disposed  to  forsake  the  clay  form  I  inhabit, 
To  live  upon  dew  like  the  delicate  bee, 
Or  to  gallop  through  grass  like  a  deer  or  a  rabbit. 

Or  to  a  chaste  bud  with  an  aspect  of  snow, 
Or  a  dandy  of  flowers,  a  gaudy  gay  fellow  ;     • 
On  the  widf  sunny  Prairie  10  dance  and  to  bow. 
With  a  mantle  of  green  and  a  trimming  of  yellow. 

And  I  thought,  but  I  happened  just  then  to  awake, 
How  the  best  settled  intellects  sometimes  will  rove  ; 
And  yet 't  is  a  pleasant  excursion  to  take, 
With  Mab  o'er  the  Praries  when  one  is  in  love. 


GLOSSARY. 


A,  in  composition,  signifies   without,  as  Apkylla,  without  leaves  ; 
Acaulis,  without  a  stem,  &c. 

Acaulis  ;  having  no  stem.       Geniiana  acaulis,  Cnicus  acaulis. 

Acuminatus,  pointed  sharp.     Erica  acuminata. 

Acutus,  sharp,  pointed,  acuminate.      Rumex  acutus. 

Alatus,    winged;    having    membraneous    appendages.      Passiflora 
alata. 

Alburnum,  the  white  wood  near  the  bark  of  trees. 

Albus,  white.     Populus  alba,  Azalea  alba. 

Amabilis,  amiable  ;  pleasing.      Crinum  amabile. 

Amphibium,  amphibious;    growing    either  in  or  out   of  the  water. 
Polygonum  amphibium. 

Augustus,  narrow,  straight,  slender.     Kalmia  angustifolium,  Linum 
angustifolium. 

Apex,  the  summit ;  generally  applied  to  anything  terminating  in  a 
point. 

Apiculatum,  {apis,  a  bee,)  resembling  a  bee ;  as  the  flowers  oi  Del- 
phinum  elatum,  or  Bee  Larkspur. 

Aquaticus,  {aqua,  water,)  growing  in  water.       Poa  aquatica-,  Water 
Lily,  &.C. 

Arbor,  a  tree. 

Arboreus,  shrubby  ;  woody.     Daturea  arborea;  Erica  arbor ea. 

Ardens,  bright;  glowing;  burnished.    Erica  ardens ;  Pelargonium 
ardens. 

Argenteus,  silvery;  white  and  shining  like  silver.    Protea  argentea. 

Armatus,  armed  with  spines,  aculei,  &c.     Acacia  armata. 

Articulatus,  jointed.     Cacalia  articulata. 

Asterias,  (a  star,)  stellate.     Stapelia  asterias. 

Atropurpureus,  compound  of  black  and  purple.     Camellia  atropur- 
pure  a. 

14 


155  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Augustus,  imperial ;  grand ;  magnificent.     Pelargoniwni  angustum. 
Australis,  southern  ;  coming  from  the  south.    Erica  australis. 
Azurea,  (azure,  sky  blue,)  sky  blue  colored.     Campanula  azurea- 

Barba,  a  beard;  a  species  of  rigid  pubescence.  Chironia  barbata  ; 
Dianthus  barbatus. 

Bicolor,  (com.  bis  and  coZor,)  two  colored.  Erica  bicolor ;  Pelargo- 
nium bicolor. 

Biennis, of  two  years  duration.     Gaurabiennis. 

Biflorus,  (com.  bis  and  Jlos,)  two  flowered.  Aarcissus  bi/lorus;  Eri- 
ca bijlora. 

Borealis,  northern.     Linnea  borealis. 

Bractea,  an  ornamental  leaf,  exemplified  in  the  Lime  or  Basswood, 
and  Poinsettiipulcherimus. 

Coeruleus,  sky  colored.     Trachelium  cceruleum. 

Campanulatus,  {campana^  a  bell,)  bell  shaped.  Ipomcea  campan- 
ulata. 

Capitatus,  growing  in  a  head  ;  a  species  of  inflorescence.  Verbena 
capitata;  Diosma  capitata. 

Cardinalis,  principal ;  chief;  also  scarlet,  from  the  color  of  a  cardi- 
nal's robe.     Lobelia  car dinalis . 

Carneus,  {carnis,  flesh,)  flesh  colored.     Veronica  camea. 

Carnosus,  {carnis,  flesh,)  fleshy ;  plump  ;  thick  ;  pulpy.  Hoya  car- 
nosa. 

Catharlicus,  purgative.     Rhamnu3  catharticus. 

Ciliatus,  {cilium,  the  eye-lid,)  edged  with  hairs  like  an  eye-lid.  Eri- 
ca cUiaris,  Diosma  ciliati. 

Coccineus,  scarlet ;  a  deep  scarlet.     Salvia  coccinea. 

Color,  hue  ;  a  sensible  quality  distinguishable  by  the  eye. 

Colorans,  {color,)  a  term  used  to  express  mutability  and  diversity  of 
color.     Erica  colorans . 

Coma,  a  head  or  tuft  of  hair ;  a  terminal  bractea,  forming  a  tuft  as  in 
Euco mis  punctata ;  Lavendula  spicata. 

Communis,  common ;  general.     Pyrus  communis. 

Compactus,  close  ;  compact;  solid. 

Concolor,  one  colored.    Erica  concolor;  Lilium  concolor. 

Conspicuus,  clear,  apparent ;  excellent;  very  grand.  Erica conspicua. 

Corculum,  (dim.  of  cor,  the  heart,)  a  little  heart ;  the  embryo  of  the 
future  plant,  contained  in  the  seed. 

Cordatus,  (cor,  the  heart,)  heart-shaped.     Diosma  cordata. 

Cornuius,  horned.     Erica  cornuta. 

Corolla,  a  little  crown ;  chaplet,  or  garland ;  the  painted  leaves  of  a 
Jlower. 


GLOSSARY.  159 

Cortex,  the  outer  rind  or  covering  of  trees  and  plants. 

Coronatus,  {corona,  a  crown,)  resembling  a  crown.  Lychnis  coronata ; 
Erica  coronata. 

Corynibus,  a  cluster  of  ivy  berries. 

Crassifolius,  {crassus,  thick;  fleshy,)  fleshy  leaved.  Saxifraga 
crassifolia. 

Crispus,  crisped  ;  curled  ;  crumped.     Ixia  crispa. 

Cruentus,  bloody  ;  red  like  blood.     Erica  cruenta. 

Cupreus,  (cuprum,  copper,)  copper  colored.     Iris  cuprea. 

Cyaneus,  of  a  bright  blue  color.     Arista  cyanea. 

Cylindricus,  (cylindrus,  a  cylinder  or  roller,)  cylindric.  Gnaphalium 
cylindricum. 

Deciduous,  subject  to  fall.  A  tree  is  deciduous  when  the  leaves  fall  off 
in  autumn, 

Decorus,  handsome  ;  graceful.     Protea  decora  ;  Erica  decora. 

Decussatus,  {decusso,  to  divide  crosswise.)  A  plant  is  decussate 
when  its  leaves  point  in  four  directions  only,  or  crosswise.  Veronica 
decussata. 

Defoliation,  (de,  from,  and ybZmm,  a  leaf,)  the  shedding  of  leaves. 

Dentatus,  toothed  ;  having  notches  like  teeth.  Mostly  applied  to  the 
margins  of  leaves.     Lavendula  dentata;  Aspidium  dentatum. 

Didymus.  (twins,)  two  united.     Monarda  didyma. 

Dipetalus,  two  petalled.     Pclargoninum  dipetalum. 

Discolor,  {two  and  color,)  two  colored.     Tradescantia  discolor. 

Divaricatus,  growing  in  a  disorderly  manner;  inclining.  Phlox  di- 
varicata. 

DulciSj  sweet ;  nectariferous.     Inga  dulcis  ;  Solanum  dulcimera . 

Echinatus,  covered  with  prickles.    Pelargonium  echinatum,. 

Edulis,  eatable;  good  for  food.    Boletus  edulis ;  Passijlora  edulis. 

Elegans,  elegant ;  handsome  ;  neat ;  fine.  Erica  elegans  ;  Eupato- 
rium  elegans. 

Ensiformis,  sword-shaped.     Mimosa  ensifolia. 

Equestris,  {equiLs,  a  horse,)  having  the  fancied  resemblance  of  a 
horse's  head.     Amaryllis  equestris. 

Erectus,  erect;  upright;  aspiring.     Clematis  erecta. 

Erubescens,  blush  colored.     Erica  erubescens. 

Eximius,  choice ;  excellent ;  noble.     Gnaphalium  eximium. 

Falcatus,  {falx,  a  hook  or  sickle,)  hooked ;  bent  like  a  sickle.  As- 
paragus Jalcatus. 

Ferrugineus,  iron  colored  ;  rusty.  Lasiopetalumferrugineum;  Rho- 
dodendron Jerrugineum' 


160  THE    FLOWER    GARDEN    COMPANION. 

Filamentosus,  (JHurriy  a  thread,)  thread-shaped;'  producing  fila- 
ments.    Yucca  JUamentosa. 

Fimbriatus,  fringed  ;  flounced.  Gentiana  Jimbriata ;  Camellia  Jim- 
hriata.     , 

Flagelliformis,  Jlagellum,  a  whip.     Cactus  fiagellifor'tnis. 

Floridus,  florid  ;  gay;  fresh.     Gardenia  florida. 

Fcetidus,  of  a  rank  smell.     PotJws  fcetidus ;  Cerissa  fcstida. 

Folium,  a  leaf  of  a  plant. 

Formosus,  beautiful ;  handsome;  ornamental.  Ruellafoi-mosa;  Po- 
tentilla  formosa. 

Fragrans,  having  a  smell,  either  agreeable  or  disagreeable ;  but  gen- 
erally applied  to  the  former.     Oka  fragrans. 

Fruticosus,  (yrtt/ear,  a  shrub,)  shrubby.    Althea  frute.r. 

Fulgens, shining ;  glittering;  resplendent.  Lobelia  fvlg ens ;  Salvia 
fulgens. 

Genera,  pi.  of  Genus. 

Genus,  a  kindred  ;  a  race ;  a  family. 

Gibbosus,  (gibbus,  bunched  out,  gouty,)  abounding  with  excrescences, 
particularly  at  the  joints.     Pelargonium  gibbosum. 

Giganlicus,  giant-like  ;  huge.     Colotropris  gigantea. 

Glandulosus,  furnished  with  glands.     Hypericum  glandxdosxnn. 

Glomeratus,  {glomero,  to  gather  into  a  round  heap,)  coliectetl  together 
in  around  assemblege.  Gnaphalivm  glomeratum ;  Mesembryanthe- 
mum  glomeratum. 

Gloriosus,  superb  ;  grand.     Yucca  gloriosa. 

Gracilis,  slender;  weak;  lank.  Jasminum  gracile ;  Fuschia  gra' 
cilis. 

Grandis,  great ;  lofty;  sublime.     Tectona grandis ;  Banksia grandis. 

Grandiflorus,  (grandis,  gredtt,  and  Jlos.)     Cactus  grandijlorus. 
-  Granulatus,  (granum,  a  grain  of  corn.)    Resembling  a  grain  of  corn 
in  any  part.     Sasijraga  granulata. 

Gratus,  grateful ;  agreeable.     Lonicera  grata. 

Hepaticus,  {hcpar,  the  liver,)  liver  colored  ;  lobed  like  the  liver.  Ane- 
mone hepatica. 

Hihernacula,  winter  quarters;  a  part  of  the  plant  which  protects  the 
embryo  herb  ;  the  covering  of  a  bud. 

Hirsutus,  rough ;  hairy  ;  shaggy.  Epilobium  hirsutum;  Viola  hirsuta. 

Hispidus,  rough  ;  bristly;  rugged.     Robinia  hispida. 

Hortensis,  (horlus,  a  garden,)  pertaining  to  or  growing  in  gardens. 
Anemone  hortensis. 

Hybridus,  (a  mongrel,)  bastard  ;  partaking  of  the  nature  of  two  spe- 
cies.    Erica  hybrida. 


GLOSSARY.  161 

Ignescens,  (ignis,  fire,)  fiery;  ardent.  Erica  ignescens;  Pelargo. 
nium  ignescens. 

Imbricatus,  tile-like  ;  laid  over  one  another.  Aloe  imbricata;  Dios- 
ma  imbricata. 

Immersus,  immersed ;  growing  under  water. 

Incanus,  hoary ;  mouldy  ;  colored.     Cislus  incanus. 

Incarnatus,  (m  and  caro,  flesh,)  flesh  colored.     Erodiumincarnatum. 

Indigena  Planta,  a  native  of  any  country  is  indigenous  to  it :  home 
bred.  American  laurel  and  Honeysuckles  are  examples  of  indigenous 
plants. 

Infundibuliformis,  {infundibvlum,  z.  funnel,)  funnel  shaped.  Eri<:a 
infundihuliform  is . 

Inodorus,  having  no  smell.    Allium  inodorum  ;  Syringa  inodora. 

Integra,  entire  ;  whole.     Clematis  integri folia. 

Involucrum,  {involvo,  to  envelope,)  wrap  or  fold  in. 

Laccatus,  {lac,  milk,)  milky ;  also,  improperly  lake  colored.  Gladio- 
lus laccatus. 

Laevigatus,  Uaevis,  smooth.)  Prinos  Icevigatus;  Calicanthus  Icexi. 
gatus. 

Lanatus,  woolly  ;  covered  with  a  downy  pubescens  resembling  wool. 
Stachys  lanata;  Geranium  lanata. 

Lanceolatus,  {lanceo,  a  spear  or  lance,)  lance  shaped.  Acacia  lanceo- 
lata. 

Latifolius,  broad-leaved.    Kalmia  latifolia. 

Liber,  the  inner  bark  of  trees  and  plants. 

Liliacea,  plants  resembling  the  lily. 

Linguus,  {lingua,  a  tongue,)  tongue  shaped.    Aloe  lingua. 

Lobatus,  (the  flap  of  the  ear,)  lobate.    Pelargonium  lobatum. 

Lophantus,  a  crest  or  mane.    Acacia  lophanta. 

Maculatus,  spotted ;  speckled.    Arum  maculatum. 

Major,  the  bigger ;  greater.    Tropceolum  majus. 

Mammillaris,  {mamilla,  a  little  breast.)     Cactus  mammillaris. 

Maritimus,  growing  near  the  sea.     Crambe  maritima. 

Maximus,  greatest;  the  superlative  degree  of  dimension.  Convolvu- 
lus major. 

Meleagris,  a  Guinea  fowl ;  speckled.    Fritillaria  meleagris. 

Micaas,  glittering ;  shining.  Lavatera  micans;  Pelargonium  micans. 

Microphyllus,  small-leaved.  Edwardsia  microphylla ;  F\Lshcia  my- 
crophylla. 

Minor,  (com.  of  parvus  little)  less ;  smaller.     Convolvulus  minor. 

Monophyllus,  one-leaved.    Kennedia  monophylla. 


162        THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

Monstrosus,  monstrous ;  out  of  ordinary  course  of  nature.  Hyacin- 
thxis  monstrosus. 

Montanus,  {mons,  a  mountain,)  growing  on  mountains.  Veronica 
montana. 

Moschatus,  having  a  musky  smell.     Rosa  moschata. 

Multiflorus,  {multus,  many  and  Jlos,)  many  flowered.  Rosa  multiflo- 
ra,  Jasminum  viultifiorum. 

Muscosus,  mossy ;  resembling  moss.    Rosa  muscosa  ,*  Moss  Rose' 

Nanus,  dwarf,  of  humble  growth.     Philadelphtis  nanus. 

Naturalis,  agreeable  to  nature. 

Nectarium,  {nectar,  honey,)  the  part  of  a  flower  or  plant  that  contains 
honey. 

Niger,  black ;  dark  colored.     Orohus  niger. 

Nobilis,  notable,  grand.     Laurus  nobilis. 

Noctumus,  (nox,  night,)  night  flowering ;  night  smelling.  (Enoihera 
nocturna;  Cestrum  nocturnum. 

Nummularius,  {nummus,  coin,)  round  like  a  piece  of  coin.  I/ysima- 
chia  nummularia. 

Obtusus,  blunt ;  obtuse. 
Octagonus,  eight  angled.    Cactus  octagonus. 

Odor,  smell,  either  good  or  bad,  but  mostly  applied  to  such  as  are 
grateful.    Daphne  odorata. 
Orientalis,  eastern.     Gnaphalium  orientale,  Papaver  orientale. 
Ovatus,  {ovum,  an  egg,)  egg  shaped.     Phlox  ovatum. 

Pallidus,  pale ;  of  a  dusky  white  color.  Crocus  pallidus  ;  Calceola- 
ria pallida. 

Palustris,  {palus,  a  marsh,)  growing  in  marshes.  Caltha  palustris ; 
Hibiscus  palustris. 

Paniculatus,  (panicula,)  panicle  flowered.    Phlox  panicuLa. 

Parvus,  small ;   insignificant. 

Pastoris,  {pastor,  a  shepherd,)  of  a  shepherd.     Bursa  pastoris. 

Pavonius,  ( pavo,  a  peacock,)  spotted  with  gay  colors  as  a  peacock. 
Gorteria  pavonia. 

Pedunculus,  {pes,  afoot,)  the  proper  footstalk  of  a  flower. 

Pencillatus,  {pencilluny,  a  painter's  pencil,)  painted  as  if  with  a  pen- 
cil ;  delicately  painted,  as  the  lines  or  spots  in  the  Pelargonium. 

Pentagonus,  five  angled.     Cactus  pentagonus . 

Pentapetalus,  five  petalled,  flowers  having  five  distinct  petals  or  flower 
leaves. 

Persolutus,  accomplished ;  elegant.    Erica  persoluta. 


GLOSSARY.  163 

Pictus,  {pingo  to  paint,)  painted.     Pelargonium  pidum. 

Planta,  a  plant. 

Plumatus,  (pluma,  a  feather,)  feathery,  downy.    Erica  plumosa. 

Polypetalus,  many  petalled,  as  the  Rose  and  Dahlia. 

Praecox,  early.     Calycanthus  prcecox. 

Princeps,  chief;  principal.    Passijlora  princeps. 

Prostratus,  prostrate;  lying  flat.  Disandra  prostrata;  Banksia 
prostrata. 

Pulchellus,  pretty ;  neat ;  elegant.     Crjrilla  pulchella. 

Pumilus,  dwarf.     Iris  pumila. 

Purpureas,  purple  colored.    Aster  purpureus. 

Pyramidalis,  {pyramis^  a  pyramid,)  pyramidal ;  tapering.  Phlox 
pyramidalis. 

Quadrangularis,  four  angled;   square.     Passijlora  quadrangularis. 
Quinquefolius,  (quinque,  five,  z.nd  folium.)    Ampelopsis  quinquefolia. 

Racemosus,  {racemus,  a  cluster  of  grapes,)  flowering  and  growing  in 
clusters.     Symphora  racemosa. 

Radicans,  {radix,  a  root,)  rooting ;  producing  claspers  resembling 
roots.    Bignonia  radicans. 

Ramus,  a  bough  or  branch  of  a  tree. 

Reniformis,  {rents,  the  kidneys,)  kidney  shaped.  Pelargonium  re- 
nijbrme. 

Repens,  creeping.     Ranuncidus  repens. 

Retortus,  (turned backwards,)  bent  back;  twisted.     Erica  retorta. 

Revolutus,  rolled  backwards.     Cycvs  revoluta. 

Ringens,  grinning ;  gaping.    Mimulus  ringens. 

Rivalis,  of  or  pertaining  to  a  river.    Mimvlus  ricalis. 

Roseus,  rose  colored.     Ixia  rosea. 

Rotatus,  {rota,  a  wheel,)  wheel-shaped.    Pancratium  rotatum. 

Rubellus,  somewhat  red  ;  redish.    Erica  rubella. 

Rubens,  ruddy;  blushing.     Crassula  rubens. 

Ruber,  red.     Valeriana  rubra. 

Rubicuiidus,  deep  red ;  also,  ruddy.     Kennedia  rubicunda. 

Rugosus,  rough ;  wrinkled  ;  furrowed.     Calceolaria  rugosa. 

Sanguineus,  blood-colored.     Geranium  sanguineum. 
Scariosus,  having  longitudinal  incisions   or  channels.     Liatris  sea' 
riosus. 
Sempervirens,  ever- green.    Lonicera  sempervirens. 
Sparsus,  scattered  ;  spread  abroad.     Beaujbrtia sparsa. 
Spicatus,  {spica,  a  spike,)  spike-flowered.    Liatris  spicaia. 


164       THE  FLOWER  GARDEN  COMPANION. 

Splendens,  glittering ;  splendid ;  beautiful.    Lobelia  splendem. 
Stamina,  the  male  organs  of  a  flower. 
Slerilis,  barren.     Fragaria  sterilis. 
Stoloniferus,  creeping.    Phlox  stolonifera. 
Striatus,  channelled ;  also,  striped.     Geranium  striatum. 
Strobilus,  the  Artichoke  ;  the  cone  of  a  Fir. 

Suaveolens,  (suaris,  sweet,)  smelling  sweet;  more  commonly  appli- 
ed to  strong  scented.    Phlox  suaveolens. 

Sylvestris,  (sylva,  a  wood.)     Anemoiie  sylvestris. 

Tardiflorus,  (tardo,  to  be  long  in  coming;  and  flora.)  Aster  tar- 
difl/jra. 

Tenellus,  slender,  delicate.     Aster  tenella, 

Translucens,  (iransluceo,  to  shine  through.)  Pelargonium  translu- 
cens. 

Tremulus,  trembling ;  shaking.    Populus  tremula' 

Truncalus,  {iruncv^,  cut  short,  maimed,)  leaves,  roots,  &e.  are  called 
truncate  when  they  terminate  bluntly  as  if  cut,  or  bitten  off.  Cactus 
iruncatus. 

Tubiflorus,  {tubus,  a  lube,)  tube-flowered.     Erica  tvbiflora. 

Umbellatus,  {umbella,')  umbellate.    Agapanthus  umbeUatus. 

Undulatus,  {unda,  a  wave,)  waved;  when  the  margins  of  the  leaves, 
or  petals  are  larger  in  proportion  than  their  disks,  Pittosporum  undu- 
latum,  Amaryllis  undulata. 

Variegatus,  (modern  Latin,)  having  an  intermixture  of  colors.  Iris 
variegatus,  Pelargonium  variegatum. 

Vernus,  pertaining  to  the  spring.    Phlox  vemus. 

Versicolor,  changing  color ;  particolored.  Iris  versicolor  ;  Oxalis 
versicolor. 

Verticillatus,  whorl-flowered.    Acacia  verticillata. 

Viridis,  green  ;  flourishing.    Lachenalia  viridis, 

Vittatus,  (a  fillet,  or  ribbon)  ribbon  like.     Amaryllis  vittata. 

Volubilis,  twining  round  other  bodies.    Hibbertia  volubUis. 


APPENDIX. 


Aet.  I.  — descriptive  list  of  annual  flowers. 

[The  first  column  gives  the  common  name,  the  lecond  the  botanical, 
the  third  the  height  in  feet,  the  fourth  the  color.  Those  marked  thus  * 
are  climbing  plants.  Those  marked  thus  §  are  delicate  annuals,  and 
should  be  sown  in  hot  beds  in  April  and  transplanted  into  the  open 
ground  the  end  of  May,  or  beginning  of  June.] 


Mexican  Ageratum 

Ageratum  mexicanum 

H 

Blue. 

Sweet  Alyssum 

Alyssum  maritinum 

1 

White. 

Grand  flowering  Argemone 

Argemone  grand iflora 

2 

White. 

Aster  White 

Aster  hortensis  fl.  alba 

Id 

White. 

Purple 

var.  fl.  purpurea 

IjJ  Purple. 

Red 

var.  fl.  rubro 

U 

Red. 

Lilac 

var.  fl.  carnea 

n 

Lilac. 

Red  striped 

var.  fl.  obscura 

Ij  Striped. 

Purple  striped 

var.  fl.  striata 

li  Striped. 

Quilled  red 

superba  rubro 

n 

Red. 

Animated  Oats 

Avena  sensitiva 

2 

Green. 

§Blue  Amethyst 

Browallia  elata 

1 

Blue. 

§White     do.             [flower 

alba 

1 

White. 

§Scarlet  Cacalia,  or  Tassel 

Cacalia  coccinea 

2 

Scarlet. 

Venus'  Looking  Glass 

Campanula  speculum 

1 

Purple. 

♦Balloon  Vine 

Cardiospermum  halicacahumS 

White. 

Great  American  Centaurea 

Centaurea  americana 

2 

Pink. 

Purple  Sweet  Sultan 

moschata 

2 

Purple. 

Yellow  Chrysanthemum 

Chrysanthemum  fl.  lutea 

2 

Fellow. 

White           do 

coronaria 

2 

White. 

Beautiful  Clarkea 

Clarkea  pulchella 

2 

Purple. 

Dwarf  Convolvulus 

Convolvulus  minor 

1 

Tricolor, 

*Great  Pu.  Morning  Glory 

purpurea 

10 

D.  blue. 

166 

APPENDIX. 

Blue  Commelina 

Commelina  ccelestis 

2 

Blue 

§*Two  col'd  Orange  Gourd 

Cucurbita  bicolor 

10 

Yellow. 

§*0r 

aurantina 

10 

Yellow. 

§*Large  Bottle  Gourd 

lagenaria 

10 

W.  Green, 

Elegant  Coreopsis 

Coreopsis  tinctoria 

3 

Yellow. 

Elegant  Escholtzia 

Escholtzia  californica 

1 

Yellow. 

Variegated  Euphorbia 

Euphorbia  variegata 

3 

White. 

Branching  Larkspur 

Delphinium  consolida 

2 

Various. 

Double    do 

var.  pleno 

2 

Blue. 

vi^T    Tncpfi 

2 
1 

Rose. 

1/ finniic 

ajacis 
Hisbiscus  trionum 

Beautiful  Ketmia 

1 
2 

Striped. 

African  Hibiscus 

vesicarius 

2 

Yellow. 

Azure  Blue  Gilia 

Gilia  capitata 

2 

Blue. 

Double  Balsams,  mixed 

Impatiens  balsamina 

2 

Various. 

Oi-^fi-i    /-tn\r\y^A 

fl    TOQPa 

o 

T?n«;p 

Variegated 

variegata 

At 

2 

Striped. 

Purple 

purpurea 

2 

Purple. 

^Ibo. 

2 

White. 

Crimson 

rubro 

2 

Red. 

♦Scarlet  ^Morning  Glory 

Ipomea  coccinea 

10 

Scarlet. 

♦Crimson  Cypress 

quamoclit 

6 

D.  Red. 

Sweet  Peas,  Painted  Lady 

Lathums  odoratus 

4 

Fleshed. 

♦White  Sweet  Peas 

alba 

2 

White. 

♦Purple  do. 

fl.  purpurea 

2 

Purple. 

♦Scarlet  do. 

fl. rosea 

2 

Scarlet. 

♦Striped  do. 

fl.  striata 

2 

Striped, 

Red  Lavatera 

Lavatera  trimensis 

2 

Red. 

White  Lupins 

Lupinus  albus 

3 

White. 

Yellow  do. 

luteus 

2 

Yellow. 

Large  blue  do. 

hirsutus 

2 

Blue. 

Rose  do. 

varius 

2 

Rose. 

Ten  weeks'  Stock  gilliflow 

'r  Mathiolus  annua 

2 

Red. 

Purple  Ten  Weeks'  Stock 

fl.  purpurea 

2 

Purple. 

White  do. 

fl.  alba 

2 

While. 

Scarlet  Malope 

Malope  trifida 

2 

Scarlet. 

§Ice  Plant 

Mesembryanthemum 

1 

White. 

§Sensitive  Plant 

Mimosa  pudica 

1 

Pink. 

Marvel  of  Peru 

Mirabalis  jalapa 

2 

Red. 

Red  and  yellow  striped  do 

fl.  rubro  flava 

2 

Striped. 

Red  and  white  striped  do 
Yellow  Virginia  Tobacco 
Trailing  Nolana 
Grand  flow'g  ev'g  Primrose 
Red  and  white  evening  do. 
Hybrid  Evening  Primrose 
White  evening  do. 
Lindley's  evening  do. 
White  Officinal  Poppy 
Double  white  fringed  do. 
Double  carnation  do. 
Double  rose  do. 
§Scariet  Pentapetes 
*Scarlet  flowering  Bean 
Red  Persicaria 
Marvel  of  Peru 
Sweet  scented  Mignonette 
Wing  leaved  Schizanthus 
Double  purple  Jacobea 

Double  white  do 

§White  Egg  Plant 

Vanilla  scented  Stevia 

African  Marigold 

Orange  Africa  do. 

P^ench  do. 

'^§Winged  Thunbergia 

*Great  Nasturtium 

Hearts'  ease 

Golden  Eternal  flower 

Red  Zinnia 

Yellow  do. 

Violet  do. 

Elegant  red  do. 


APPENDIX. 

lt37 

fl,  rubro  alba 

3 

Striped. 

Nicotiana  rustica 

3 

Y.  Green. 

Nolana  prostrata 

1 

Blue. 

CEnothera  grandiflora 

3 

Yellow. 

rosea  alba 

1 

R.  While. 

CEnothera  hybrida 

1 

Pink. 

tetraptera 

1 

White. 

lindleyii 

1 

P.  White. 

Papaver  somniferum 

4 

White. 

fimbriatum  pie. 

3 

White. 

nigrum  pleno 

8 

Various. 

rhceas  pleno 

2 

Various. 

Pentapetes  phoenica 

2 

Scarlet. 

Phaseolus  multiflorus 

12 

Scarlet. 

Polygonum  orientale 

6 

Red. 

Petunia  nictagynaflora 

3 

White. 

Reseda  odorata 

1 

Cream. 

Schinzathus  pinnatus 

2 

Various. 

Senecio  elegans 

2 

Purple. 

fl.  alba. 

2 

White. 

Solanum  melongena 

2 

Stevia  serrata 

1 

White. 

Tagates  erecta 

3 

Yellow. 

var. 

3 

Orange. 

patula 

2 

Blue. 

Thunbergia  alata 

4 

Y.  PurpU 

Tropaeolum  majus 

4 

Orange. 

Viola  tricolor 

1 

Various. 

Xeranthemum  lucidum 

3 

Yellow. 

Zinnia  multiflora 

2 

Red. 

pauciflora. 

2 

Yellow. 

elegans 

2 

Violet. 

var.  rubro 

2 

Red. 

168 


APPENDIX. 


Art.  II.  —  descriptive  LIST  OF  BIENNIAL  FLOWERS. 

[Those  marked  thus  §  are  delicate,  and  require  to  be  boused  ia  the 
winter.] 


Rose  Champion 

Agrostemma  coronaria 

2 

Red. 

Double  light  blue  Columbine  Aquilegia  vulgaris 

2 

L.  Blue. 

dark  blue  do. 

fl.  azurea 

2 

D.  Blue. 

dark  purple  do. 

fl.  purpurea 

2 

D.  Purple 

Avhite  do. 

fl.  alba 

2 

White. 

§Bloody  Wall  Flower 

Cheiranthus  cheiri 

2 

Yellow. 

Carnation  Pink 

Dianthus  caryophyllus 

2 

Striped. 

Broad  leaved  Pink 

Dianthus  latifolius 

1 

Pink. 

Chinese  imperial  do. 

ohinensis 

1 

Red. 

Sweet  William,  of  sorts 

barbatus 

2 

Varieg. 

Purple  Fox  Glove 

Digitalis  purpurea 

4 

Purple. 

White  do. 

alba 

4 

White. 

Yellow  do. 

lutea 

3 

Yellow. 

§French  Honeysuckle 

Hedysarum  coronarium 

4 

Scarlet. 

Canada  Hedysarum 

canadensis 

5 

Purple. 

Honesty,  or  Satin  Flower 

Lunaria  biennis 

4 

Purple. 

White  Mallows 

Malva  fl.  alba 

2 

White. 

§Persian  Stock  Gilliflower 

Mathiola  odoratissima 

2 

L.  d. 

§Russian  do. 

var. 

2 

Red. 

§White  wall  leafed  do. 

glabrata  alba 

2 

White. 

§Purple  Prussian  Gilliflower               glabrata  purp. 

2 

Purple. 

§ Twickenham  do. 

incana  purp. 

2 

Purple. 

§Scarlet  Stock  Gilliflower 

var.  coccinea 

2 

Scarlet. 

§Queen's  do. 

var.  alba 

2 

White. 

Tree  Primrose 

CEnothera  biennis 

4 

Yellow. 

Purple  Topped  Clary 

Salvia  sclarea 

4 

L.  Blue. 

Long  flowered  Verbascum 

Verbascum  micanthrum 

5 

Yellow. 

APPENDIX.  169 


Art.  III.— laying    OUT  GARDENS  AND    ORNAMENTAL 
PLANTATIONS. 

On   Planting   Ornamental    Trees  to  protect  Build- 
ings and  to  give  effect  to  Landscape  Scenery.  — With- 
out taking  into  consideration  the   value  of  forest  trees, 
as  regards  the  several  uses  they  are  applied  to  as   tim- 
ber,   (which   will    undoubtedly    increase    as    the  towns 
and  cities   on   the  seaboard   increase  in  population  ;    and 
whilst  the  axe  continues  to  diminish   the    timber  forests 
of  the  country,)  the   planting  of  ornamental   forest   trees 
is  really  useful  as  relates  to  the  domestic  comfort    of  the 
inmates  of  dwellings,  that  are  protected  and   ornamented 
by  them  ;  by  affording  shade  in  the  summer  and  protect- 
ing  the   building   from  the  cold  blast  of  winter.     Orna- 
mental  plantations   of  this   kind  also  give  a  mellow  and 
finished  cast  to  the  surrounding  scenery,  and  impress  the 
traveller  with  an  idea  of  the  additional  value  of  property, 
arising  from  an  enterprising  and  intelligent  community. 
And  although  much  has  been  yearly  doing  in  every  sec- 
tion of  this    country,  in  the  improvement   of  ornamental 
plantations,  there   are  two  considerations  which   seem  to 
leave  much  to  be  done  in  that  interesting  subject :  name- 
ly, the  former  idea  of  laying  bare  certain  districts  by  cut- 
ting down  almost  every  forest  tree  ;  and  the  rapid  growth 
of  enterprise  and  commercial  wealth  being  the   cause  of 
numerous  dwellings  of  the  first  order  to   be   built  in  the 
the  vicinity  of  cities  in  rapid  succession,  within  these  few 
years,  in   situations  which   can  only  be  ornamented  with 
trees  by  a  progressive   culture  which   depends    much  on 
management. 

^   The  principal   object  of  this   kind   of  planting  being 
15 


170  APPENDIX. 

real  utility  blended  with  a  picturesque  effect,  a  certain 
knowledge  of  the  different  trees  to  be  used  is  requisite  to 
obtain  the  desired  purpose  ;  as  that  of  their  j9or^  or  habit, 
natural  locations,  the  soil  and  favorite  situations  in  which 
they  thrive  and  form  into  the  most  beautiful  structure  and 
foliage.  Having  ascertained  these  prerequisites,  which 
can  easily  be  done  by  any  intelligent  observer  taking  the 
trouble  to  make  a  general  survey  of  the  trees  growing  in 
the  neighborhood  in  which  he  intends  to  plant,  —  when 
their  healthy  or  meagre  habits  may  be  practically  ascer- 
tained in  a  more  correct  manner  than  from  any  theoretical 
essay  that  can  be  given  by  the  pen,  —  the  next  thing  to 
be  considered  is  the  soil  and  location  of  the  ground  to  be 
ornamented,  which  should  be  in  accordance  with  that  of 
the  most  thrifty  trees  in  their  natural  sites  or  place  of 
o-rowth.  For  let  it  be  recollected,  that  the  most  beautiful 
kind  of  trees,  when  assuming  a  sickly  appearance,  greatly 
depreciate  the  good  effect  of  ornamental  plantations  of 
this  kind  —  whilst,  on  the  other  hand,  those  of  less  beau- 
ty, when  in  a  healthy  condition,  perhaps  serve  to  make 
a  fine  contrast  in  the  general  group.  There  is  some  taste 
also  required  in  the  arrangement  or  planting  the  ground, 
which  nuist  be  kept  in  view  with  the  natural  habit  of  the 
trees  before  examined  ;  which  should  be  grown  to  their 
natural  magnitude,  so  that  some  idea  can  be  formed  of 
the  future  appearance  of  the  improvement  about  to  be 
made,  as  well  as  the  first  planting  or  present  appearance. 

Having  ascertained  the  nature  of  the  soil  and  location 
intended  to  be  planted,  and  made  a  selection  of  such  trees 
as  seem  to  be  suitable  to  the  intended  object,  the  next 
thing  to  be  attended  to  is  that  of  planting  them  in  their 
proper  places,  where  they  can  thrive  and  have  a  free,  easy 
and  useful  appearance.     In  effecting  this  part  of  the  bu- 


APPENDIX.  171 

sjness,  the  most  exposed  situations  at  the  north  and 
northwest  quarters  should  be  planted  in  a  neat  and  econo- 
mical manner. 

If  a  building  is  to  be  ornamented,  the  first  considera- 
tion is  in  planting  on  the  north  and  northwest  quarter  to 
break  off  the  cold  winds  and  protect  it  from  storms.  All 
kinds  of  unsightly  objects  that  are  in  view  should  be  con- 
cealed, and  the  whole  group  should  have  a  fine  pictu- 
resque effect  at  a  distant  view.  This  may  be  accom- 
plished by  a  little  attention  to  the  before  named  requi- 
sites. 

Whilst   on   the  subject  of    ornamental  plantations,  I 
cannot  refrain   from  making  some  remarks  on  the  great 
neglect  of  a  subject  that  is  so  apparently  the  very  nerve  of 
useful  improvement  in  almost  every  country,  and  more  es- 
pecially in  this  where  shelter  and  shade  are  accomplished 
by  no  other  means  in  so   advantageous  a  manner  as  by 
the  presence  of  ornamental  trees.     The  neglect  of  plant- 
ing appears  lo  be  in  a  measure  owing  to  the  too  prevalent 
idea  of  a  speedy  return  for   money  expended  on  general 
improvements  ;  but  it  must  be  recollected  that  every  per- 
son who  plants  in  this  manner  is  almost  certain  to  realize 
his  first  cost  by  the   improved   appearance   given   to  his 
property  which  stamps  a  value  as  it  were  in  the  same  man- 
ner, as  if  the  trees  were  useful  for  the  purpose  of  timber. 
There  is  also  a  kind  of  social  effect  given  to  the   traveller 
when  he  passes  through  a  country  where  buildings  of  this 
kind  are  ornamented  by  the  presence  of  trees  intended  to 
give  shelter  and  shade  ;  and  indeed  I  know  not   of  any 
legacy  that  can  be  transmitted  from  the  father  to  the  son, 
of  a  more   useful   and  affectionate  nature,   than   a  fine 
grove  of  trees  planted  and  reared  by  a  careful  and  diligent 
hand.     If  such  useful  records  were   to  be  handed  down 


172  APPENDIX. 

from  one  generation  to  another,  the  bleak  barrenness 
of  landscape  scenery,  which  is  now  in  many  places  ap- 
parent, would  be  transformed  into  pleasing  groups  of  or- 
namental plantations  that  indicate  social  comfort  and  in- 
telligence. 

Choice  of  Trees  for  Ornamental  and  Landscape  Plan- 
tations.— Much  art  is  required  in  selecting  trcc-s  for  plant- 
ing ornamental  grounds  ;  as  parks,  lawns,  foregrounds  to 
country  residences  and  such  ornamental  plantations.  The 
planter  should  in  this  case  duly  consider  the  appearance 
such  plantations  will  have  when  growing  to  maturity  ;  as 
the  design  will  then  have  its  full  effect.  Present  appear- 
ances have,  in  many  cases,  but  little  to  do  with  the  future, 
which  is  the  grand  object  of  landscape  gardening. 

The  first  consideration  is  the  nature  and  quality  of  the 
ground  to  be  planted,  together  with  the  different  aspects 
and  locations  ;  these  things  must  invariably  be  considered 
in  order  that  trees  which  will  thrive  best  may  be  selected 
for  planting,  and  have  a  pleasing  appearance.  To  accom- 
plish this,  such  only  should  be  chosen  as  are  known  to 
thrive  in  similar  situation  and  soil.  Native  forest  trees 
will  be  found,  in  most  cases,  to  answer  the  best  purpose 
for  the  park  and  exposed  plantations  (with  the  exception 
of  some  few  varieties  of  foreign  trees)  their  natural  pro- 
perties being  particularly  adapted  to  this  climate;  conse- 
quently, they  always  assume  a  healthy  appearance,  which 
is  the  greatest  consideration  in  landscape  scenery  ;  as  or- 
namental trees  when  in  a  sickly  state,  destroy  that  plea- 
sing effect  they  are  intended  to  produce. 

In  selecting  trees  from  a  nursery  or  elsewhere,  at- 
tention should  be  paid  to  choose  those  that  are  of  a  well 
formed  and  regular  growth,  and  from  a  situation  where 
they  have  had   free  exposure  to   the   sun    and   air  :  trees 


APPENDIX. 


173 


grown  too  close  together  are  always  of  a  more  tender 
nature  than  those  in  exposed  situations,  and  are  not  so  fit 
for  being  removed  to  an  exposed  place. 

If  trees  are  to  be  selected  for  planting  of  a  large  growth, 
care  must  be  taken  to  choose  them  in  such  a  manner  that 
their  present    and  future    place    of   growth  correspond. 
Trees  from  different  situations  are  found  to  have  entirely- 
different  properties  ;  for  instance,  the  oak,   maple,  elm, 
and  indeed  all  kinds  of  trees  where  grown  in  an  exposed 
situation  are  found  to  have  protecting  properties,  corres- 
ponding to  their  natural  location  :  their  bark  is  of  a  thick, 
coarse  nature,  their  roots  are  numerous  and  extend  some 
distance  into  the  ground,  their  tops  and  branches  thick  and 
spreading  ;  this  is  natural  to  trees  growing  in  an  exposed 
situation  ;  on  the   contrary,   those  in  growing  woods   or 
confined  places,  of  the  same  denomination  as  the  above, 
have  their  bark  thin,  their  branches   few  and  on  the   top 
of  the  tree,  their  roots  few  in  number  and  of  a  weak,  slim 
nature.     These  facts  should   engage  the  attention   of  the 
planter,  in  order  that  the  removing  may   be  done  in  such 
a  manner  that  theJr  present  and  future  soil  and  situation 
correspond. 

I  particularly  recommend  the  planter  clearly  to  inves- 
tigate this  subject,  which  is  perhaps  the  best  method  of 
learning  the  physiology  of  plants  ;  natural  cases  are  al- 
ways the  surest  guides  to  perfection.  Nothing  can  be 
more  pleasing  to  the  horticulturist,  than  to  reflect  on  the 
beautiful  economy  of  nature,  which  imparts  to  the  vege- 
table kingdom  different  qualities  in  the  same  genus  of 
plants  placed  in  different  situations.  The  animal  king- 
dom is  in  some  respects  similar,  although  more  limited, 
which  is  accounted  for,  when  we  consider  that  they  have 

a  sensitive  power  and   motion,  and  thus   seek  protection 
15^ 


174  APPENDIX. 

from  storms  and  sudden  changes  of  heat  and  cold.  But 
the  vegetable  creation  in  all  its  natural  locations  is  station- 
ary, and  consequently  it  has  to  endure  the  changes  of  the 
elements  in  its  primitive  place  of  growth. 

Thus  it  appears,  that  trees  and  vegetables  when  remov- 
ed, require  to  be  placed  as  much  as  possible  in  the  same 
aspect  and  in  similar  location  as  they  were  in  their  infant 
state.  And  it  should  be  the  principal  object  of  the  arbo- 
riculturist to  observe  this  rule  as  much  as  possible. 

Natural  habit  or  foliage  of  trees.  —  The  planter  should 
only  investigate  the  habit  of  such  trees   as  are  intended 
to  be  planted,  and  those  that  are  of  a  large   size   and  ex- 
posed so   that  the   sun  and  air  have  access  to  every  part 
of  them.     Such  as  are   too  much  crowded  together,  will 
not   attain  a   correct   habit,  as  may  be  seen  in   the  oak 
when  growing  in  confined  places   in  woods  and   groves  ; 
It  is  then  tall  and  slender,  and  has  but  few  side  branches, 
but  when  it  is   exposed  it   forms  a  neat  tree  of  a  hemi- 
spherical figure  ;  —  the  hickory  in  open,  exposed   places 
takes  a  very  beautiful  semi-elliptical  shape  ;  —  the  conical 
form  is   seen  in  the  tulip  tree  and  button-ball  when  ex- 
posed ;  —  the  balsam  fir  forms   a  fine  pyramid  of  living 
green  ;  —  and  the  Lombardy  poplar   is    portrayed   as   a 
complete  spindle  shape.      To  these   many   intermediate 
habits   may  be   seen,  as   in  the  elm,  ash,   walnut,    and 
chestnut ;  but  any  person  who  is  interested    in  this  part 
of  ornamental    planting,   having    duly  investigated   the 
above  mentioned,  wuU  at  once  discover  the  habit  of  every 
tree   sufficiently  to   be    master  of  adapting   them   to  the 
most  suitable  places.     Practice  here  is  the  sure  guide  to 
perfection. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


NEW  ENGLAND 

AGRICULTURAL     WAREHOUSE 
SEED     STORE, 

AND 

OFFICE  OF  THE  NEW  ENGLAND  FARMER, 

NO.  51  &  52,  NORTH  MARKET  STREET, 
BOSTON. 

JO  SEPH    BRECK    &    CO. 


The  proprietors  of  this  establishment  would  inform  their  friends  and 
the  public,  that  they  keep  constantly  on  hand  and  for  sale,  the  greatest 
variety  of  Agricultural  Implements,  Grass  Seeds,  Garden  and 
Flower  Seeds,  Bulbous  Roots,  Double  Dahlias,  &c.,  to  be  found  in 
the  country  ;  — among  which  are  the  following  :  — 

AGRICULTURAL   IMPLEMENTS. 


C.  Howard  Cast  Iron  Ploughs, 
Tices's  do.        do. 

Side  Hill,  do.        do. 

Double  Mould  Board  do. 

Wrought  Iron  and  Wooden  Ploughs, 
Scott     Keith,    and     other     Plough 

Castings, 
Willis's  Improved  Cultivator, 
Green's  Patent  Straw  Cutter,  i 

Willis's     do.  do.  I 


Common  hand         do. 
Manure  and  Hay  Forks, 
Scythes  of  all  kinds, 
Patent  and  other  Snaiths, 
il all's  and  other  Hay  Rakes, 
Grindstones  on  Rollers, 
Corn  Shellers, 
Grain  Cradles, 
Chains  of  all  kinds, 
Willis's  improved  Seed  Sower, 


176 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 


Gaull's  Patent  Churns, 
Self  Operating  Cheese  Press, 
Horse    Power  and  Threshing  Ma- 
chine, 
Davis's  Road  Scrapers, 
Hale's  Rotary  Pump, 
Force  Pumps, 
Copper    do. 
Iron         do. 


Lead  Pipe, 

Underh ill's  Cast  Steel  Axe, 

Ba-k  Mills, 

Corn  and  Cobb  Mills, 

Harris's  Paint     do. 

Winnowing  do. 

Grater  Cider        do. 

Cast  Iron  Cider  Screws, 

Yokes  of  all  kinds. 


With  a  great  variety  of  Agricultural  and  Horticultural  Tools,  too  nu- 
merous to  meution. 

FIELD    SEEDS. 


Northern  Clover, 

Southern     do. 

White  Honeysuckle  Clover, 

Lucerne, 

Herds  grass,  or  Timothy, 

Red  Top  Southern  Seed, 

Do.  Northern  do. 

Fowl  Meadow, 

Orchard  Grass, 

Ruta  Baga, 

Mangel  Wurtzel, 


Sugar  Beet,  <S'C. 

Winter  and  Summer  Wheat, 

do.  do.         Rye, 

Barley, 

Oats,  English, 
Corn  of  various  sorts. 
Millet, 
Hemp, 
Flax  Seed, 
Potatoes. 


GARDEN    SEEDS, 

Of  every  desirable  variety  will  be  furnished  wholesale  and  retail ;  by 
the  pound,  box  or  package. 

SEEDS    IN    BOXES, 

For  retailing,  done  up  in  the  neatest  manner  in  packages,  with  the 
name  and  directions  printed  on  each  parcel.  Retailers  supplied  on  most 
favorable  terms,  with  boxes  from  one  to  a  hundred  dollars. 

FOR    THE    FLOWER    GARDEN. 

We  have  a  very  extensive  collection  of  choice  Flower  Seeds,  em- 
bracing all  the  Annuals,  Biennials,  and  Perennials  worthy  of  cultivation. 
Packages  of  twenty  fine  sorts  for  one  dollar. 

DucTH  Bulbous  Roots.  We  import  of  these  annually  from  Holland, 
a  splendid  collection,  consisting  of  double  and  single  Hyacinths,  double 
and  single  Tulips,  Crown  Imperials,  Narcissus,  Iris,  Crocus  Gladiolus, 
Amaryllis,  Ixias,  &c. 

Double  Dahlia  Roots.  Of  this  beautiful  and  popular  flower,  we 
have  more  than  two  hundred  fine  varieties,  embracing  all  that  were 
shown  at  the  exhibition  of  the  Massachusetts  Horticultural  Society. 
Roots  can  be  furnished  from  the  first  of  October  to  the  first  of  July, 
safely  packed  in  moss,  and  sent  to  any  part  of  the  country. 

Fruit  and  ornamental  Trees  and  Shrubs  furnished  to  order  at  Nurse- 
ry prices. 

Large  plants  of  the  Morus  Multicaulis,  and  cuttings  of  the  same, 
can  be  furnished  by  the  hundred  or  thousand  at  moderate  prices. 

We  would  call  the  attention  of  the  public  to  the  New  England  Far- 
mer ;  one  ot  the  oldest  and  best  agricultural  newspapers  iu  the  country. 


ADVERTISEMENTS.  177 

containing  a  great  amount  of  interesting  and  useful  matter  for  the  prac- 
tical farmer  and  gardener.  It  is  issued  at  our  office  weekly,  on  Wed- 
nesdays, at  the  moderate  price  of  two  dollars  and  fifty  cents  per  year  in 
advance,  or  three  dollars  at  the  close  of  the  year. 

We  also  publish  the  Horticultural  Register,  and  Gardener's 
Magazine,  issued  monthly,  at  two  dollars  per  annum  in  advance,  or 
two  dollars  and  fifty  cents  at  the  expiration  of  six  months.  1  his  work 
is  devoted  principally  to  the  cultivation  of  Fruits,  Vegetables  and  Flow- 
ers. New  subscribers  can  be  supplied  with  the  back  volumes  at  two 
dollars  and  fifty  cents  per  volume  bound. 

Among  our  agricultural  Books  we  keep  for  sale,  the  Complete  Far- 
mer; Kenrick's  Orchadist  ;  American  Gardener  ;  Bridgman's  Garden- 
er's Assistant;  Moubray  on  Poultry;  Silk  Grower's  Guide;  Cobb's 
Silk  Manual ;  Loudon's  Works,  together  with  a  great  variety  of  useful 
and  interesting  works  in  this  line. 

We  hope  by  unremitting  attention,  to  sustain  the  credit  of  this  estab- 
lishment, and  realize  the  anticipations  of  our  predecessors,  Newell, 
Russell,  and  Barrett,  in  makingitone  of  the  most  complete  deposito- 
ries for  every  thing  in  the  Agricultural  and  Horticultural  line  in  the 
country.  JOSEPH  BRECK  &  CO. 


GEORGE  C.  THORBURJV, 

SEEDS  :\I  AN      AND     FLORIST, 

No.   11  John  Street,  New  York. 

George  C.  Thorburn  keeps  constantly  on  hand  the  greatest  variety 
of  Garden  Seeds  of  every  description.  Hyacinths,  Tulips,  Dahlias, 
Narcissus,  Raauncules,Anemoai's,  and  other  Bulbous  Roots,  supplied  on 
favorable  terms.  For  particulars,  as  to  their  names  and  cultivation,  and. 
also  for  Green-house  and  Hot-house  Plants  and  Roses,  a  choice  and  su- 
perb collection  of  which  are  always  on  hand.  The  Greeu-houses  are  at 
Hallet's  Cove,  L.  I.  six  miles  from  New  York. 

Constantly  on  hand,  a  complete  assortment  of  Gardening  Tools  — 
Canary  Birds  of  the  most  approved  song,  and  other  singing  Birds  — 
Bird  Cages  of  every  description;  Fish  Bone  for  Canaries  —  Chinese 
Gold  FLsh  ;  Glass  Globes  —  Garden  Hand  Glasses  of  various  sizes,  for 
protecting  early  Cucumbers  and  Melons,  for  raising  tender  Flower 
Seeds,  and  for  striking  Cuttings  of  Plants  —  Bulb  Glasses,  plain,  color- 
ed, and  gilt,  for  flowering  Hyacinths,  Tulips,  t^'C  in  winter — Pulver- 
ized Poth  erbs  by  the  pound  or  in  bottles  —  Hawthorn  Quicks  for  fences 
or  hedges. 

Also,  a  collection  of  choice  Books,  on  Horticulture,  Agriculture,  Flo- 
riculture, and  Arboriculture.  "The  Planter's  Guide,"  showing  the 
best  method  of  Removing  Large  Trees  and  Underwood  —  with  superb 
Engravings ;  printed  on  fine  paper ;  handsomely  bound ;  price  Tnree 
Dollars. 

Imported  from  Scotland,  every  Spring,  an  extensive  collection  of  the 
finest  Gooseberry  and  Currant  Bushes,  with  names,  price  two  dol- 
lars per  dozen. 

Persons  wishing  Fruit  and  Ornamental  Trees,  are  referred  to  C.  & 
A.  J.  Downing,  Nurserymen,  Newburgh,  N.  Y.  (Newburgh  is  sixty 
miles  from  the  city  of  New  York,  on  the  Hudson  River — Steamboat 
communication  daily.     Orders  to  be  sent  to  them  direct. 


178  ADVERTISEMENTS. 


WINSHIPS'   ESTABLISHMENT. 

The  Messrs.  Winship  have  the  greatest  variety  of  Fruit,  Forest, 
Ornamental  Trees,  Flowering  Shrubs,  Herbaceous  and  Green  house 
Plants,  to  be  found  in  the  country. 

All  orders  forwarded  by  mail  will  be  executed  with  promptness,  or 
plants  may  be  selected  by  persons  visiting  the  Nurseries. 

Brighton,  April  1,  1838. 


FRUIT  TREES,  ORNAMENTAL  TREES,  MORUS 
MULTICAULIS,  &c. 

FOa    SALE    BY 

WILLIAM    KENRICK, 

NONANTUM  HILL,  NEWTON. 

The  varieties,  particularly  of  the  Pears  and  the  Plums  were  never 
before  so  fine,  the  assortment  so  complete.  Also  of  Apples,  Peaches, 
Cherries,  Grape  Vines,  a  superior  assortment  of  the  finest  kinds,  and  of 
all  other  hardy  fruits. 

20,000  Morus  Multicaulis,  or  Chinese  Mulberry  trees,  can  still  be  fur- 
nished at  the  customary  prices,  if  applied  for  early,  this  being  all  that 
now  remains  unsold. 

Ornamental  Trees  and  Shrubs,  Roses  and  Herbaceous  Plants,  of  the 
most  beautiful  hardy  kinds.    Splendid  Paeonies  and  Double  Dahlias. 

4,000  Cockspur  Thorns,  10,000  Buckthorns  for  Hedges- 
800  Lancashire  Gooseberries,  of  various  colors  and  fine  kinds. 
Harrison's  Double  Yellow  Roses,  new  and  hardy,  color  fine,  it  never 
fails  to  bloom  profusely. 

Trees  packed  in  the  most  perfect  manner  for  all  distant  places  and 
shipped  or  sent  from  Boston  to  wherever  ordered. 

Transportation  to  the  city  without  charge. 

Address  by  mail  post  paid. 

Catalogues  will  be  sent  gratis  to  those  who  apply. 

CHARLESTOWIV   VINEYARD. 

{Corner  of  Eden  Street,  Charlestovm,  Mass.) 

THOMAS    MASON, 

Keeps  a  general  assortment  of  Green-house  Plants — with  a  choice 
collection  of  Strawberries,  Raspberries,  Currants,  &c. 

He  offers  for  sale  a  quantity  of  his  Seedling  Grape  Raspberries, 
which  have  been  pronounced  of  superior  quality. 

Orders  may  be  left  with  Joseph  Breck  &  Co.  51  and  52  North 
Market  Street,  Eoston. 


ADVERTISEMENTS.  179 

T.    BRIDGEMAIV, 

GARDEN,  GREENHOUSE   AND  SEED  STORE, 
Corner  of  Eighteenth  Street^  Broadioay, 

IMMEDIATELY    KORTH   OF   UNION    PLACE, 

And  West  of  the  New  York  and  Harlem  Rail  Road, 

NEW    YORK. 

POMOLOGICAL     GARDENS, 

SALEM,  MASSACHUSETTS. 


FRUIT  TREES,  VINES,    SHRUBS, 

AND 

ORNAMENTAL    TREES, 

Warrranted  correct,  constantly  for  sale,  at  the  Pomological  Garden 

of 

ROBERT   MANNING, 

Dearborn  Street,  Salem, 

And  at  JOHN  M.  IVES' adjoining  NURSERY  — packed  for  trans- 
portation, and  at  Nursery  prices. 

SCIONS    OF    FRUIT    TREES,    &c. 

EDWARD  SAYERS, 

BOSTON,  MASS. 

l//^    Ozecicon    cl    Q'lecn    <:/6oud-ed^   .t^aif^'}ia    otU    KJ^lo^uer 

^cuia67t4,    (yinayncnta^  xyuznit/tiq ,    oCc.  aedMned  and 

duhcu7Uended . 

Reference,  JOSEPH  BRECK  &  Co. 

Agricultural  Warehoiise,  51  ^  52  J^orth  Market  street, 

{fUj'AW  letters  of  comnmni cation  must  be  post  paid. 


\/ 


